JP2022000115A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention executes determination on the basis of the establishment of a start condition, and when a symbol variable display executed on the basis of the determination is a special result determined beforehand, can execute a special game advantageous to a player. The game machine has a normal game state and a specific game state more advantageous than the normal game state as game states. In the normal game state, the game machine can variably display, in a predetermined mode, a retention icon and a retention figure according to increase and decrease of the number of retained balls based on the winning of a game ball to a first start port 45. In the specific game state, meanwhile, the game machine can variably display a retention icon according to increase and decrease in the number of retained balls based on the winning of a game ball to the first start port in a specific mode with only a retention figure different from the predetermined mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 166

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the gaming medium in the starting area, and the gaming effect according to the result of the determination is determined. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Some such gaming machines play games by switching the aim between the first starting port and the second starting port.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-033816

If the gaming machine does not win a winning ball at the starting port according to the gaming state or the like, as a result, it may be disadvantageous to the player and the interest of the game may be lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (effect) to be executed based on the determination is made. When the variable display of the symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described as the gaming state. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Alternatively, the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is changed in the display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47). The display can be executed, and in the normal game state, the hold display according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specific game can be displayed. In the state, the hold display according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, does not operate or does not display) different from the predetermined mode.

According to the present invention, the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the customer waiting effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the demo waiting time determination table. It is a figure which shows the look-ahead system effect processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the icon change effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for hold icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the one-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table at the time of a power failure. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the change effect occurrence timing, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing. Yes, (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing, and (d) shows the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (change). It is a figure which shows. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the lamp change effect execution processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the jackpot notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot notice decision table. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the integrated control unit. It is a figure which shows the command reception interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a figure which shows the V blank interrupt processing in a general control unit. It is a timing chart 1 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a timing chart 2 of the change effect at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the production example of the change effect at the time of a prize. It is the timing chart 1 of the normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 2 of the normal change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of a normal change pattern 01. It is the timing chart 1 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the production example of the character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 42. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. It is a timing chart in which the fluctuation effect is started from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the production example which starts the fluctuation effect from the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the fluctuation effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a variable effect. It is a timing chart that the number of holdings increases immediately after the decrease. It is a figure which shows the production example which increases immediately after the holding number decreases. It is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during a specific reach production. It is a figure which shows the effect example which the number of hold increases during a specific reach effect. It is a timing chart that the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of the specific game state. It is a figure which shows the effect example that the number of hold is increased or decreased before and after the end of a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 58. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case that there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power-on-time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the deformation example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 84. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect when the power supply to a game machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in the customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp / drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 1st movable member after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case that there is no return abnormality in various accessories after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is a return abnormality in the 2nd movable member after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after the power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the effect button after the power supply is restored. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the state after power restoration is in the variable display of a special symbol, and there is a hold memory. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power-on designation command could not be received normally at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the power restoration designation command could not be received normally at the time of power ON. It is a figure which shows the specific example in the case where the power-on-time command (power-on designation command, power-rest recovery designation command) cannot be received normally at power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the power supply to a main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 1 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2-4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5-7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the modification of the effect example in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10-12 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 10 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 11 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 12 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 13 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 14 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the effect example in the specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 2 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 3 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 of an image change effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the specific example 1 of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the specific example 2 of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 of an image change effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the specific example 3 of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 4 of an image change effect. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the specific example 4 of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the image change effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the effect example when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 4 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when the condition is not satisfied in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the effect by a color effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a zone effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the hold icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the operation effect of the 1st movable member. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production specific example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a light guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal gaming state in a production specific example 2. It is a figure which shows the normal game state of the effect specific example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific gaming state in a specific production example 2. It is a figure which shows the specific game state of the production specific example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 3. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 3. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the fluctuation time. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the preparation operation. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the stop operation. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the fluctuation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the fluctuation start pattern. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 4. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the mode change effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change effect of the effect symbol. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the display size change effect of a reach effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the production specific example 5. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 5. It is a figure which shows the production specific example 6. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of the notification effect. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of a vibration effect. It is a front view which showed an example of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view which showed an example of the back surface side of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the game control device provided in the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the state which each unit is assembled to the base frame body. It is a partially disassembled perspective view of FIG. 197. It is explanatory drawing of various random numbers acquired in the main control board of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process of a main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the start port SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of a control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the special symbol processing performed by the CPU of a main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the customer waiting setting processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the special game determination processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the variation pattern selection process executed by the CPU of a main control board. It is a figure which showed an example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the stopped processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the big prize opening processing executed by the CPU of a main control board. It is a figure which showed the setting example of the number of rounds / operation pattern. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the game state setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the 2nd start opening opening process which is executed by the CPU of a main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of an effect control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the command reception process executed by the CPU of an effect control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the processing during the end of a variation effect executed by the CPU of an effect control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the hit effect selection process executed by the CPU of an effect control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of an effect control board. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case which concerns on an example of this embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including a pedestal. It is a side view which shows the mode when the main board protection case is attached to a pedestal. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case which concerns on other example of this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of FIG. 225. It is a figure explaining the state which removed the main board protection case of FIG. 225 from a pedestal. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the identification display on the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification which forms the identification display on the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the main board case. It is the figure which looked at the seal part and the main ROM from the rear diagonally above. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of a main control board. It is a figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main board case which accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236. It is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case of FIG. 216. It is a schematic diagram which shows the procedure of assembling the cutting member, the opening prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base part centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before assembling the cutting member, the opening prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base portion 310. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the opening prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base part. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the cap is attached to the opening prohibition seal. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the cap is detached and the opening prohibition seal is broken. It is a surface view of an example of an opening prohibition seal, and a partially enlarged view. It is a figure which shows the component layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of the payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of an image control board. It is a figure which showed the structure of the printed circuit board used for the image control board. It is a figure which enlarged and showed a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board. It is a front view explaining the structure of the effect control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect control board case. It is a figure for demonstrating another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board explained with FIG. 255 is housed. It is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255. It is a figure explaining still another structure of the main control board which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 5 is a front view of the main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described with reference to FIG. 258 is housed. It is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 259. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device and a performance display part at the time of clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device, a performance display part, and a setting display part at the time of setting change when a gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device, a performance display part, and a setting display part at the time of setting change when a gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately. It is a figure which shows the display transition of the image display device and the performance display part at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine has a performance display part which also serves as a setting display part. It is a figure which shows the display transition of an image display device, a performance display part, and a setting display part at the time of setting confirmation when a gaming machine has a performance display part and a setting display part separately.

(First Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, and various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window portion) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed so as to close the opening 8 from the rear. Is attached, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. The upper plate 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, the lower plate 12 for receiving and storing the game balls that have flowed into the overflow ball flow path described later without being able to fit in the upper plate 11, and the game balls. A launch operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, audio). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED). Further, the frame lighting device 10 includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to light / blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or a payout abnormality described later occurs.

In the upper plate 11, the bottom surface of the storage portion 11a of the game ball is inclined downward toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper plate 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper plate 11, there are an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for performing determination operations and selection operations related to various effects described later. It is installed side by side on the left and right.

The effect button device 16 includes an effect button 17 (not shown) capable of performing a determination operation (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and an effect button. A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the 17 is provided, and a player can input predetermined information to the game machine 1.

The effect button 17 can perform effect light emission by lighting the effect button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode, and is button-driven. Moving in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the effect position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the device 17b, and / or the button drive device 17b. It is possible to perform an effect operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode by the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is a part of the button vibration motor, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is in the origin position. Ru.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (not shown) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 2) is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, on the right side portion of the upper plate 11, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the balance stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted to lend the gaming ball. Is performed, and when the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for accepting a game ball that does not fit in the upper plate 11 and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 12 is formed between the upper plate 11 and the lower plate 12. Further, a saucer full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) for detecting that the game ball is full in the lower plate 12 is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, and the lower plate 12 is full by the saucer full detection switch 32a. Is detected, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the player's hand are touching the launch handle 15. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a 15a (see FIG. 2) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emission for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes a front side portion of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges forward, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined mode.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, a game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A lock mechanism 27 for locking the 4 to the closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The launching device 26 has a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launching member 28, and an ascending member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. An inclined launch rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a launch position at the lower end of the inclination of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guiding member for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 is provided. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, an out port 39 for guiding the flowing game ball to the outside of the game area (collection part of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed in the most downstream part of the game area 5a.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, on the side of the decorative frame 40, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40 is provided, and at the lower part of the decorative frame 40, the decorative frame 40 is provided by the warp device 41. There is provided a stage portion 42 that rolls the game ball introduced inside the frame 40 and causes it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and these general winning openings are provided. When the game balls that have won (winned) in 43 are detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). It is paid out to the upper plate 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 (normal map start area) through which the game ball can pass is provided, and the game ball passing through the normal map gate 44 is provided. When it is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) of a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45 (special drawing starting area) is provided below the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, on which a game ball can always win (win), and the first starting port 45 is provided. When the winning (winning) game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is supposed to be paid out to 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, the game ball is from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball (winning ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a lottery for winning a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (ball winning) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 detects a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) in which the game ball can win (winning) and a second starting port 47 (special drawing starting area) for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball in the second starting port 47. A start port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variable) the second start port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second start port open / close solenoid for opening / closing the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2) is provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It is designed to be paid out to the upper plate 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

A winning port lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 to emit light in a predetermined manner around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46. It is possible to produce light emission by emitting light from a panel lighting device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full-color LED or the like).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a big hit lottery of a special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided, which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), and a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting the winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50 (Fig.). 2), an opening / closing member 51 that converts (variablely) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are used as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100. It will be paid out to 11.

On the back side of the game board 5, the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50 are won, and the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, A game ball detected by the second start port detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball flow path that receives and collects the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39 and flows down are provided. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream portion of the ball flow path. The gaming ball that has flowed down the out-ball flow path and is detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a is discharged to the outside (island equipment) of the gaming machine 1 from the discharge port on the back surface side of the gaming machine 1.

On the outside of the game area 5a, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol hold display 63, a second special symbol hold display 64, as well as. The normal symbol hold display 65, the round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when the jackpot game (special game) described later is executed, and the jackpot game (special game) or the time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a, and a status confirmation display indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set. A main information display device 59 including a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is affixed in the vicinity of the main information display device 59 (not shown). On the winning probability display sticker, the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4-1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment are printed. The sticking position of the winning probability display sticker 200 is an example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is a variable display, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is a vessel.

The big hit lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit judgment random value and a big hit by acquiring a big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is the big hit judgment random value and the big hit by acquiring the big hit judgment random value etc. (judgment information) when the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing it with the determination value. When the big hit lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Will be. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of each special symbol. do. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode, loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "big hit" means a big hit game (special game) in the big hit lottery (special game judgment) of the first special symbol or the big hit lottery (special game judgment) of the second special symbol. It refers to the state in which the right to execute is acquired. The "big hit game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game)" is in an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games having different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The winning lottery of a normal symbol is a "hit" by acquiring a hit determination random value when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44 and comparing the acquired hit determination random value with the hit determination value. Corresponds to determining whether or not. When the winning lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol display 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The ordinary symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variation display of the ordinary symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit game (auxiliary game)" is in a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition of the variation display is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit games (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The jackpot lottery of the first special symbol (of the first special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first reserved storage. In addition, although the first hold storage is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

The second special symbol hold display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The second special symbol jackpot lottery (of the second special symbol). It is for displaying the number of rights (second reserved storage) for performing variable display), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second reserved storage. The maximum number of the second reserved storages is four, but the number may be less than or more than four.

The normal symbol hold display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (passes) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Public figure hold storage), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of normal figure hold storage. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved storages for the normal figure is four, the number may be less than or more than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and / or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and "-". It is good to repeat. Before the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed by turning on the LED, so when the variation display starts, the variation display can be displayed by starting from turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand that it has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 2 jackpot games, only the fourth LED from the left is lit, and if the number of rounds is 16 jackpot games, all the LEDs are lit.

The right-handed display 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-handed LED that prompts the player to launch a game ball toward the right-handed game area (so-called right-handed) during a jackpot state (special game state) and a time-saving game state. It is for displaying the hitting display, and the LED lights up during the big hit state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation display 68 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set, and is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the mode shifts to, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the LED turns off. As described above, since the state confirmation indicator 68 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is provided. It is possible to easily check whether or not it is set to.

The installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is an example, and is not limited to the installation position of the present embodiment, and may be the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it is possible to recognize which setting is set. You may. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinked. However, when the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 is lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be lit and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it can also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are turned off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of any of the display devices of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

In the lower right inside the game area 5a, a sub first fluctuation display 81, a sub second fluctuation display 82, a sub first hold display 83, a sub second hold display 84, and a sub normal figure fluctuation display 85. , A sub-information display device 80 including a sub-normal-figure holding display 86 and a sub-right-handed display 87 for urging a game ball to be launched toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) is provided. The sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display device such as the status confirmation display device 68 described above, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set.

The sub first variation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, and the sub second variation indicator 82 displays the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol. It is for (notifying), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the corresponding special symbol is started, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (variation display), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (lights up or loses in the case of a jackpot). In the case of, the light is turned off) is displayed as a stop.

It should be noted that the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 and the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82 blink and stop during the fluctuation display of the special symbol so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the special symbol is being performed can be grasped. When it is displayed, it may be turned on or off.

The sub first hold display 83 is for displaying the number of first hold storages, and the sub second hold display 84 is for displaying the number of second hold storages, respectively, left and right. It is composed of two LEDs. Then, when the number of reserved storage is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of reserved storage is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off, and the number of reserved storage is "2". At this time, the left and right LEDs light up, the left LED blinks when the hold storage number is "3", the right LED lights up, and the left and right LEDs blink when the hold storage number is "4". ..

The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the LED blinks (variation display) at a predetermined interval. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a hit, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-normal symbol variation display 85, it blinks during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and turns on or off when the stop display is displayed so that only whether or not the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed can be grasped. You may.

The sub-normal figure hold display 86 is for displaying the number of normal figure hold storages, and is composed of two LEDs arranged side by side. Then, when the number of reserved storages for the normal figure is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, and when the number of stored storages for the normal figure is "1", the LED on the left side is turned on and the LED on the right side is turned off. When the number of stored items is "2", the LED on the left side blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the number of stored items on hold is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and is below the effect space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) composed of a liquid crystal display having a display area smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is provided, and a character's face is above the effect space 40a. A first movable member 73 imitating the above is provided, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the effect space 40a.

The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) performs various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, a customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed, and an effect symbol executed during the change display of the special symbol. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a.

The display unit (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with three columns of variable display areas such as a left side area, a central area, and a right side area, and is displayed in each variable display area. By scrolling the effect symbol 70a in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, symbols showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of the special symbol executed by the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. Corresponding to (synchronizing with), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. That is, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (oscillation display) before the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the special symbol is displayed. Corresponding to the stop display of the display, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display). As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

The "temporary stop display" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is slightly deformed to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not) to say the aspect.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as reach effects, background images, characters, and movies are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), the player's expectation that the jackpot (special game) will be executed (hereinafter referred to as "big hit winning expectation") has been increased. There is.

Here, the "reach effect" means that a jackpot game is executed for a player in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a variation mode that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side region and the right side region. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", and "full rotation reach effect".

The "normal reach effect" is a state in which the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side area and the right side area, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a is in the center area. It is a reach effect that is executed in a state where a fluctuating reach state is formed.

The "SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a in the state where the reach state is formed is reduced and displayed in the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (high expectation of a big hit). ) It is a reach production in which a movie (movie, animation, etc.) is played.

"SPSP reach production" is a reach that is executed after the normal reach production or SP reach production, and a movie (movie, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (high expectation of a big hit) than the normal reach production or SP reach production is played. It is a production.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that fluctuates at a low speed with all combinations of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a big hit. In the present embodiment, it is a reach effect that is executed only when the jackpot lottery is won.

In the present embodiment, the expectation of winning a big hit related to the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect <SP reach effect <SPSP reach effect <full rotation reach effect (big hit confirmed).

Further, in order to display the number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1), which is the current number of first hold storages, on the display unit of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). 1st hold icon display area 70B and a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons corresponding to the current number of second hold icons (U2). And, the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (related) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed is formed.

The first hold icon display area 70B is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first special symbol hold number (U1). That is, the number of the first hold icons is increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the first special symbol hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold storage in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 displays 2 First, the first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70B3. The first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory is displayed, and the first hold icon H14 showing the first hold memory on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70B4. Will be done.

The second hold icon display area 70D is partitioned from the side closer to the icon display area 70C in the form of a first display unit 70D1, a second display unit 70D2, a third display unit 70D3, a fourth display unit 70D4, and the like. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second hold icons corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2). That is, the number of the second hold icons also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold storage in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70D2 displays 2 Second, the second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold memory on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third on the third display unit 70D3. The second hold icon H23 indicating the second hold memory is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 showing the second hold memory in which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display unit 70D4. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "first hold number" and the "second special symbol hold number" may be referred to as the "second hold number".

The icon display area 70C is the first hold icon or the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B corresponding to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70D1 of the hold icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The icon TH disappears (erases). The icon may be extinguished in the middle of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In the present embodiment, the "first hold icon", the "second hold icon", and the "corresponding icon" may be collectively referred to as an "icon".

The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. In the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the effect position located below due to the driving force of the first movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving to, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. Between the standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and the production position located in the lower left due to the driving force of the second movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform the effect operation by moving diagonally in the vertical direction, and the second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the position is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their production positions partially overlap with each other, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 basically operate at the same time. By not doing so, they do not collide with each other.

If the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, at the stage where one movable member moves to the effect position and then returns to a position that does not overlap with the effect position of the other movable member. The other movable member may be moved to the effect position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, from a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball lending), island equipment, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that collectively controls the progress of the game. The payout control device 120A (not shown) having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 in response to the payout control command from the main control board 110, and the effect control command from the main control board 110. An effect control device 130A (not shown) with a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect accordingly, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) with a built-in power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal plate 90 (see FIG. 2) for outputting game information (game signal) is provided outside the game machine.

The main control device 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted on the surface, a transparent resin board case for accommodating the main control board 110 inside, and a board case for restricting the opening of the board case. The seal seal 104 and the transparent resin-based seal cover member 105 attached to the substrate case so as to cover the seal seal 104 are provided.

On the surface side of the main control board 110, the stored contents of the main control unit 110m composed of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game and the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m are cleared or the game is at the stage of the advantage of the game (game). (Different advantages) RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal for updating the set value, a signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by an operation using the setting key. The setting key switch 112a for inputting the above, the information display 113 for displaying the performance information and the set value that enable the actual performance of the game machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are mounted.

The information display 113 is for displaying set values and performance information (normal base values described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having a decimal point DP are arranged side by side. It is composed of things. Then, an identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured on the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and the two seven-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits are configured. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating numerical values of set values and performance information is configured.

The board case includes a concave chamber-shaped lower case member in which the portion facing the back surface side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave chamber-shaped upper case member in which the portion facing the front surface side of the main control board 110 is opened. By closing the lower case member and the upper case member, a storage space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, a model name sticker on which the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 is printed so as not to overlap the information display 113 in the front-rear direction, and a management number on which the control number of the main control board 110 is printed are printed. The number stickers are attached side by side. Further, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operation member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a, an insertion portion (not shown) for inserting the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed. This insertion portion has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a tubular portion extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. is doing. Then, when the setting key is inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turned to the right from the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned on and the setting key cannot be pulled out from the keyhole, and is turned to the left. When the position is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key is removed from the keyhole.

The control number sticker has an opener entry section for entering the name of the opener of the main control board 110 and an opening date entry section for entering the opening date of the main control board 110 on the surface of the colorless and transparent base seal. It is installed side by side on the left and right.

The opener entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is provided on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opener entry section are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry section at intervals, and the surface of the main control board 110 is located between the entry areas. A transparent window area is provided for visually recognizing (visually confirming) the electronic components mounted on the.

As the information display 113, a performance display unit in which a circuit unit including four 7-segment displays and a board may be unitized may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable to arrange them so that they do not overlap each other in the front-rear direction so that the visibility is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker and the control number sticker.

Further, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, and the information display 113 is mounted on the dedicated board. It may be mounted and board-to-board connected to the main control board 110 so as to be included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Further, the RWM clear switch 111a is not mounted on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, but is provided on the power supply board 160 if the player cannot operate the switch. It may be provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 or may be provided on the back surface side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

Further, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the stored contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch for inputting the signal of may be provided. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on a dedicated board included in the main control board 110 or the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be positioned as a position that the player cannot operate. It may be provided on the 160, on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back surface side of the glass frame 4.

Further, instead of displaying both the performance information and the set value on the information display 113, another display is executed on the main control board 110 or the dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and eventually. The performance information may be displayed on one of the indicators, and the set value may be displayed on the other indicator.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer provided with a main CPU 110a for performing arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b in which a game control program and the like are stored, and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to a volatile storage means) serving as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is provided with a main control unit 110 m as a main control unit, an input port for main control, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the game, thereby controlling devices (various solenoids and various displays). The device) is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, information display 113, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. When detection signals from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing according to the detection signals is performed.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a main information display device 59, and a game information output. The terminal plate 90, the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and games notified to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the game information output terminal board via the output port. Information etc. are output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

Access to the memory area of the main ROM 110b is prohibited: a game ROM area in which programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area in which programs and data related to the performance display of the game machine are stored. A vector table in which an unused area of 16 bytes or more in which "0" is stored, a ROM comment area in which data such as a program title and version are stored, and a start address of a timer interrupt process described later are set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and the end address of the access prohibited area are set are arranged in order.

The game ROM area contains a game program area in which a program related to the progress of the game is stored, a first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area in which a program related to the performance display of the gaming machine is stored, an unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. The information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a game RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a game program and an information RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing an information program are arranged in order. There is.

The game RWM area temporarily stores the game work area used as the work by the game program, the first unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the game program. A game stack area for temporarily evacuating and a second unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in order.

The game work area changes depending on the progress of the game, the set value area for storing the set value, the judgment information area for storing the judgment information (checksum described later) for judging an abnormality in the RWM area, and the game progress. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area temporarily saves the information work area used as the work by the information program, the unused area in which access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and the data being processed by the information program. Information stack areas are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in order.

Hereinafter, a game area (game ROM area, game RWM area) for processing based on the game program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) for processing based on the information program Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on the game program, it basically refers to the game data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the game RWM area while using the game RWM area as a work. ing. Further, when performing processing based on an information program, basically, the information data area is referred to, and the contents of the information RWM area are referred to and updated while using the information RWM area as a work. ing.

However, in the process based on the game program, the content of the information RWM area cannot be updated, but it can be referred to. Further, in the process based on the information program, the contents of the game RWM area cannot be updated, but can be referred to.

Then, when performing processing based on the information program, in the processing based on the game program, after saving the flag register in the game RWM area, the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program, and the information is used. Immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the program returns to the game program, the flag register is returned from the game RWM area.

Immediately after the start of the information program, the stack pointer of the game stack area is saved in the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all the registers used in the game program are used in the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program are returned from the information RWM area immediately before the end of the information program, and the stack pointer in the game stack area is returned.

By doing so, it is possible to protect the data used by the game program when performing processing based on the information program, and inconvenience occurs when the information program returns to the game program. There will be no such thing.

The payout control board 120 is a secondary control board that controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout command from the main control board 110 and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, and the like. .. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and performs a game ball payout device. 100 is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the like. Is connected, and a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to perform control to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and is controlled by the payout ball detection switch 100a. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control of paying out the game balls is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, the launch control unit 122 allows the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the detection signal from the launch volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the launch intensity is set according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. The solenoid 28b is driven to launch a game ball.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 is a slave control board (subordinate control means) that controls the effect (performed by the gaming machine 1) related to the game based on the reception of the effect command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device 70 (main). Display / sound control unit 140 that controls the liquid crystal display), the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), the sound output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the panel. It is provided with a lamp / drive control unit 150 that controls a lighting device 76, a panel drive device 75, and the like, and an input port, an output port, and the like for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. Controls are performed to cause various control units (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in response to input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a (display / voice control unit 140, lamp / drive control unit 150). Output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the effect key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display / voice control unit 140 is controlled to display a predetermined image on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) in response to a command from the effect control unit 130m. Or control the sound output device 9 to output a predetermined sound.

The display / voice control unit 140 includes a centralized CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an integrated ROM 143 that stores an integrated control program, an integrated control unit 141 that has an integrated RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and VDP as an image processor ( An image control unit 145 consisting of a Video Display Processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, and a frame buffer and the like provided inside the image control unit 145 and temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. It includes a VRAM 147, a voice control unit 148 as a voice processor, a voice ROM 149 in which voice data and the like are stored, an input / output port and the like.

The control CPU 142 receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the control ROM 143, performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the control RAM 144 as a work area, and receives the command from the effect control unit 130 m. The image control unit 145 and the voice control unit 148 are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are output) in response to the effect instruction command and the like.

The general ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM or the like, and displays a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and an animation of an effect pattern. The animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is included.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 that stores various image data, and is stored in the CGROM 146 and commands (display list, drawing command, etc.) from the general control unit 141 (general CPU 142). The drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the image data. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, an effect symbol image and a background image constituting the background of the effect symbol. , Character images, and material data representing individual images such as dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed of composite (superimposed) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprites, movies), etc., which are a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 146 is read out in image data units by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in image data units of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 146 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data. Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 143 has a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and a second image display device 71 (sub). It has a frame buffer area and the like corresponding to the liquid crystal display).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) uses the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 as a "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the control unit 141 (control CPU 142). The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), which draws on the image, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and The data is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the image control unit 145 (VDP) from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display are displayed. A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is generated, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) Output to. In the present embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = about 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = about 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Further, a general-purpose image data is converted into a predetermined image format and output between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The board 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) for displaying image data and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. Absorb.

The voice control unit 148 is connected to the voice output device 9, and is the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. 2 Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display).

The lamp / drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp / drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input / output port, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp / drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby performing arithmetic processing related to the effect from the effect control unit 130 m. In response to the received effect instruction command or the like, control is performed to cause a controlled device such as various lighting devices or various drive devices to perform a predetermined effect (outputs data and commands).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a panel lighting device 76, and a sub information display device 80 are connected to the input / output ports of the lamp / drive control unit. Lighting of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the 130m (sub CPU 130a). It controls and controls drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the button drive device 17b and the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates a main power supply (operating power supply) necessary for operating the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and uses the main power supply as the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, etc.). It is supplied to the effect control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power failure detection circuit 162 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 163 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 when the power is cut off (power failure) is provided.

Further, the power supply board 160 is for switching between an ON state in which the main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the main power is stopped. The power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk of the game store, and when the power switch is turned on, the main power supply is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power failure detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 163 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is applied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. Supply. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even when the power is cut off (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power cut (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, the state relating to the jackpot lottery of the special symbol has a "low probability gaming state" and the "high probability gaming state", and the state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47 is a "non-time saving game". It has a "state" and a "time saving game state".

In this embodiment, the following three gaming states are provided.
(1) Low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "non-time-saving gaming state" (2) Low-probability time-saving gaming state that is "low-probability gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" (3) " High-probability time-saving game state that is both "high-probability game state" and "time-saving game state"

The gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low probability non-time saving gaming state", and this gaming state is set to the "normal gaming state" in the present embodiment. I will call it. In the present embodiment, the "low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state" and the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" may be referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ..

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" is, for example, the first starting port 45 or the first starting port 45 when the set value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery) at the stage of the advantage of the game is "1". , A game state in which the winning probability of a big hit is set as low as about 1/300 in a big hit lottery of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and when the set value is "1", the jackpot winning probability is as high as about 1/60. Says the set game status.

Specifically, there are four types of set values, "1" to "4", and when the set value is "1", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/300, which is high. The winning probability of the jackpot in the probability gaming state is about 1/60, and when the set value is "2", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/295, and the jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The winning probability is about 1/59, and when the set value is "3", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is about 1/290, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is about 1/58. When the set value is "4", the winning probability of the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is about 1/285, and the winning probability of the jackpot in the high-probability gaming state is about 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". Further, the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is called "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is a change in the average of the ordinary symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44. It refers to a game state in which the time is set longer than the "short-time game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winner is won is set short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol display 62 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". Say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advantageously advance the game without consuming the game ball.

In the embodiment, the "time-saving game state" has more advantages than the "non-time-saving game state" in terms of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Is set. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. .. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high-probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low-probability gaming state (common regardless of the set value). The probability of being determined to be is not limited to 5 times, and any value such as 3 times or 8 times may be set as long as the value is 10 times or less.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the big hit lottery, the small hit that is less advantageous to the advantager than the big hit is not won, but for example, the small hit is won with a probability of about 1/100. May be. In this case, it is preferable that the small hit probabilities are the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the set value, the more advantageous to the player (higher jackpot probability). You may do it.

Further, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability gaming state and / or the high probability gaming state may be the same in all the set values (1 to 4), for example, two or three set values (2 or 3 set values). In 1 and 2, 1, 3, etc.), the probabilities of being determined to be big hits in the low-probability gaming state and / or the high-probability gaming state may be the same.

Further, the set value of the present embodiment is 4 steps of 1 to 4, but the setting value is not limited to 4 steps, and may be more or less than 4 steps.

(Type of jackpot game)
Next, the types of jackpot games will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45, "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "first" There are "1st jackpot game" and "2nd jackpot game" as the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting port 47. is doing.

In the "first big hit game", a round game is executed up to 10 times in which the big winning opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the big winning opening 50 is closed for 2 seconds. In the round game, one round game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

After the end of the first big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

The "second big hit game" is to execute a round game up to 10 times. After the end of the second big hit game, the game is set to a low-probability time-saving game state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third big hit" means that a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third big hit game, the high-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, from the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is substantially determined.

It should be noted that the number of variable display times (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10000 times) of the specific game state (high-probability short-time game state, low-probability short-time game state) set after the big hit game is referred to as "high probability". It may be expressed as "number of times" or "time reduction number of times".

In the present embodiment, the types of jackpot games are three types, but the types are not limited to three types, and may be less than or more than three types. Further, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds for any big hit game (first big hit game to third big hit game), but the opening time does not have to be 29.5 seconds. The opening time may differ depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of hits will be described.

In the present embodiment, as the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the Fuzu Gate 44, there are "first winning game" and "second winning game". If it is in a non-time-saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it is a "first winning game", and if it is in a time-saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it is a "second winning game".

The "first hit game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for up to 0.2 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second hit game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. That is, it is a hit game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In the first hit game and the second hit game, the hit game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the large winning opening 50 even before the opening time elapses.

In this way, in the "time-saving game state", the game ball is easily won in the second starting port 47, and the player is more advantageous in the game without consuming the game ball than in the "non-time-saving game state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interruptions in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S2, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device 26.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is transferred to step S7 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is transferred to step S8 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S8 whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S9 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is transferred to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting change designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, every time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is set. When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area as the setting value is confirmed, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 ends. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and a process for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting change designation command performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 are displayed on the setting changing screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are predetermined while the setting is being changed. It is fully lit with the emission color (for example, white) of. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area and the checksum calculated in step S7 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area for games), the process is transferred to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area for games is abnormal), the process is started. Assuming that the control state before the power is cut off cannot be restored normally, the process is transferred to step S12.

When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process is performed in step S12. Transfer.

The main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibits timer interruption After setting interrupt prohibition and clearing the output port, an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the non-recoverable error notification.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the game cannot be controlled), and the error cannot be cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then turned on without the setting change operation, the power switch is not canceled and the setting is made. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

It should be noted that the "unrecoverable error" is not canceled unless the setting change process is executed, but it may be canceled even when the RWM clear without the setting change process is executed.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification for recognizing that an unrecoverable error has occurred, and the unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Setting change" is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71. Please go. " It is to output an unrecoverable error sound (“Unrecoverable error” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been cut off.
The audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the panel lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as a “directing device”.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S13 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S14 as if the RWM clear operation is executed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed.

In step S15, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state), and the payout control board 120 and It is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the process is transferred to step S21. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on on the image display devices 70 and 71. ) Is displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), and the sound output device 9 to the RWM area is displayed. It is to output a power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) indicating that it has been initialized for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is transferred to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the set value area of the game RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. The current setting value saved in is displayed, and the setting confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Further, when there is a confirmation end operation in which the setting key switch 112a changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, and the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated. Performs processing to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, the effect control board 130 that has received the setting confirmation designation command performs a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation has been performed. Specifically, a screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71, and a predetermined light emission is performed while the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 are being confirmed. All lights are turned on by color (for example, white). The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting value is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and the checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the effect control board 130 a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure. As a result, in the effect control board 130, a process for terminating the setting confirmation notification and the like, which will be described later, and executing the power restoration notification is performed.

The "power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the image display devices 70 and 71 are notified of the initial screen (background image and initial effect) at the time of power restoration. The design "135") can be displayed, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 can be fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, blue) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the sound output device 9 can be displayed. It is to output a power recovery notification sound (“power has been restored” + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power failure) over a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power recovery notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, the image display devices 70 and 71 may display a display notifying that the power has been restored.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a indicates other commands (a special symbol storage designation command indicating a first special symbol hold number (U1), a second special symbol hold number (U2), and a normal symbol hold number (G). (Ordinary symbol memory designation command, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of special figure hold and the number of normal figure hold, and the process for displaying the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the first image display device 70 can be performed. It will be done.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the set value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random number value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol and the special symbol determination random value, and in step S25, the jackpot determination is performed. Initial value random value update processing is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S24 to detect the power failure. If a signal is input, the process proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S28, and in step S29, sets the game RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c. The checksum (abnormality determination data) of (excluding) is calculated and saved in the game RWM area, and in step S30, the backup flag is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, the backup flag is saved. Performs a process to prohibit RAM access and waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, so fraudulent activities can be suppressed and the security of the gaming machine is improved. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, if the value in the set value area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power failure may have occurred during the setting change, the unrecoverable error processing is executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine by preventing the game from progressing in a state where the setting value not intended by the game store is set. Become.

Further, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode) or the setting is being confirmed (during the setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking 10 and the lighting device 76 for the panel, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). ing. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state as a condition. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

Further, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (it is the first power-on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. However, when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. Then, the process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game program initializes the game RWM area (clears 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the set value area. , The process may be transferred to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game status, but after the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent, the current game status is sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c is calculated by the game program, but the checksum is calculated by the information program. May be calculated. In this case, the calculated checksum may be saved in the information RWM area.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the unrecoverable error processing.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on specification command, the setting change end specification command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

Further, when the setting is changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the setting change is performed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the setting change is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) on the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the special game timer counter such as the update process of the special symbol time counter, the release time of the special electric accessory, and the like. Time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as update processing of the normal symbol time counter, update processing of the opening / closing time of the movable member 48, and the like. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a start port open timer counter, and a start port close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for determining a special symbol, a random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for determining a normal symbol, and a random number for determining a normal symbol. Performs specific random number update processing to update the random number value. Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the round, it corresponds. Initial value to be set The random number value is set as a new lap initial value and the random number value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination in step S130, as in step S30. Initial value to be updated Random value Update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a includes a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a gate detection switch 44a, an out ball detection switch 52a, and the like. It is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches, and if there is an input, input control processing for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol memory determination (big hit determination, etc.), special symbol display control, opening / closing control of the big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), game state control, and the like. Perform processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 7.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol memory control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening / closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. ..

It should be noted that the type of the hit normal symbol and the type of the lost normal symbol determined as the judgment result of the normal figure determination information performed by the normal figure and normal electric control process are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the game playability is not too complicated, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of the normal symbols for each type and the selection ratio of the various lost ordinary symbols, which are determined as the judgment result of the normal symbol judgment information performed by the normal map and electric control process, are constant without changing depending on the set value. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player does not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation designation command for confirming the payout state of the payout control board 120 to the payout control board 120, or a prize ball counter (three prize ball counters, which will be described later). With reference to the 10 prize ball counter and the 15 prize ball counter), a payout control process for transmitting a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings to the payout control board 120 is performed. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out the prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality, and specifies a magnetic abnormality error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation. Performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting a command to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the magnetic anomaly error designation command or the radio wave abnormality error designation command, it controls to perform the magnetic anomaly error notification and the radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, starting port opening / closing data output to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening opening / closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol hold indicator Performs data creation processing for creating data such as special symbol hold display data to be output to 63 and the second special symbol hold display 64, and normal symbol hold display data to be output to the normal symbol hold display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a has port output processing for outputting signals such as external information data, start opening opening / closing data, and large winning opening opening / closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , Display output processing to output signals such as special symbol hold display data, normal symbol hold display data, and payout command transmission process to send commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Or, an output control process for executing an effect command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the effect control board 130 is performed.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs information program call-time processing. Specifically, after the interruption is prohibited, the flag register is saved in the game RWM area, and a process for calling the target information program by the CALL instruction is performed.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process (information program). Specifically, the number of payouts during normal game, which is the number of payouts of prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning openings (general winning opening, starting opening of large winning opening) during normal gaming state, and out during normal gaming state. A process is performed to count the number of normal medium outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, the number of normal payouts, and the number of normal outs are game information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for grasping the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((normal medium payout number ÷ normal medium out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. The process of saving the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place is performed in the first area of.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. The second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, the third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and the normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, for displaying on the information display 113 while switching the normal base values (performance information) for the four game sections calculated by the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area every 5 seconds. Performs the process of setting the performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program) in step S870. Specifically, a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1 is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs an output control process (information program) in step S880. Specifically, a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 to various indicators and a process for outputting signals such as test data created in step S870 are performed. ..

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs a game program return time process. Specifically, a process for returning the flag register from the game RWM area, permitting interruption, and returning to the game program is performed.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a returns the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the timer interrupt process this time.

In this way, since the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, the RWM clear processing, and the setting confirmation processing, the number of payouts and outs is counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is calculated, and the gaming machine is used. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the general winning opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When the detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the data indicating 10 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (10 prize ball counter) for the general winning opening used for the prize balls and updated. Then, "1" is added to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening to update (D ← D + 1), and then the general winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When the detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the data indicating 15 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (15 prize ball counters) for the large prize opening used for the prize balls. Update and update (D ← D + 1) by adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning opening, and whether or not the game is currently a big hit game (special game). Is determined. If you are currently playing a big hit, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that won the big winning opening 50 and update (C ← C + 1) to get the big winning opening. The detection switch input process ends.

If the current game state is not in the special game state, an illegal winning ball indicating the number of game balls that have won (winned) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, large winning opening 50) outside the winning period. "1" is added to the counter (E) and updated (E ← E + 1), and it is determined whether or not the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number (for example, 10), and the illegal winning is won. When the value of the ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is larger than the specified number, it is assumed that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred in which the game ball wins (wins) outside the winning period, and an error for illegal winning is specified. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the error designation command for illegal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 notifies that the illegal winning error has occurred to notify that the illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal plate 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared to detect a large winning opening. The switch input process ends. As a result, the illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal plate 90, and it becomes possible to grasp (specify) that the illegal winning has occurred in the external device.

The main CPU 110a performs the first start port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The main CPU 110a performs the second start port detection switch input process in step S240. In this second start port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first start port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6 to be described later is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If the detection signal is not input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When the detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of normal figure hold storage, which is the number of normal figure hold storage stored in the normal symbol hold storage area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved figures is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of holdings of the normal figure is less than 4, "1" is added to the number of holdings of the normal figure to update it, and the normal figure judgment information (random value for hit judgment, random value for normal symbol determination, normal figure fluctuation pattern) is updated. (Random value for determination) is acquired, the vacant storage unit is searched in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and the acquired normal figure judgment information is stored in the vacant storage unit and input. End the control process.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a determines in step S230-1 whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, the process is transferred to step S230-2, and when the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is not input, the current first step is performed. 1 Start port detection switch Input processing is completed.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating data indicating three prize balls to the three prize ball counter used for the prize balls, and in step S230-3, the special figure determination information ( The jackpot determination random value, the special symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value) are acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) is not less than 4, the first start of this time is performed. Mouth detection switch Ends input processing.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1), and in step S230-6, the updated first special The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of first special symbol reservations.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and inputs the acquired special figure determination information to the vacant storage units. Remember.

As described above, the special symbol determination information (big hit determination random value, special symbol determination random value, reach determination random value, and special symbol variation pattern determination) is stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. The first hold storage consisting of random values, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process in step S230-8. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referred to, and the special figure judgment information (first hold storage) acquired this time is displayed before the variation display of the special symbol based on the judgment information is performed. Judgment is made, and the scheduled fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-8 in the transmission data storage area for production, and this time. The first start port detection switch input process of the above is terminated.

As a result, the scheduled fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start port prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start port prize designation command receives the first start port prize. The designated command is analyzed, and a predetermined notice effect is produced over one or a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start opening winning designated command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is one or more of the image display device, the sound output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the board lighting device 76. Is done using.

Regarding the second start port detection switch input process, the first start port detection switch 45a, the first special symbol hold storage area, the first hold storage, the first special symbol hold number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first pre-judgment process, and the first start port winning designation command are executed by the second start port detection switch 47a, the second special symbol hold storage area, the second hold storage, the second special symbol hold number (U2), and the first. 2 It may be read as a special symbol memory designation command, a second pre-judgment process, and a second start opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and stores the special symbol if the special figure special electric processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the determination process (step S310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special electric process data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. S330), if the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the processing is transferred to the jackpot game processing (step S340), and if the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the processing is performed in the big hit game end processing (step S350). Transfer.

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process of determining a jackpot, determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and when the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more. In, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"). Is a change display of a special symbol, and the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the start of the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the jackpot game is not executed is set to "0". It is determined whether or not it is.

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, the customer waiting state specification command is set in the transmission data storage area for production, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. If the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0" after the current special symbol storage determination process is completed, it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special figure special electric processing data = 0 is maintained. The special symbol memory determination process is terminated.

When the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and then the second special symbol reservation storage area is stored. Various random value values (special figure determination information) stored in a certain first storage unit to the fourth storage unit are shifted to the previous storage unit, and the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) after subtraction is obtained. 2 Set the special symbol storage specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of second special symbol reservations.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among various random value values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. "" Or "missing" is determined.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol hold number (U2) is not "1" or more and the first special symbol hold number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol hold storage area is stored. After subtracting "1" from the stored value, various random value stored in the first to fourth storage units in the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) after subtraction is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of first special symbol reservations.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Specifically, among the various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage unit to the 0th storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random number value and the game RWM area Based on the set value (1 to 4 in this case) stored in the set value area and the current probability game state (low probability game state, high probability game state), the jackpot game will be executed. "" Or "missing" is determined.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process for determining the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol is determined based on the random value for the jackpot symbol, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage unit is used. A special symbol (big hit special symbol, loss special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. Specifically, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, it is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random value and the special symbol fluctuation random value, and the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter to obtain the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern specification command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Further, when the jackpot determination is performed based on the random value for determining the special symbol stored in the 0th storage unit of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination is stored in the 0th storage unit. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value and the random value for special symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set. Set the specified command in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets the variation display data for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED) in the predetermined processing area. ..

As a result, when the variable display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the data for turning on or off the LED is appropriately created in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. The first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 performs variable display of the special symbol.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 1, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol variation processing, and the current special symbol storage determination processing is completed.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol variation process for determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol variation processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special symbol special electric processing data = 1.

When the fluctuation time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol or the lost special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and is determined in advance. The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol special electric processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the special symbol change processing this time is completed.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol stop process for determining whether or not the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the stop time of the special symbol set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop processing this time is terminated while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 2.

When the stop time has elapsed, when the number of time reductions> 0, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction counter to update, when the number of time reductions = 0, the time reduction game flag is cleared, and when the number of high probability times> 0, it is high. It is updated by subtracting 1 from the probability count counter, and when the high probability count = 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. In the case of a big hit special symbol, the time saving game flag, the high probability game flag, the time saving number counter, and the high probability number counter are cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to the special figure special electric processing data = 3 are set. Then, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the jackpot game processing, and the special symbol stop processing of this time is completed.

On the other hand, in the case of a lost special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, and preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and this special symbol stop processing is performed. To finish.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a is for executing the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type (stop symbol data) of the jackpot special symbol set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening / closing member 51 according to the type of the jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and the drive data of the big winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening / closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game count (R) storage area.

When a specified number of game balls win (win) during this opening, or when the opening time of the large winning opening elapses (round winning counter (C) = 10 or special game timer counter = 0), the size is large. The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening / closing member 51. As a result, one round game is completed. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When the predetermined number of round games (4 times or 16 times in the present embodiment) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 To special figure special electric processing data = 4, prepare to move to the subroutine of big hit game end processing, and end this big hit game processing.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines either the high-probability gaming state or the low-probability gaming state, and also determines the time-saving gaming state or the non-time-saving gaming state. Performs jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310, the setting of the high probability game flag, the setting of the high probability number of times, the setting of the time saving game flag, and the setting of the time saving number of times are performed. Then, the special figure special electric processing data = 4 is set to the special figure special electric processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of the special symbol storage determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is completed.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
8 and 9 will be used to describe the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of first special symbol reservations (U1), and when the number of first special symbol reservations (U1) increases or decreases, it is stored in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of second special symbol reservations (U2), and when the number of second special symbol reservations (U2) increases or decreases, it is stored in the transmission data storage area for production of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "special symbol storage designation command".

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and is transmitted for the effect of the main RAM 110c when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends, the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the game state after the jackpot game ends. It can be said that.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when is started.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130 when is started.

In the present embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed, and the main RAM 110c is used when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "ordinary symbol confirmation command" indicates that the ordinary symbol has been stopped and displayed, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62. It is transmitted to the control board 130.

The "starting opening winning designation command" is for notifying the effect control board 130 of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery) in advance, and the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47. At that time, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "big hit opening designation command" indicates that the big hit game (special game) starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games start, and the effect control board. It is transmitted to 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the round game of the jackpot game is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

The "big hit ending designation command" indicates that the big hit game ends, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various big hit games end, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "ordinary symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of ordinary symbol reservations (G1), and stores transmission data for effect of the main RAM 110c when the value stored in the ordinary symbol reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases. It is set in the area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and when various ordinary symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the main RAM 110c It is set in the effect transmission data storage area and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. , Is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "hit opening designation command" indicates that the hit game (auxiliary game) starts, and is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the hit game starts, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

The "hit ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games are completed, and when the hit game is completed, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130. To.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether or not the game is in a time-saving game state and whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state. Time) and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves the initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on. When it is turned on, the presence / absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power-on designation command corresponding to the gaming state, or the power recovery designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "customer waiting state specification command" indicates that the customer waiting state is set in which the change display of the special symbol is not performed, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is reached. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates that an error has occurred in the game machine 1 and the type of the error, and when the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality is determined by the above-mentioned magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process. When the occurrence of an illegal winning is determined in the above-mentioned large winning opening detection switch input processing or the above-mentioned second starting opening detection switch input processing, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the effect control board 130. Will be sent to.

Further, even when the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is opened, the lower plate 12 is full, or a payout abnormality is detected in the payout control board 120, the payout RAM 121c is set in the effect transmission data storage area and is set in the effect control board. It is transmitted to 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or the payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. And transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "setting value designation command" indicates the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, a power-on designation command or a power recovery designation command is issued. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main processing of the production control unit)
Next, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the effect control unit 130m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step E30, the sub CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission that permits timer interruption, and in step E40, performs a sub random number update process. Specifically, a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c is performed. After that, the process of step E40 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit)
The timer interrupt processing of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E100, the sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs an input control process in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there is an input, a process of setting predetermined data is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not various commands have been transmitted from the main control board 110 and storing the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c when various commands have been transmitted is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change / confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting change designation command or the setting confirmation designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if the setting change designation command is received, the above-mentioned setting is made. The process for executing the change notification is performed, and when the setting confirmation designation command is received, the process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-on designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing the power-on notification is performed. More specifically, a power-on notification command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The power-on sound is output from the audio output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a performs a power failure recovery process in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power recovery designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, a process for executing a power failure recovery notification is performed. More specifically, a power recovery notification command may be sent to the display / voice control unit 140 to display the power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) or the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). The power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9. note that,

The sub CPU 130a performs the customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not a customer waiting state specification command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and performing a customer waiting demo effect after a predetermined time has elapsed if the command has been received is performed. conduct. More specifically, a customer waiting effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demo screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). , A customer waiting demo sound is output from the voice output device 9. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The sub CPU 130a performs the game state update process in step E350. Specifically, the process of referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c to determine whether or not the game state specification command is being received, and updating the game state information stored in the sub RAM 130c when the command is being received is performed. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs the hold information update process in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, it is stored in the sub RAM 130c. 1 Performs a process of updating the number of special symbol reservations, the number of second special symbol reservations, the number of ordinary symbol reservations, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a performs the look-ahead system effect processing in step E500. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the start opening winning designation command or the fluctuation pattern designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, the icon change as a look-ahead effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous notice production, and lamp change production. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The "icon change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the hold icon and the display mode of the icon. In the present embodiment, the icon change effect for the hold icon may be referred to as "hold icon change effect" and the icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect".

The "continuous notice effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that makes a player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.
The "ramp change effect" is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E600, the sub CPU 130a performs the special drawing special electric effect effect processing. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command, the special symbol variation pattern designation command, the special symbol confirmation command, the jackpot opening designation command, the round designation command, the jackpot ending designation command, etc., with reference to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, etc. Is determined, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs the Fuzu-fuden effect processing. Specifically, whether or not the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c is used to receive a normal map designation command, a normal map variation designation command, a normal symbol confirmation command, a hit opening designation command, a hit ending designation command, or the like. It is determined whether or not, and if it is received, a process for executing an effect corresponding to the received command is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and if it is received, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command is produced. Performs processing for executing, and processing for ending the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processing such as outputting a signal such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150. ..

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a returns the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the timer interrupt processing this time.

(Customer waiting production processing of the production control unit)
A customer waiting effect process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state specification command has not been received, the process is transferred to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state specification command has been received, in step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demo production. Select the demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the waiting time of. The details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, referring to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13, one demo waiting time is determined from a plurality of demo waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the demo is waiting. Specifically, it is determined whether the demo standby timer is set. If the demo is not waiting, the customer waiting effect processing is terminated as if the customer waiting demo effect is not executed. If the demo is waiting, the demo wait timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. ..

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E300-6 whether or not the demo standby timer = 0. If the demo wait timer is not 0, the customer wait effect process is terminated assuming that the customer wait demo effect is not executed yet, and if the demo wait timer = 0, the customer wait demo effect is produced in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer, and the customer waiting effect processing this time is completed. As a result, the customer waiting demo effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the customer waiting demo effect that appeals to the player to execute the game is executed.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demo waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo effect.

In FIG. 13, the demo waiting time determination table is associated with a gaming state, a current state, and a selected demo waiting time. Four types of demo waiting times of 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times of 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state. Is set.

The first feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the effect symbol on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demo waiting time after the display is still displayed, the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed), and the effect pattern after the customer waiting demo effect is completed. There is a difference from the demo waiting time after is displayed still. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the current state, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (variation) rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the production symbol is still displayed after the passage of time is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the power is restored rather than the demo standby time after the variation display of the effect symbol is completed (the variation time has elapsed) and the effect symbol is statically displayed. Immediately after that, the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the effect is displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored, rather than the demo standby time after the effect symbol is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. The point is that the demo waiting time after the symbol is displayed still is longer. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demo waiting time after the effect symbol is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo effect is completed is the shortest. By doing so, it is possible to effectively enhance the appeal to the player to the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demo waiting time in a specific gaming state (low-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability short-time gaming state) is more than each demo waiting time in the normal gaming state. The longer point is mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect at an appropriate time according to the high or low possibility that the player is playing, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading effect processing of the effect control unit)
A look-ahead effect processing of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead system effect process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the icon change effect, an effect mode of the icon change effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a executes an icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changes the already displayed hold icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform update processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the continuous advance notice effect, an effect mode of the continuous advance notice effect, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous advance notice effect execution process for executing the continuous advance notice effect determined to be executed in the continuous advance notice effect determination process. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process for executing a lamp change effect (turning on the winning opening lamp NR so that the light emitting mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed), and this time. End the look-ahead effect processing. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

(Icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E510-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the icon change effect determination process this time is terminated.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the icon change effect. If it is the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

The "executable period of the icon change effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change effect is not being executed, or the icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received start opening winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal gaming state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is the winning of the second starting opening 47. If it is based on the above, it may be provided that it is in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a has all the pre-determination results of the advance hold (holding memory corresponding to the previously received start opening winning designation command) equal to or less than the normal reach, that is, all the advance determination results of the advance hold are normally changed. Judge whether it is shortened fluctuation or normal reach. If all are below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-5, and if all are not below normal reach, the process is transferred to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires an icon display mode determining random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-6. , Select the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. The details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, and is based on the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start opening winning designation command and the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode. , One icon final display mode is determined from the plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines a normal icon (CD icon), which is a normal display mode, as the icon final display mode.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E510-9 whether or not the determined icon final display mode is the display mode (special icon) for executing the icon change effect. If the display mode is to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not to execute the icon change effect, the process is transferred to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining a change scenario of the icon change effect. The details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario shows the transition of the display mode from the appearance of the hold icon to the disappearance of the hold icon.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, referring to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, based on the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario. Then, one change scenario is determined from a plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies a winning icon, which is an icon display mode first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, and the icon of the winning icon. Set the display command in the transmission buffer and end the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Or a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound when displayed by a normal icon, second winning sound when displayed by a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets the read-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command of the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon change effect determination process this time. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the hold icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It will be displayed or a predetermined effect sound (first winning sound) will be output.

In the icon change effect determination process of the present embodiment, the icon change effect (hold icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all the prior determination results of the advance hold are equal to or less than the normal reach. , The icon change effect may be executed when the advance determination result of the advance hold does not perform the reach effect, and the icon change effect may not be executed when the reach effect is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon does not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon is held during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. The display mode of the above is changed, the reach effect is not hindered by the icon change effect, and the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, even if the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the pre-determination result of the advance hold includes the one that performs the reach effect. If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be more easily executed (executed at a higher rate) than when the reach effect is included.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table is associated with the scheduled variation pattern indicated by the start opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final display mode of the icon includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon suggesting that there is a possibility of a big hit (a big hit game is executed), a red character icon, and a rainbow character. The icon is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit related to a special icon is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that confirms that it will be a big hit. ..

Here, as a main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the selection rate of the icon final display mode is changed according to the planned variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the planned fluctuation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the ratio of special icons is higher than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach where the scheduled fluctuation pattern is not reach. It is supposed to be selected.

In the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a big hit, but it may be selected. ..

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario. For reference, the preliminary fluctuations in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the fluctuations are described.

"Preliminary fluctuation" is a fluctuation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure judgment information stored before the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command. , "The fluctuation" is a fluctuation display (variation effect) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received start opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the prior change (the hold icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) and the icon display mode change during the execution of the pre-variation (hold icon change effect is executed), but do not change during the execution of the change (the icon change effect). A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) that is not executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and the execution of the change (hold icon change effect and icon change effect are executed). ) A scenario (for example, scenario 15 or the like) is set.

In the change scenario determination table of the present embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not the reach effect (which may be a reach other than the normal reach) is executed in the prior variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by the change scenario determination table with the judgment factor as to whether or not the reach effect that suggests that the jackpot game may be executed in the advance fluctuation is executed. You may decide which scenario to let. When such a change scenario determination table is used, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the reach effect is not executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that the display mode changes. In addition, the icon display mode changes during the execution of the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed and the pre-variation in which the reach effect is not executed. Various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process of the effect control unit)
The icon display mode update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an icon display mode update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E520-2, and when the variation pattern specification command is not received, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E520-2, and determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in step E520-3. .. If the icon change scenario is not stored, the process is moved to step E520-10 assuming that the power recovery has occurred in which the change scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c, and the icon change scenario is stored. Moves the process to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a hold icon that changes (updates) the display mode in the current variation effect. If there is a hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-5, and if there is no hold icon that changes the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 19) for the hold icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. The details of the change pattern determination table for the hold icon will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the hold icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the hold icon shown in FIG. 19, among a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%). Determines one hold icon change pattern from.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined hold icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 corresponds to the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) may be output.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is the icon that changes (updates) the display mode. If there is the icon for changing the display mode, the process is moved to step E520-9, and if there is no icon for changing the display mode, the current icon display mode update process is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a is selected from a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation effect. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon according to the change stage in which the icon changes is selected. The details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a is used for power failure to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power recovery. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22). The details of the icon change pattern determination table for power failure will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, referring to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, a plurality of the icons are based on the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the icon display mode update process this time. As a result, the change effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the first image display device 70 corresponds to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal display) may change, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) may be output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, when the power supply restoration occurs during the execution of the icon change effect, the icon change effect is executed again in the variation effect started after the power supply restoration. There are now. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the icon change effect due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even when the icon change effect is executed again in the variation effect started after the power is restored, the icon change effect is produced based on the current variation pattern. By newly determining the mode, it is not executed from the continuation of the change scenario before power restoration (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped). By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

If the power supply is restored during the execution of the icon change effect, the hold memory (special figure determination information) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect in the variable effect started after the power supply is restored (the hold memory (special figure determination information)). The icon change effect may not be executed in the variable effect corresponding to the special figure determination information), but the icon change effect may be executed by the variable effect corresponding to the hold memory that triggered the execution of the icon change effect.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for a hold icon that is referred to when determining a change pattern for a hold icon.

The change pattern determination table for the hold icon is associated with the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each hold icon change pattern, and the selected hold icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the hold icon in each hold icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The hold icon change pattern is a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of fluctuation) according to the disappearance of the icon. Or, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes during fluctuation with the output of a sound effect, or an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears, and the icon is displayed. The character action change pattern 01 whose mode changes and the change notification symbol indicating that the display mode of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the action effect that acts on the hold icon starting from the change notification symbol. Is performed to change the display mode of the hold icon, and the symbol action change pattern 01 is set.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect pattern is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the hold icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from a CD icon to a red character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

The timing of the change effect of the hold icon is the above three timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing a change pattern determination table for the icon referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 20 shows the display mode of the icon being changed by one step. It is a table referred to in the case, and FIG. 21 is a table referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation effect, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the selected icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern includes a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes at the start of the change with the output of the sound effect, and a normal change in the display mode of the hold icon during the change with the output of the sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon by performing an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as the character appears are set.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and the effect symbol is when the change effect is started (at the time of the change start) and when the change effect is being executed (during change). There is a time when the 70a is temporarily stopped ((temporarily) stopped).

At the change stage of the icon, 1UP (for example, change from CD icon to blue character icon, change from blue character icon to red character icon) that changes the jackpot winning expectation to the display mode one step higher, and jackpot 2UP (for example, change from CD icon to red character icon, change from blue character icon to rainbow character icon) is set to change the winning expectation to a display mode two levels higher.

In the change pattern determination table for the icon of the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not selected, but it may be possible to select it. For example, in the variation effect in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed when the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a before the pseudo variation is performed.

The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a variable display of the effect pattern multiple times for a jackpot judgment based on winning (ball winning) to one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47). All within the special figure fluctuation time determined for winning (ball winning) to one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) in order to make it appear as if This is a special aspect of the effect symbol variation display in which the re-variation display that starts the variation again after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped is executed once or a plurality of times.

The timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon is limited to the above two timings, but the timing is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that the variable effect is being executed (during fluctuation) until the reach is established, the normal reach is being executed, the SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, and the like.

(The icon change pattern determination table for power failure)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

In the icon change pattern determination table for power failure, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the selected icon. The final display mode of the above and the selected icon change pattern are associated with each other, and for reference, the change effect occurrence timing of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

The icon change pattern, the change effect occurrence timing of the icon, and the change stage of the icon are the same as those described in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. do.

(Relationship between the display mode of the hold icon and the timing of the change effect occurrence)
FIG. 23A is a diagram showing the relationship between the holding icon display mode and the occurrence frequency of the change effect occurrence timing.

When the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of occurrence of the change effect than the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the blue character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting low.

That is, the hold icon is executed when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern specification command than in the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting higher.

In addition, when the display mode of the hold icon changes to the red character icon, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher in the frame update timing according to the reception of the predetermined command than in the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command. It's getting low.

In other words, the hold icon is more when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of is easily changed to a red character icon. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is that the game ball wins a prize at the start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) and a hold icon is displayed. It is a change effect (change effect at the time of winning) in which the hold icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing when the hold icon is set, and a normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command is a normal change pattern 02, a character action change pattern 01, and a symbol action change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the hold icon display mode and the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect occurrence timing is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is the predetermined command. Since the frequency of change effects that change to the red character icon, which has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than the frame update timing according to the reception of, is high, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change effect occurrence timing and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command has a higher frequency of the change effect that changes to the blue character icon than the predetermined frame update timing after the change pattern specification command is received, so that the change effect is early. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon with a high expectation of winning a big hit, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuation production and improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 1)
FIG. 23B is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the change effect occurrence frequency between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing.

When the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is likely to change at an early stage of the change effect. It is possible to pull the expectation of the jackpot game of the person for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It should be noted that this predetermined command is a start opening winning designation command or a variation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change effect type and change effect occurrence timing 2)
FIG. 23C is a diagram showing the relationship 2 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency 2.

When the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs more frequently in the icon change effect than in the hold icon change effect.

Further, when the change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect occurs less frequently in the hold icon change effect than in the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence frequency is as described above, the icon is likely to change at a later time of the change effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by pulling the expectation of the jackpot game of the person until the late period of the variable production.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon is generated (changed))
FIG. 23D is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed).

When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the first generation notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated as the icon (when changed to), When the second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated (change), and the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the icon is generated (when it changes to). When the third generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound at the time of change) and the icon changes to the rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. Is set to be output.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, or when a CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and only when the icon changes to any mode, the notification sound is output. It may be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

(Continuous notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 24, a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the start opening winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the start opening prize designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E530-2, and when the start opening prize designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received start opening winning designation command, and grasps whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit game, and the effect content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the present is the feasible period of the continuous advance notice effect. If it is the feasible period of the continuous notice effect, the process is transferred to step E530-4, and if it is not the feasible period of the continuous notice effect, the process is transferred to step E530-6 assuming that the continuous notice effect is not executed. ..

The "executable period of the continuous advance notice effect" is a case where the jackpot game is not being executed, the continuous advance notice effect is not being executed, or the continuous advance notice effect is not scheduled to be executed. It should be noted that one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, when the received start opening winning designation command is based on the winning of the first starting opening 45, it is in the normal gaming state, and the received starting opening winning designation command is the winning of the second starting opening 47. If it is based on the above, it may be provided that it is in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state) or the like.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a advance notice scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect. The details of the notice scenario determination table will be described later. This notice scenario shows the transition of the notice effect over one or a plurality of variable effects.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines the advance notice scenario, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the continuous advance notice effect determination process. Specifically, referring to the notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the type of the start opening prize designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario can be determined. Based on this, one notice scenario is determined from a plurality of notice scenarios (including non-notice scenarios). The details of the notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-notice scenario in which the continuous notice effect is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the hold storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous notice effect determination process. do.

(Notice scenario decision table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a notice scenario determination table referred to when determining a notice scenario for continuous notice effect.

In the notice scenario determination table, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the start opening prize designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the start opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario Are associated with each other, and as a reference, the advance variation in each advance notice scenario and the effect mode of the advance notice effect in the change are described.

In the notice scenario, an effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the variation effect. A non-notice scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the advance notice effect is not executed, and an effect image around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the pre-variation. Is not displayed, but the effect image is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the variation (for example, scenario 01), the effect is displayed around the effect symbol 70a at the start of the pre-variation, and at the start of the variation. A scenario in which an image is displayed (for example, scenario 02, etc.) is set.

(Continuous notice effect execution process of the effect control unit)
With reference to FIG. 26, the continuous advance notice effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a continuous advance notice effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. When the variation pattern designation command is received, the process is transferred to step E540-2, and when the variation pattern designation command is not received, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated.

The sub CPU 130a refers to the advance notice scenario of the continuous advance notice effect stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c in step E540-2, and determines whether or not the advance notice scenario is stored in step E540-3. .. If the transfer notice scenario is stored, the process is transferred to step E540-4, and if the notice scenario is not stored, it is assumed that the power recovery has occurred in which the notice scenario is cleared from the sub RAM 130c. Process to E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous notice pattern (effect mode) according to the notice scenario, and in step E540-5, sets a continuous notice effect command according to the determined continuous notice pattern in the transmission buffer. .. As a result, the continuous advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the continuous advance notice effect is executed according to the continuous advance notice pattern, and the effect symbol 70a is executed at the start of the variable effect. An effect image is displayed around the, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

The sub CPU 130a is an alternative notice pattern determination table for determining in step E540-6 whether or not to execute the alternative advance notice effect as compensation for the continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power recovery (FIG. FIG. 27) is selected to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, one alternative from a plurality of alternative advance notice patterns is made based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative advance notice pattern with reference to the selected alternative advance notice pattern determination table. Determine the notice pattern. The details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

The "alternative notice effect" is an effect for compensating for a continuous advance notice effect that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power cutoff), and is an effect for multiple mini characters with different jackpot expectations on the image display device. It is a kind of advance notice effect that makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by displaying any of them.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E540-7 whether or not the determined alternative notice pattern is for executing the substitute notice effect. If the alternative notice effect is not executed, the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated as if the alternative notice effect is not executed, and if the alternative notice effect is executed, the alternative notice pattern is applied. The alternative advance notice effect command is set in the transmission buffer, and the continuous advance notice effect execution process is terminated. As a result, the alternative advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the alternative advance notice effect is executed according to the alternative advance notice pattern, and the mini character is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous advance notice effect execution process shown in FIG. 26, when the power supply is restored (power cutoff) during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect, the continuous advance notice effect is restarted in the variable effect started after the power is restored. Instead, an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the occurrence of power restoration (power interruption), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

The alternative advance notice pattern determination table is associated with the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative advance notice pattern, and the alternative advance notice pattern to be selected. The effect mode in the pattern is described.

The alternative notice pattern includes pattern 00 in which the substitute notice effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which the mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which the mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 is set, and a pattern 04 in which the mini character D is displayed on the image display device is set.

The expectation of winning a big hit for a mini character is higher in the order of mini character A <mini character B <mini character C <mini character D, and mini character D is a mini character that is confirmed to be a big hit.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that the variation pattern with a high jackpot winning expectation is an alternative notice in which the substitution notice effect is executed, rather than the fluctuation pattern with a low jackpot winning expectation. The point that the pattern is easy to determine is mentioned. By doing so, if there is a high possibility that the continuous advance notice effect was executed before the power restoration occurred, the alternative advance notice effect will be executed, and the dissatisfaction associated with the end of the continuous advance notice effect will be felt. It can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

As the second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect. It is easier to determine the alternative notice pattern in which the alternative notice effect is executed than in the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that does not trigger the execution of the continuous notice effect prior to the hold is executed. By doing so, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

In addition, in the variable effect executed after the power is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the big hit notice effect (line notice effect, step-up notice effect) described later, so that the big hit notice effect is executed. By increasing the probability more than usual, the alternative notice effect may not be executed.

Even in this case, the case where the variable effect corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect is executed is the trigger for executing the continuous notice effect before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect. It is preferable that the jackpot advance notice effect is easier to be executed than when the variable effect corresponding to the hold that has not been set is executed. By doing so, after the power is restored, it becomes easy to grasp which variable effect corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a lamp change effect execution process in the effect control unit 130 m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, the process is moved to step E550-2 assuming that the icon change effect is executed, and if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub RAM 130c. The process is moved to step E550-6 assuming that the power restoration that has been cleared has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is the icon change timing. If it is the icon change timing, the process is moved to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the lamp change effect execution process this time is terminated.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. Will be done.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag indicating that the lamp change effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp change effect is produced. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process is transferred to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp change effect execution process is terminated.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, sets the lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer in step E550-8, and performs the lamp change effect execution process this time. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the lamp change effect that has been executed ends.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change mode (emission color, lighting / blinking) of the winning port lamp NR is changed in response to the icon change in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform production. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the synergistic effect with the icon change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous advance notice effect, even if the power supply is restored during the execution of the lamp change effect, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to do or perform an alternative notice effect. By doing so, it is possible to secure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the power supply is restored as in the icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect started after the power supply is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final light emission mode of the winning opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the prior fluctuation to the change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You may do so.

(Big hit notice production decision processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 29, the jackpot advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m, and this process determines the variation effect pattern determination process (variation pattern specification command in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process). It is executed after the processing).

The sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern executed in the current variation effect in step E650-1, and makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed in step E650-2. The jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the above is selected, and the advance notice pattern is determined. Specifically, referring to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, a plurality of notice patterns (non-notice patterns) are based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern. (Including), one notice pattern is determined. The details of the jackpot notice decision table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is a warning pattern for executing the dialogue warning effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the dialogue advance notice effect, the process is transferred to step E650-4, and if it is not a advance notice pattern for executing the dialogue advance notice effect, the process is transferred to step E650-6.

"Serif notice effect" means that a dialogue image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed on the image display device and a voice output device is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period generated during the variable effect. It is a kind of jackpot notice production in which the voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, the dialogue with a relatively high expectation is displayed when the jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation is high) than when the jackpot game is not executed. When a line with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed, the effect button 17 vibrates for, for example, only one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a dialogue pattern in the dialogue advance notice effect, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, referring to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from a plurality of dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets the serif advance notice effect command corresponding to the serif pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the serif advance notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the serif advance notice effect according to the serif pattern is executed, and the serif image is displayed on the first image display device 70. Is displayed, or the voice corresponding to the serif image is output from the voice output device 9.

The sub CPU 130a determines in step E650-6 whether or not it is a warning pattern for executing the step-up notice effect. If it is a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the process is transferred to step E650-7, and if it is not a notice pattern for executing the step-up notice effect, the current jackpot notice effect determination process is terminated.

"Step-up notice effect" is a jackpot advance notice effect that executes step effects in a predetermined order until any of a plurality of steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is a kind. Specifically, more step effects are more likely to be executed when the jackpot game is executed (higher expectation of the jackpot) than when the jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining the step-up pattern in the step-up notice effect, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, referring to the step-up pattern determination table, one of a plurality of step-up patterns is based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Determine the step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the step-up notice effect command according to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot notice effect determination process. As a result, the step-up notice effect command is transmitted to the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150, and the step-up notice effect according to the step-up pattern is executed, and the first image display device 70 A step image is displayed on the screen, or a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the voice output device 9.

(Big hit notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a jackpot notice effect determination process referred to when determining a notice pattern for the jackpot notice effect.

The jackpot notice determination table is associated with a jackpot lottery result, a type of variable effect pattern, a selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and a notice pattern to be selected.

The notice pattern includes a notice pattern without a notice, a notice pattern in which the dialogue notice effect is executed, and a notice pattern in which the step-up notice effect is executed. The expectation of winning a big hit is higher when the up notice effect is executed.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the integrated control unit 141.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the control CPU 142, and the control CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the integrated CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, the main processing program is read from the control ROM 143, the flags and the like stored in the control RAM 144 are initialized, and processing such as initial setting is performed.

In step T3, the centralized CPU 142 sets interrupt permission for permitting timer interruption, and in step T4, it determines whether or not an effect instruction command is received from the effect control unit 130 m with reference to the receive buffer of the integrated RAM 144. If it is determined and not received, the process is transferred to step T7, and if it is received, the animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command in step T5. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Examples of the effect instruction command include a customer waiting effect command, an icon display command, a change effect command, a variable effect pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening effect pattern command, a round effect pattern command, and an ending effect pattern command.

The animation group is the type of object that constitutes the production image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) at which the production image is displayed, the target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns that are information that specifies (designates) parameters (display position of sprite image, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information that specifies the image display device that displays the production image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by being.

The types of animation groups include, for example, an effect symbol group for displaying the animation of the effect symbol 70a, an icon group for displaying the hold icon and the animation of the icon, and a variable effect animation such as a background and a character. Examples include a variable effect group, a notice effect group for displaying an animation such as a notice, and a special game effect group for displaying an animation of a special game effect.

In step T6, the general CPU 142 performs sound setting processing for determining and setting a sound pattern from a type of sound group corresponding to the received effect instruction command, and in step T7, updates the effect image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether or not there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is the frame update timing (drawing a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process is moved to step T4 and the frame switching flag is set. If there is, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the control CPU 142 generates a display list composed of drawing control command groups, and performs display list generation / output processing for outputting the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding an effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), and is one unit. Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of a plurality of units (frame update timing), and in the present embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each animation pattern set in the animation control process described later, a drawing control command is set for each set animation pattern according to the contents of the animation scene information. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. The drawing control commands are sequentially set from the animation pattern of the animation group having the lowest priority to the animation pattern of the animation group having the highest priority according to the priority (drawing order) set to the animation group to which each animation pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the control CPU 142 performs drawing command processing for instructing the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and the effect image drawn in the display frame buffer is the first image display device. A process of displaying on the 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is performed.

In step T11, the general CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of sound control command groups, and performs sound list generation / output processing for outputting the generated sound list to the voice control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for designating sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when a new sound is output. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the control CPU 142 performs sound output command processing for instructing the sound output based on the sound list output to the voice control unit 148. By performing this sound output command processing, the voice control unit 148 outputs the sound based on the sound list from the voice output device 9.

Therefore, various sounds are started to be output from the audio output device 9 so as to be synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and are synchronized (tuned) with the frame update timing. The output from the audio output device 9 is terminated.

The audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing, but the audio output device 9 outputs various sounds so as not to synchronize (synchronize) with the frame update timing. May be stopped and vice versa.

In step T13, the general CPU 142 performs animation control processing for updating animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. After that, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated so as to loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m.

In step T20, the control CPU 142 performs a command reception process for receiving an effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Specifically, a process of storing the effect instruction command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m in the receive buffer of the control RAM 144 is performed, and the command reception interrupt process of this time is terminated.

(V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit)
The V blank interrupt process of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the integrated control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt process ends the display of the effect image for one frame from the image control unit 145 (VDP) (1/30). It is executed every time a V blank signal transmitted every second (second = about 33 ms) is received (1/30 second = about 33 ms).

In step T30, the control CPU 142 performs counter update processing for updating a predetermined number of counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) (for example, adding “1”), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process for instructing VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 is performed.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt process is executed every 1/30 second (about 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area become a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will be switched alternately with.

In step T32, the control CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt processing. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes of steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change effect at the time of winning)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 280th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, a start opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting opening 45.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 281st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to display the display mode of the first hold icon with the blue character icon at the time of winning, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 Output is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 282nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 283rd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 284th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 296th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 297th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. Further, the drawing of the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 298th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production change at the time of winning)
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed (changed to) by the blue character icon when the game ball is won in the first start port 45.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. Normally, a variable effect is executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 45, a starting port winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m, and the icon change effect determination process is executed, as a change scenario. It is assumed that "scenario 02" (the display mode of the first hold icon is displayed by the blue character icon at the time of winning) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36B, the first holding icon (blue character) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first holding icon display area 70B in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45. Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), stop display is performed in a combination (here, “234”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, and the like are output from the voice output device 9 during the fluctuation effect. The same applies to the following FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 show timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the variation effect is started. At this timing, the fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 601st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first hold icon to the blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second generation occurs from the sound output device 9. The output of the notification sound is not started either.

Further, at the timing of T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the stop effect display screen b is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T4 is the timing (the timing at which the variation effect is started), which is the first frame after the start of the next variation effect. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data c drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T4 corresponds to the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the second frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn in the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T6 is the timing of the third frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data e drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. ..

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 16th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the second generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen h (blue character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 17th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the drawing of the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the second generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

Also, while the output of the second generation notification sound was started in accordance with the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed (synchronously), the blue character icon is deleted and the second generation notification sound is output. Since it is performed at a frame update timing different from the stop of, it is possible to stop the output of the second occurrence notification sound without being restricted by the timing to erase the blue character icon, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game. It becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an effect example when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the blue character icon (normal change pattern 01) at the start of fluctuation (shift).

As shown in FIG. 39 (a), when the first hold icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B. , It is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39B, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 is started. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display unit 70B2 is displayed with the display mode changed to a blue character icon when the first display unit 70B1 is shifted and displayed. .. Further, the CD icon is changed to a blue character icon and displayed, and the second generation notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), stop display is performed with a combination (here, “164”) indicating that the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that has been displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39 (d), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39 (e), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39 (f), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed in the central variation display area, so that the reach effect ends and the variation display ends. Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
40 and 41 show timings showing various timings when the character action change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to the red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 61st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the effect control unit 130m has decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to the red character icon, but the image display device does not display the character or the like, and the sound is heard. The output of the third generation notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and is drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 62nd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the output of the third generation notification sound from the voice output device 9 is Not started.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 63rd frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen e (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 64th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, character images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen f (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is not output. Will continue.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 91st frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data g drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen g (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is continued. To.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 92nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data i (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the voice output device 9. .. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 106th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 continues, and the image data j (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn in the first frame buffer. Is started, the display of the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 107th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variation effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images (images, various icon images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen j (red character) is displayed on the image display device. Icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 108th frame after the start of the variation effect, which is the timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Production example of character action change pattern 01)
42 and 43 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon (character action change pattern 01) during the variation effect.

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed in a state where the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no hold memory is stored. The normal fluctuation effect to be made is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), after the character C1 is displayed, the character C1 performs a throwing kiss operation as shown in FIG. 42 (c), and the heart H is changed to the icon (CD icon) TH. The production of flying towards is performed.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. 42 (d), the display mode of the icon TH changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 sets the third generation notification sound. Is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol action change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol action change pattern 01 is determined as the hold icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to the red character icon. It is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the variation effect (the timing of the start of the variation effect), and is the frame update timing of the start of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the effect symbol 70a is performed. .. At this timing, drawing of the image data b (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image data a drawn in the second frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen a is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T2 is the timing of the 299th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal variation period. At this timing, it is decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first hold icon to the red character icon, but the change pattern or the like is not displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 The output of the third generation notification sound is also not started.

Further, at the timing of T2, drawing of image data d (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is performed in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that has been performed is started on the image display device, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing of the symbol temporary stop period in which the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data d on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. The output does not start.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 301st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 302nd frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 330th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the first frame buffer was started, and was drawn in the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (change symbol display) is displayed on the image display device. Non-output continues.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 331st frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol images, etc.) in the second frame buffer was started and was drawn in the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen h (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence notification is notified from the voice output device 9. Sound output is started. The timing of this T7 corresponds to a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 345th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, change symbol image, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the voice output device 9 is displayed. Output continues.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 346th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third generation notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) to the second frame buffer is stopped. Drawing of images, various icon images, change pattern images, etc.) is started, display of the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (change pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 347th frame after the start of the variation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of the image data l (background image, variation effect image, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) in the first frame buffer is started, and the image display of the image data k drawn in the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen k (change symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device.

In this way, the output of the third generation notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the frame update timing in which the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third generation notification sound is different from the start, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of strangeness and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, while the output of the third generation notification sound was started according to the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed (synchronously), the red character icon is deleted and the third generation notification sound is deleted. Since the frame update timing is different from the output stop, the output of the third generation notification sound can be stopped without being restricted by the timing to erase the red character icon, which can improve the fun of the game. It will be possible.

(Example of effect of pattern action change pattern 01)
46 and 47 are diagrams showing an effect example when the display mode of the hold icon is changed to the red character icon (design action change pattern 01) while the effect symbol 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped).

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in a state where the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the effect symbol 70a is varied and displayed. The production is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), the effect symbol 70a of "2" in the left fluctuation display area, "3" in the right fluctuation display area, and "change" in the center fluctuation display area is stopped and displayed (provisional). An effect like a lightning bolt appears toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 from the change symbol that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the variable display area in the center (stop display). Upon hitting, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from the CD icon to the red character icon, and the voice output device 9 outputs the third generation notification sound for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46 (c), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display unit 70B1 is shifted to the icon display area 70C. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the effect symbol 70a of "2" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. When the SP reach is developed, the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting that it is a big hit, and the combination indicating that the variable display effect symbol 70a is a big hit ( Here, the stop display is displayed at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the effect symbol 70a returns from the reduced display to the original size and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display). Here, since the variable display is completed, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m executes the change effect at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command (start opening winning designation command or variation pattern designation command). Since the effect control unit 130m may execute the change effect at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by increasing the variation of the change effect. Become.

In the present embodiment, the icon change effect determines the final display mode and the scenario when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a determination method. .. For example, it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode each time the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. Further, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start opening winning designation command, only the final display mode is determined, and how it changes is the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) can be changed. When it becomes, it may be decided each time.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is 4 as a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon as a special icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon. Although it was a kind, it is not limited to four kinds, and may be many or few.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided, which has a lower expectation of winning a big hit than the blue character icon and may change to a special icon. When such a special icon is provided, since the jackpot winning expectation is lower than that of the blue character icon, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the change pattern designation command). It is desirable not to change to a special icon in the change effect) that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing. By doing so, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), which easily change to a display mode with a high expectation of winning a big hit. Since it will not change to a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in the above, it is possible to increase the variation of the icon display mode while preventing the player from being discouraged, and to improve the interest of the game. It will be possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of the present embodiment, the above special icon and the green character icon may be provided. In this case, the jackpot winning expectation for the icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is (CD icon <) blinking CD icon <blue character icon <green character icon <red character icon <rainbow character icon in this order. You just have to make it higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the character C1 or the changed symbol is displayed in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) is always changed. However, there may be a case where the character C1 or the change symbol is not changed even if it is displayed (so-called ghost effect). When such a ghost effect is provided, the ghost effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command) is provided. The execution rate is higher than that of the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command), or the normal change pattern 02 and the character action change. It is desirable that only the pattern 01 and the pattern action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed a plurality of times during one variation effect, but may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) have only one timing during the change effect, so that the normal change is performed. The pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be executed a plurality of times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may change a plurality of times in one variable effect, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting port winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be 2 frames after the number of frames received (command or variable pattern specification command), but it is not limited to 2 frames, and if it is not extremely late after receiving the specified command, the number even after 1 frame. It may be after the frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol action change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 01" is executed, the change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing, for example, special. The change effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol memory designation command or the effect symbol specification command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "normal change pattern 02", the "character action change pattern 01", and the "design action change pattern 01" are executed, at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. Although the change effect has been executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect of notifying that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, it is not limited to such an effect, and in addition to the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the changed icon (the icon, hold) is used by using the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10. The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the display mode of the icon). In this case, as with the output of the icon generation (change) notification sound, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (corresponding icon, hold icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). At the same time (synchronously), the lamps of the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10 may be started to emit light, and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps is set to end after a lapse of a predetermined time. Alternatively, the icon (the icon, the hold icon) may be terminated at the frame update timing (synchronized) to be deleted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the hold icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), but are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not restricted depending on the game state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted depending on the game state. For example, in the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) may be infeasible. By doing so, since the fluctuation time is set short in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the normal change pattern 02, the character action change pattern 01, and the character action change pattern 01 executed during the fluctuation are set. By limiting the execution of the symbol action change pattern 01 (change effect generated at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command), the playability of the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be improved. It is possible to improve the fun of the game without damaging it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the hold icon and the icon itself, but the display is not limited to such a change, and the hold icon and the icon itself are displayed. The mode may not be changed (the CD icon remains), and an effect of a color indicating the jackpot winning expectation may be displayed around the hold icon or the icon, or around (near) the hold icon or the icon. A character indicating the degree of expectation of winning a big hit may be displayed, or a character image suggesting an effect to be executed may be displayed around (near) the hold icon or the icon (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren"). May be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the change scenario is determined, it is determined regardless of the winning of the jackpot, but it may be determined by referring to the winning of the jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). ..

In this way, when deciding the change scenario by referring to the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and it changes to the red character icon, the current number of reservations is "1" or "2" rather than "1" or "2". In the case of "3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you win a big hit and change to a red character icon, the red character at the time of winning is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) makes it difficult to select a change scenario that changes to an icon.
Also, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are lost and change to the red character icon, the change scenario that changes to the red character icon at the time of winning than if you won the jackpot and change to the red character icon. Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, the decision is made regardless of the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, but the decision is made by referring to the current number of holdings and the winning of the jackpot. You may. Specifically, one hold icon from a plurality of hold icon change patterns based on the mode of the hold icon change in this variation effect, the current number of holds, the winning of the jackpot, and the selection rate (%). The change pattern may be determined.

In this way, when determining the hold icon change pattern by referring to the current number of holds and the winning of the jackpot, if the jackpot is won and the red character icon changes, the current number of holds is "1" or ". The selection rate (%) may be set so that "normal change pattern 01" is more easily selected as the hold icon change pattern in the case of "3" or "4" than in the case of "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the hold icon change pattern is better when the current number of holds is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". It can be said that the selection rate (%) is difficult to select as “normal change pattern 01”.
In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the jackpot is lost and the icon changes to the red character icon, the "normal change pattern 01" is used as the hold icon change pattern rather than the case where the jackpot is won and the red character icon is changed. ] Can be set to a selection rate (%) that is difficult to select.

As described above, when the change effect at the time of winning and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect generated at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of a predetermined command) change to the red character icon, the current number of pending numbers is "1". "3" or "4" has a higher expectation of winning a big hit than "2", so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Variation example of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, a modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), a special pattern is variablely displayed in the lower right corner of the display unit of the first image display device 70 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. It differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Further, on the left end of the display unit of the first image display device 70, a first reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current first special symbol reserved number (U1) and a current first reserved number display area 70E. 2 It is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the special symbol reserved number (U2) is provided.

The first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number displayed in the second hold number display area 70F correspond to the first hold information, and the first hold icon display area. The first hold icon displayed on the 70B and the second hold icon displayed on the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to the second hold information, and the icon displayed on the icon display area 70C is the execution information. Corresponds to.

(Specific example when variable production is started from waiting for customers)
A specific example when the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. 38 is a timing chart in which the variation effect is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (f) and FIGS. 50 (g) to (k) are FIGS. 48 (a) to (k). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the 0th frame after the customer waiting state is started. At this timing, the subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration effect is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number display area 70F, and the hold icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the non-animation increase display of the first hold icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is performed. Output starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display unit 70B1. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol hold number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (start of the customer waiting state). 5th frame from). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated reduction display of the first hold number, and the change display (decrease display) of the first hold icon by animation to the icon are started. To.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the output of the first generation notification sound is started (14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C is continued, and the effect is produced. The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 20th frame (25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state) after the display (decrease display) due to the change to the first hold icon starts. At this timing, the display due to the change to the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 40th frame after the start of the variation effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the central variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area, the right variable display is displayed. Scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the area is started, and the effect symbol 70a is scrolled in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 225th frame after the start of the variation effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (h), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "3" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area on the center and the right side.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 255th frame from the start of the variation effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (i), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped (becomes a swaying state) in the variable display area on the right side. The scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues in the variable display area in the center.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 285th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (j), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "6" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and is lost. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that there is is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the timing of the 300th frame after the start of the variation effect (the 305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (k), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left middle right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is produced. The stop display is performed with the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the hold number and the non-animated increase display of the hold icon are the shortest one frame. Since it ends in a minute period (hours), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (display by reducing the hold number and display by changing to the hold icon) so that it will not be delayed, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon is after the timing when the increase display of the hold number and the hold icon ends (frame update) (frame). (Update) Since it continues until the timing, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbols held decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a decrease display of the hold number by non-animation and a display of the hold icon changed to the corresponding icon by animation are executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbols reserved has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing when the display of the hold icon that changes to the icon is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the reduction display of the hold number is completed (frame update), the special symbol is held. While producing a change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of special symbols held has decreased due to the reserved number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the display of the hold icon that changes to the icon is completed, and the display due to the change of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since the symbol scrolling (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the game that the variable effect is started after the hold memory is reduced, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the increase display of the hold icon is not executed non-animated, but rather than the increase display of the hold number. The animation may be executed over a plurality of frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the increase in the number of special symbol reservations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting the decrease display of the hold number and the display that changes to the corresponding icon of the hold icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the decrease display of the hold number is completed (frame update). If it is faster, you can start either one first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, instead of starting scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the display due to the change of the hold icon is completed (frame update) (start is delayed than usual), it depends on the change of the hold icon. The scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) may be started shortly before the display is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during variable production)
A specific example will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 52 when the number of holds increases during the variation effect. 51 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during the variable effect, and FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 51 (a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is the 50th frame after the fluctuation effect by the normal fluctuation pattern is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number and the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon are started, and the output of the first generation notification sound which is the notification sound when the icon is generated is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 in an extremely small size, and the enlarged display is started. Further, the first generation notification sound (picot) is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 10th frame after the start of the increase display of the first hold icon (70th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbol hold increases, the increase display by non-animation of the hold number and the increase display by the animation of the hold icon are executed, so that the player can tell that the number of special symbol hold has increased. It is possible to surely recognize the game and improve the fun of the game.

Also, since the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the number of special symbol hold changes. While producing this, it becomes easier for the player to grasp that the number of special symbols held has increased due to the holding number, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol reservations increases during the execution of the variable effect, the increase display of the hold icon is executed for a longer period than when the number of special symbol reservations increases while waiting for customers. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the hold number and the occurrence notification sound output in synchronization with the start of the increase display of the hold icon end in synchronization with the timing when the increase display of the hold icon ends (frame update), so that the special symbol is held. It is possible to effectively produce the increase in the number, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the period related to the increase display of the hold icon (10 frames) is shorter than the period related to the display of the hold icon changing to the icon (20 frames), the variable effect is started. It can be emphasized and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the increase display of the hold number and the increase display of the hold icon are not started at the same timing (frame update), but the timing when the increase display of the hold number is completed (frame update) is earlier, whichever? May start first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of special symbol reservations has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the period related to the increase display of the hold icon may be longer than the period related to the display of the hold icon changing to the icon, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of shortening the period related to the increase display of the hold icon than the period related to the display of the hold icon changing to the icon, both periods may be the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease)
A specific example of the case where the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 54. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after the decrease, and FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (f) are diagrams showing an example of an effect corresponding to FIGS. 53 (a) to (f).

First, the timing of T0 is the timing of the fifth frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", and "8" indicating loss and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. It has become. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variation effect (variation display of the special symbol) by the normal variation pattern is started (20th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are variablely displayed, the first reserved number is reduced by non-animation, the first reserved icon is changed to the icon by animation, and the first reserved icon is animated. Decrease display is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". .. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display unit 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display unit 70B1. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the display due to the change of the first hold icon and the decrease display are being executed, the increase display and the icon generation of the first hold icon are being executed. The output of the generated notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will be on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 20th frame after the display due to the change of the first hold icon and the start of the reduction display (40th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the display due to the change of the first hold icon and the decrease display end. In addition, the increase display by the animation of the first hold icon that has been waiting is started, and the output of the first generation notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 moved from the first display unit 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. Along with the icon TH, the first hold icon H12 moved from the second display unit 70B2 is located at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in an extremely small size to start the enlarged display, and the output of the first generation notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 is started. To.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the fifth frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 45th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon and the output of the first generation notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2, and the enlarged display is continued. At the same time, the output of the first generated notification sound (picot) from the voice output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display area on the left side is started.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 10th frame after the increase display of the first hold icon is started (the 50th frame after the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first generation notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is completed and the normal size is used. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbols held increases during the display of the hold icon that changes to the icon and the reduction display of the hold icon, the display due to this change and the reduction display are completed. Even before the (frame update) timing, the increase display of the hold number is started, so the display due to the change of the hold icon and the increase in the number of special symbol hold even while the decrease display is being executed. It can be recognized by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols held increases during the display due to the change of the hold icon to the icon and the decrease display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are waited for. (Limited) The number of special symbol holdes is set to start the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display due to the change of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update). It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. May be good.

Also, when the display due to the change of the hold icon and the decrease display are completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are not started (start is delayed from usual). , The display due to the change of the hold icon, and the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started shortly before the completion of the decrease display (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbols reserved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases during the increase display of the hold icon, the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are output in the same manner as during the display due to the change of the hold icon or the decrease display. While waiting (restricting), the increase display of the hold number may be started, and when the increase display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the generation notification sound may be started.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases during a specific reach production)
A specific example of an increase in the number of holds during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of holds increases during the specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the effect corresponding to FIGS. 55 (a) to (f). ..

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the variation effect by the SP reach variation pattern is started. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56A, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "7" are temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the central variable display area. The fluctuation display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development production for developing into the SP reach production is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect symbol 70a scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed on the screen. Move to the upper left and start reduced display.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the development production to develop into the SP reach production continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the first image display device 70, in the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and in the central variable display area. The scrolling effect symbol 70a is displayed at a position near the upper left of the screen, and is displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, while the development production ends, the SP reach production starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen and in the center of the screen. The confrontation production in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. Further, the hold icon (here, the hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D) is displayed in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D), leaving the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C. The first hold icon only) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Further, the special symbol TZ is in the reach state with the same "7" symbol as the effect symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first hold number is started, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increase display of the first hold icon at this timing or when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound, which is the notification sound, is not output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final production of the confrontation production (decision production for notifying whether or not it is a big hit) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final production (decision production) of the confrontation production is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (e), in the first image display device 70, the effect that the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3 is performed, and the effect symbol 70a that is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is displayed. Temporarily stops (becomes a swaying state) with a combination (“777”) indicating that is a big hit.

The timing of T7 is the timing of the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (the 910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the return display and the increase display of the first hold icon by non-animation are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (swayed state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2 in a normal size.

Finally, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left, middle, and right variable display areas is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect symbol 70a, "777". Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

In this way, if the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the hold number will be changed even before the timing when the specific effect ends (frame update). Since the increase display is started, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display). Since the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (displayed) (frame update), it is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to grasp the transition of the number of special symbol hold, and improve the interest of the game. It is possible to make it.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) is completed, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the timing when the number of special symbol hold increases. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing of executing the increase display of the hold icon and the hold icon, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbol hold increases at the timing when the specific effect ends due to the generation notification sound. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that it was done, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of special symbols held increases more than once during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the increase display of the hold number is executed while the increase display of the hold icon is waited (restricted). However, it is advisable to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific effect is completed (frame update) in one frame.

In addition, when the number of special symbol hold increases during the execution of the specific effect (SP reach effect), the generation notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound. May be good.

Further, although the SP reach effect is exemplified as the specific effect, the SPSP reach effect may be included in the specific effect, or the full rotation reach effect may be included in the specific effect.

(Specific example when the number of holds increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific game state)
A specific example when the number of holdings increases or decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases / decreases before and after the end of the specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58 (a) to (f) and 59 (g) to (i) are FIGS. 57 (a). It is a figure which shows the production example corresponding to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing of the 400th frame after the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58A, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, and the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 to H24 are displayed on the first display units 70D1 to the fourth display unit 70D4 of the second hold icon display area 70D, respectively. The icon TH is displayed. Further, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining times") is displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the game ball is displayed at the upper right of the screen toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU prompting to fire is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing at which the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 415th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increase display of the first hold number by non-animation is started, but since the first hold icon display area 70B is erased, it is an increase display of the first hold icon and a notification sound when the icon is generated. The generation notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), in the first image display device 70, the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the timing of the 430th frame after the start of the variation effect. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area on the left, middle, and right. The combination of the effect symbols 70a indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the 15th frame after the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (the 445th frame after the variation effect is started). At this timing, a result display showing the result of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG is darkened, the "special time end" indicating the end of the specific gaming state, and the predetermined advantageous period. The number of big hit games executed in the character "Big hit x 1" is displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the timing of the 15th frame after the start of the result display (the 460th frame after the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), in the first image display device 70, the characters "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. It is additionally displayed.

The timing of T6 is the timing of the 30th frame after the start of the result display (the 475th frame from the start of the variation effect). At this timing, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ are completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen to stop and display, and the special symbol TZ is displayed. The stop display is made with the same combination "285" as the effect symbol 70a. Further, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

The timing of T7 is the timing (490th frame from the start of the variation effect) when the last (100th) variation effect in the specific gaming state ends and the first variation effect in the normal game state starts. At this timing, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are variablely displayed, the second reserved number is reduced by non-animation, the second reserved icon is changed to the icon by animation, and the second reserved icon is animated. The decrease display, the non-animated return display of the first hold icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first hold icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display unit 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4. The second hold icon (CD icon) H22 to H24 displayed on the screen starts moving (shifting) toward the adjacent display unit.

Further, the first hold icon display area is restored and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is returned and displayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display unit 70B2. It is displayed in normal size. Further, the reduced display is started in a state where the effect symbol 70a is not scrolled (updated to another effect symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a left-handed image HU urging the player to launch the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a is displayed.

The timing of T8 is the timing of the 20th frame from the start of the display due to the change of the second hold icon and the start of the reduction display (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the display due to the change of the second hold icon and the decrease display end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (h), in the first image display device 70, the second hold icon H21 moved from the first display unit 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. At the same time as the icon TH, the second hold icons H22 to H24 moved from the second display unit 70D2 to the fourth display unit 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display unit, and the reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the timing of the 10th frame after the display due to the change of the second hold icon and the end of the reduction display (520th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, scrolling (moving downward) of the effect symbol 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect symbol 70a in the left variable display area, the effect symbol 70a in the central variable display area Scrolling (moving downward) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol hold number (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is waited (restricted), while the increase display of the first hold number is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of special symbol reservations has increased even during the execution of the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of first special symbol hold (U1) increases during the specific game state, the increase display of the first hold icon is performed at the timing when the specific game state (last variation effect in) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if the increase display of the first reserved number executed before that is overlooked, it is possible to recognize that the number of the first special symbol reserved has increased, and the interest of the game is improved. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the increase display of the first hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the increase display of the hold icon by non-animation completed in one frame is performed, so that the special symbol is held. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing when the number increases and the timing when the increase display of the hold icon is executed, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the increase display of the hold icon is started at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends, the generation notification sound is not output, so the special symbol is displayed at the timing when the generation notification sound ends the specific game state. It becomes difficult to misunderstand that the number of holdings has increased, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect symbol does not scroll (it is not updated to the next effect symbol) until the display due to the change of the hold icon to the icon is completed, and the display due to the change of the hold icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling of the effect symbol (update to the next effect symbol) is started, it becomes easy to grasp the progress of the effect during the variable effect, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the number of 1st special symbol hold increases by a plurality during the specific game state, the hold icon increase display is waited (restricted) while the hold number increase display is executed. It suffices to collectively execute the increase display of the hold icon by the amount increased at the timing when the specific game state (the last variation effect in) ends (frame update) in one frame.

Further, when the number of first special symbol reservations increases during the specific game state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase display of the reservation number instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In the present embodiment, the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, but the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed). It is also possible to set (display) only the first hold icon display area 70B without displaying).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) is executed during the variable effect. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of the specific effect, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first reserved number display area 70E and the second reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) in the first image display device 70, but are set in the second image display device 71 (in this embodiment). It may be set (displayed) or set (displayed) on a dedicated display device (for example, 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.) different from the image display device. Then, when setting to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbol reservations depending on the lighting color and lighting / blinking mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150, and this processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing executed every predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds) in the lamp / drive control unit 150. Will be executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. When the power ON command is received, the process is transferred to step R102, and when the power ON command is not received, the process is transferred to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R103 whether or not the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the processing is transferred to step R105 assuming that the origin return processing of the accessory is not executed, and if the initial processing number is "1", the origin return processing is performed in step R104. This is done, and the initial processing of the character this time is completed. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the return operation of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the origin position is executed, or the initial processing number is set. Perform processing such as setting to "2". The details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial processing number is “2”. If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial operation processing of the accessory is not executed, and the initial operation processing of the accessory is terminated. If the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed. , End the initial processing of the character this time. Specifically, processing such as performing initial operation and initial light emission for confirming whether or not the accessory operates normally, and setting the initial processing number to "0" is performed. The details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 60, the origin return process for performing the return operation to the origin position of various accessories, and the initial operation for performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of various accessories are performed. The operation process is not executed at the same time. By doing so, the return operation to the origin position of various accessories and the initial operation and initial light emission of various accessories are not mixed, and the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are separately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. By doing so, the various accessories will initially operate from the origin position, and it will be possible to easily grasp whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Lamp / drive control unit home return processing)
The origin return process of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is “0”. do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", the drive target for returning to the origin is set in step R105-2. 1 Set to the movable member 73, and move the process to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the drive target to be returned to the origin is set in step R105-4. It is set in the second movable member 74, and the process is transferred to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the origin position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-11.

The lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position in step R105-6, and the movable member is moved for a predetermined time in step R105-7. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the board accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-9 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and if the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to. , Step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" so that the second movable member 74 can be driven, and the board accessory processing number is changed. If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R105-20.

The lamp CPU 150a determines in step R105-13 whether or not the effect button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that the effect button 17 is at the origin position is determined. If the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-14, and if the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process is transferred to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives an effect button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer has an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step R105-17 assuming that a return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, and if the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not the upper limit value, this time. The origin return processing of is finished.

The lamp CPU 150a sets the return abnormality information indicating that the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c in step R105-17, and clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer in step R105-18.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (effect button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R105-21, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the origin return process this time is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R105-21, and executes the initial operation processing of the accessory to the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R105-22. Set "2" and end the origin return processing this time.

As described above, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but in a predetermined order (first movable). The origin position is returned to the origin position in the order of the member 73 → the second movable member 74). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether or not various board accessories have returned to the origin position. Further, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other due to difficulty in separating, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying a load to each other so that both movable members are damaged at the same time. It is possible to suppress various inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. It is possible to execute the return operation to the same time (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the various accessories, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of the various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set for the time of the return operation to the origin position of each accessory. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories is not completed forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which various characters are performing a return operation and the effect operation is not performed even during the variable effect, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the origin return processing shown in FIG. 61, the return operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are obtained. When both of the return operations to are completed, the process for shifting to the initial operation process is performed. By doing so, the return operation of various accessories to the origin position and the initial operation of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are separately confirmed. It becomes possible.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 return to the origin position in a predetermined order (the order of the first movable member 73 → the second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position. The operation of returning to may be started. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and it is possible to smoothly shift to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next. Will be.

(Initial operation processing of lamp / drive control unit)
The initial operation processing of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the initial operation processing of the lamp / drive control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board bonus processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the board bonus is “0”. If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-4 to perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, step R107-3. In, "2" is set in the board accessory processing number assuming that the initial operation of the board accessory is not performed, and the process is transferred to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board bonus initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the board bonus initial operation pattern. The details of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63, one initial operation pattern is selected from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power ON command and the presence / absence of return abnormality information. Determine the operation pattern.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "0", the board bonus processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number is “1”. If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-8. The initial operation of the board accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the board accessory has been completed in all steps. If the initial operation of the board accessory has not completed all the processes, the process is transferred to step R107-11, and if the initial operation of the board accessory has completed all the processes, the board accessory is in step R107-10. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board bonus processing number is "1", the board bonus processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the board bonus.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (effect button 17) is “0”. If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process is transferred to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the return abnormality information of the effect button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process is transferred to step R107-14 to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory, and if the return abnormality information is set, the frame is set in step R107-13. Assuming that the initial operation of the accessory is not performed, "2" is set in the frame accessory processing number, and the processing is transferred to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory. The details of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial operation pattern is determined from a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of the power ON time command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the frame accessory processing number is “1”. If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the lamp RAM 150c is set in step R107-18. The initial operation of the frame accessory is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the initial operation of the frame accessory has completed all the steps. If the initial operation of the frame accessory is not completed in all steps, the process is transferred to step R107-21, and if the initial operation of the frame accessory is completed in all steps, the frame accessory is in step R107-20. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the processing for initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the end condition is satisfied, the process is transferred to step R107-22, and if the end condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. ..

As described above, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are performed. It can be executed at the same time (at the same time). By doing so, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial operation of the various characters, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the various characters from being hindered during the game.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when the first movable member 73 constituting the board accessory and the second movable member 74 have a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly initializing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, when the effect button 17 constituting the frame accessory has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the effect button 17 is completely broken or damaged by forcibly initializing the effect button 17 in which the return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed and the return abnormality is executed. Even if the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the above occurs is not executed, the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the accessory that does not have a return abnormality.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) are completed. If this is the case, the initial operation processing will end. By doing so, it is unclear whether it is an initial operation or an effect operation, such as one of the board accessory and the frame accessory performing the initial operation, but the other performs the effect operation. Will not occur.

(Table for determining the initial operation pattern of the board)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table is associated with the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence / absence of return abnormality information, and the selected initial operation pattern. For reference, the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the initial operation. The number of steps of is described.

The initial operation pattern is determined when patterns 01 to 03, which are determined when the power-on designation command is received, or when the first power recovery designation command, which indicates that the customer is waiting, is received. Patterns 04 to 06, a pattern determined when a second power recovery designation command indicating that a special symbol variation is being displayed, or a third power recovery designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received. 07 to 09 are set.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 is in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin. The second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → origin return without the first movable member 73 operating. During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → origin return → large descent → origin return, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white during that period.

The "initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights (lights up) only in blue. Same as pattern 01.
The "initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light in blue, the result is the same as the initial operation pattern 03.

The "initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off. It is the same as the initial operation pattern 01 or the initial operation pattern 04.
The "initial operation pattern 08" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 02 or the initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
The "initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as the initial operation pattern 03 or the initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

In the initial operation pattern 02, the initial operation pattern 05, and the initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described, but this point is the first movable due to the return abnormality of the first movable member 73. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

Further, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is the second movable due to the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the member LED blinks red to notify the abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. It can be mentioned that the operation modes (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) are the same. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

It should be noted that the operation mode of the initial operation is the same as long as the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is at least the same, the operation time in each process may be the same, and the operation time in each process is the same. It may be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

Further, when the operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and / or the second movable member 74 is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, the power is turned on. An operation that is not in the initial operation at the time may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power restoration, or an operation that is not in the initial operation at the time of power restoration may be executed in the initial operation at the time of power-on. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It will be possible.

The second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second) is used when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. A point is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. While they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

It should be noted that the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is the same, but the initial light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. On the contrary, when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different, while that of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Further, both the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED are different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. It is also good. By doing so, it is possible to easily grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. The difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to understand whether it is the initial operation by power restoration that restores to the customer waiting state, the initial operation by power restoration that restores during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. It will be possible.

It should be noted that both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but the first movable member LED is turned off. The member LED and the second movable member LED may be turned on in the same light emitting mode as at the time of power restoration for restoring the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored. If there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the second movable member has no return abnormality in the first movable member 73. When the 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a return abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table referred to when determining an initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (effect button 17).

The type of the command when the power is turned on and the selected initial operation pattern are associated with the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, and the operation mode at the time of initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are described for reference. ing.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when the power-on designation command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return → intermittent vibration, and the effect button LED is activated during that period. Lights (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → origin return. During that period, the effect button lights up (lights up) in blue.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power supply restoration designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or the third power supply restoration designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress is received. The effect button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the effect button LED turns off during that period.

The continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 are executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period generated during the execution of the variable effect. The time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect (1 second vibration if it is an effective period for a big hit notice that expects a big hit, and 5 if it is an effective period for a decision effect that notifies whether or not it is a big hit. The time is different from the second vibration).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the frame accessory is used when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of (effect button 17) is different. By doing so, it is easy to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Is possible.

The second feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that it is designed to make it. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the initial operation of the effect button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the frame accessory (effect button 17) is in the initial operation during the initial operation of the frame accessory (effect button 17) at the time of turning on the power and at the time of restoring the power to restore the customer waiting state. There is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the above. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the board accessory is restored when the power is turned on, during the variable display of the special symbol, or during the jackpot game. The light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). Will be.

The effect button LED is turned off when the power is restored during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game, but it is the same as when the power is restored to restore the effect button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be turned on in a light emitting mode.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on and the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. The point is that the numbers are different. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is larger than the number of emission colors in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but it may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. There is a point that the emission color that is not included in is included. By doing so, it is easier to understand whether it is the initial operation by turning on the power (the control state of the game is initialized) or the initial operation by restoring the power (the control state of the game is restored). It becomes possible.

The emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include an emission color that is not included in the emission color in the initial emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is produced during the effective period that occurs during the execution of the variable effect. There is a point different from the time when the effect button 17 vibrates during the operation effect executed by operating the button 17. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that it is a vibration in the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is whether or not the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which is not detected whether or not it is at the origin position, is at the origin position. It can be mentioned that the effect button 17 is overlaid with the initial operation of the effect button 17 to be detected. By doing so, the operation confirmation of the effect button 17 and the operation confirmation of the button vibration motor can be performed at the same time, and the time required for the operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T8, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T9, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage. The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after turning on the power)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, the initial light emission is completed and the lights are turned on while waiting for customers (white lights), and at the timing of T7, the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) is set. After that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the sound becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the initial screen is displayed, so that the setting change screen is displayed, and then the power on control command is received by the effect control board 130. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value specification command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial stage. The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "1" is displayed from the voice output device 9. "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. Flashes red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "1" is displayed from the voice output device 9. "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the effect button 17, the effect button LED blinks red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality ( The abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed. Then, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the light is turned on while waiting for the customer (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the variable display (loss variable display) of the special symbol and has the hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

At the timing of T2, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". , The audio output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the first hold number is displayed. The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating “3”, and the sub second hold display 84 has a display mode indicating “0”.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T5 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and at the timing of T7, the first operation is started. 2 When the initial operation of the movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary) on the image display device. The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the displayed state is displayed, and the stop sound “Don ♪” is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image (). The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "2". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

If the state after the power is restored is a special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold storage, "0" is displayed on the sub first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and the timing of T9. The basic operation flow from the timing of T1 to the timing of T8 described above is the same except that the fluctuation effect is not started by receiving the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after that, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which the effect can be executed.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial design at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed. Further, the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the power supply to the effect control board 130 is started without supplying power to the main control board 110. At this time, as the initial operation of the image display device, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after that, the effect control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) is displayed. Further, the audio output device 9 is in a silent state.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the second standby screen.

In addition, the voice output device 9 was set to be silent when the power recovery designation command was received, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power was turned on is output. You may do so. In this case, it may be the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is ON.

When the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally, the effect control is performed from the first case, the main control board 110, in which the power is supplied to the effect control board 130 but the power is not supplied to the main control board 110. The second case where the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, the third case where the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including the half-inserted state), and the like can be mentioned. Case 3 will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, power supply to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and first hold number) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110. , The second hold number = 0) is received, the initial screen is maintained in the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T3, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a variation start command (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the image display device receives the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. , The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ variable display, the hold icon is moved, or the icon is moved to the variable display). Change, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 77 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Is to display the standby screen in which the lost effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed. , Sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped, the customer waiting state specification command is issued while the standby screen is being displayed (whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished). When the demo waiting time has elapsed after receiving or after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the control state of the game is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is powered by a power source instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, and the big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on specification command is received is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) or big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). 17) The return operation and the initial operation are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 66, 67, or 68. Will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 78 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is replaced with the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol of the above, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 becomes silent.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 79 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the variable display is performed on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the reserved digit "1" is displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game". The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, The sub-normal map fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal map hold display 86) maintain the displayed contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the effect confirmation display is performed by losing the variation effect. At this time, in the image display device, the stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still displayed). Is displayed, and the stop sound "Don ♪" is output from the voice output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the confirmation display of the variation effect is performed by the big hit. At this time, on the image display device, the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the confirmation screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (stationary display) are displayed, and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a big hit display mode which shows that it is a big hit.

When the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are in the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Depending on the mode, it may be possible to grasp that the power restoration designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. The fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display and the sub-second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 80 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and right-handed is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The suggested right-handed display image MG is displayed, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is stopped and displayed (still displayed) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. Further, the big hit display (lighting) is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off, and the image display device is a big hit including the characters "Please restart the game (big hit)". The intermediate return screen is displayed and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) maintain the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You may do so.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned off, and at the timing of T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the second movable The initial operation of the member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed and the light is turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, in the image display device, a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , The normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that the normal ending effect screen is not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Will be displayed.

Also, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when a round designation command is received while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, the special jackpot effect screen until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are set to the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but are set to a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of various accessories or in the abnormality notification mode as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. Will be done.

In FIGS. 77 to 80, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer is restored to the waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to display the hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display does hold hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed. By doing this, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demo production, and the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display during the change display of the special symbol) is performed. Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the returning screen is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the returning screen is displayed on the image display device for the sub hold display (sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84). (Before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode indicates the number of pending numbers. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82) displays fluctuations (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) indicates the number of holdings in accordance with the start of this variation display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends), the return operation of various accessories is performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the return operation of the various accessories without complicating the control related to the return operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the character with the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is being continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to surely notify the character having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) from the subsequent timing (timing at which the effect symbol 70a is displayed when the return operation is completed immediately). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (display of the screen during restoration). From the middle), the initial operation of various characters is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at an appropriate timing according to the state when the power supply is generated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power restoration without the above, when the restoring screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83). , Sub-second hold indicator 84) is configured to perform the initial operation after the display mode indicating the number of holds is set. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the board after letting the player grasp the number of reservations (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the variable display of the special symbol and before the display of the effect symbol 70a), the sub-hold indicator (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84). ) Is displayed to indicate the number of pending items, and then the initial operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the frame accessory after letting the player grasp the number of holds (progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game. Become.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Initials of various accessories from the same timing as when the effect is displayed, that is, the timing after the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (when the return operation is completed immediately, the effect symbol 70a is displayed). It is designed to operate. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored only by displaying the initial screen. The operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission are not executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command and receives a special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of a game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a winning sound is output. It is designed to do. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variable effect can be executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When a fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 while the control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing an effect according to a command, the variation effect is performed without executing the return operation or the initial operation of various accessories. Is supposed to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect using various accessories without being hindered by the return operation or the initial operation during the execution of the variable effect.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power-on specification command or power recovery specification command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) have already been completed, the main control board 110 When the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the power supply is stopped, the recovery operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. (Including initial emission) is to be executed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as in the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed can execute the effect according to the command. Even during the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed responds to a command. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted even during the control state in which the effect can be executed. Is designed to output the initialization notification sound again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the voice output device 9 does not execute the return operation and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) of various accessories, but the initialization notification sound. May just output.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

It should be noted that the main control board is in a control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute an effect according to a command, such as during a fluctuation effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply to the 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. ing. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 such as during a variable effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed executes an effect according to a command. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. It becomes possible to solve the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Modification example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 81 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is performed during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. A case where the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the stop is described will be described.

At the timing of T1, it is already in the customer waiting state after the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories are completed, and the image display device has the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of a certain "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. Is lit while waiting for customers.

If the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variation effect executed after the output of the initialization notification sound is completed, the image display device is displayed. Means that the standby screen in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub Information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display The device 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, instead of the second standby screen, the image display device displays an initial screen including the characters "reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen of "135" which is the initial design when the power is turned on. The first standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 displays an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed, or the jackpot is being performed. Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is displayed. The example shown in FIG. 77 except that it is a customer waiting demo production screen, a fluctuation production screen (loss fluctuation production screen, jackpot fluctuation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). Is basically the same.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 82 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, while the effect control board 130 is in the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states capable of executing the effect according to the command, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped to supply the backup power supply. A case where the main power supply is restarted while the supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is finished, or the previous time. When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the initial screen including the characters "reading" is displayed on the image display device, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map fluctuation display 85, sub) The normal figure hold display 86) is hidden.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are pressed. The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device is replaced with the initial screen by "753" which is an initial design at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T7, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ).

It should be noted that the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound have already been completed, and the customer waiting demo effect is being executed, the variation effect (loss variation effect, jackpot variation effect) is being executed, or the jackpot is being performed. Even when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the production (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is displayed. Figures 78 to 80 show except that the demo effect screen for waiting for customers, the variable effect screen (missing variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen), and the big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). It is basically the same as the above example.

In FIGS. 81 to 82, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the standby screen on which the effect symbol 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 to 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are displayed from the initial screen. , And the effect button LED is turned off. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has been stopped (there was an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of various accessories from the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the various accessories are not started from the timing when the initial screen is switched or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen. The initial operation of may be started.

Also, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen is displayed from the standby screen when the power ON command (power-on specification command, power recovery specification command) is received. You may switch to the screen. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen or the timing between the initial screen and the standby screen, or the initial screen is changed to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial operation of various accessories may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen or the timing of switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation of various accessories may be started at the timing of switching to.

(Modification example when the second movable member has a return abnormality after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a modified example in which the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the initial screen in which the characters "reading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device is displayed.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T2, the origin return process is started to return the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position. The operation starts.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off, and the image display device has the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of turning on the power, and the effect symbol 70a. The first standby screen in a state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed, and the voice output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound composed of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared".

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. (Abnormal notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the effect button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the initial light emission of the effect button LED ends and the light is turned on while waiting for customers (white lighting), and the initial movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are initially lit. The initial operation process ends without the operation being executed.

When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T6, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, the game ball to the first starting port 45 When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning is received, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "1", and the hold number is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Along with displaying the first hold icon, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the variable display is started by the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are started. The LED and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

Even when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode). , The initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Further, even when the power is restored, if the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED notify the occurrence of the return abnormality. Therefore, it blinks in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process is completed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

As described above, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, not only the movable member having the return abnormality but also the return abnormality occurs. The initial operation is not executed even for a movable member that does not exist. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable member (particularly, the movable member on which the return abnormality has not occurred) from becoming inoperable during the execution of the game (variable effect, jackpot game), and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED. Flashes red to notify the recovery error. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it easier to grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member, as compared with the case where only the movable member LED provided on the movable member having the return abnormality blinks in red.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 and the second movable member 73 are movable. An initial operation is executed for the effect button 17 that does not collide with the member 74. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to grasp the abnormality of the effect button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the effect button LED provided on the effect button 17 returns. The initial light emission is performed without blinking red to notify the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that there is no return abnormality in the effect button 17.

When the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed without executing the initial operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be set to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when the effect button 17 has a return abnormality, the initial operation process may be completed for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 without executing the initial operation. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED may be set to blink red in order to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Example of production when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect)
84 and 85 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the icon change effect and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 84A, when the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, "728". It is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display are started. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the unit 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change effect is started by changing the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red character icon, and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off accordingly. The lamp change effect is started by changing to the state of blinking red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

Then, when the SP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased together with the hold icon.

After that, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 84 (e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C on which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning opening lamp NR is not turned off as the icon is erased, and the lamp change effect on the winning opening lamp NR remains continuous.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 84 (f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85 (g), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. Maintain the state.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 85 (h). The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect of whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to the jackpot effect symbol having higher value for the player). However, even here, the winning opening lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the loss), as shown in FIG. 85 (i), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (swayed). The effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen (second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed) are displayed without performing (variation). The fluctuation effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed on the icon display area 70C, but is rectangular. By displaying the area image, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (j), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 85 (k), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (swayed). The jackpot production symbol 70a (reach state before power off) of "777" suggesting the type of this jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing fluctuation / swing display) is "3". ↓ 3 ”is a combination of production symbols that is different from the reach combination by the production symbol), and the stop screen with the special symbol TZ stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed, and the lamp change effect is resumed with the winning opening lamp NR. The fluctuation production ends without doing anything.

It should be noted that not only the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed, but also other variable effects (variable effect in which normal variation is executed, variable effect in which shortened variation is executed, variable effect in which normal reach effect is executed, SP reach effect). As for the variable effect), when the power supply stopped during the execution is resumed and the execution period of the effect ends, the temporary stop display (sway fluctuation / rocking display) of the effect symbol 70a is not performed and " 753 ”missing effect symbol 70a, or the jackpot effect symbol that is the same combination of effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbol that formed the reach state before the power was turned off, or a combination of different effect symbols is stopped display (still display). Will be done.

Further, regarding the special symbol TZ, whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and whether the state after that is the normal game state or the specific game state (low probability time short game state, high probability time short game state). Regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) with a number having the same display mode (shape, design) and the same combination as the effect symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 85 (l), the image display device is provided with information indicating the type of the jackpot game (“MAX jackpot” indicating that the jackpot game is the first jackpot game). The including opening effect is started, and the first hold icon display area 70B, the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (it does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit) (for example, white lighting). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the power supply stopped during the execution of the variation effect in which the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol confirmation command (when the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the transition to the customer waiting state is performed after that, the customer waiting state is specified after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed. When a command) is received, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a stop (stationary display) without temporarily stopping the effect symbol 70a (sway fluctuation / swing display). By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss fluctuation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the combination of the effect symbols, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display) instead of the normal loss effect symbol. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as determining the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed (stationary display) by lottery, the control state of the game is restored, and the power supply is restored. It becomes possible to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed at the time of stopping has ended.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) after the power supply stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In that case, the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display). By doing so, it is possible to understand that the power supply is restored so that the control state of the game is restored, and that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable effect. Become.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the combination of the jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the control state of the game is restored, the reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot production symbols that is different from the reach combination of the production symbols that were used. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbol that was scheduled to be stopped before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the variable effect executed at the time when the power supply is stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the power supply is restarted and controlled. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display) without executing the promotion effect. By doing so, no useless effect is performed until the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (still display), so the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable effect. Can be immediately grasped by the player.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the power supply stopped during the execution of the loss variation effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the game is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation effect. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after the restart of power supply is the same as in the case where the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether the loss fluctuation effect is being executed or the jackpot variation effect is being executed, and the display after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode as before the power supply is stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, the stop display (still display) is performed with a number having the same combination as the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply was stopped has ended.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped while the icon is displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. Until the variation effect (scrolling of the effect symbol 70a) is started, the icon display area 70C displays a rectangular area image, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is a background image or the like. The effect image is secured in a displayable state, but the icon is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, when the power supply stopped while the hold icon is displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the display of the returning screen is completed and then the next step. By displaying a rectangular area image in the hold icon display area until the variable effect of is started, the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed. It is secured and the hold icon is displayed. By doing so, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to grasp that the pending fluctuation effect has not disappeared, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Will be.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 84 to 85, the variation effect corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. , Rainbow) If the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR is a big hit without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (turns off or lights up in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid the situation where the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It will be possible.

After the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but as in the case of loss, when the power is restored. The second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of the initial symbol "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display) may be displayed.

Further, after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the stop screen in the state where the jackpot effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect symbol 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. May be started for the opening effect of the jackpot game in which is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of the jackpot game may be displayed in the opening effect, the jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration may be displayed. TZ may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation effect is completed, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, which are the initial symbols at the time of power restoration, are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect is completed, the jackpot is displayed. The opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in the state where the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot game is executed without displaying the effect symbol 70a in the reach state in the variable effect (to expect the jackpot game to be executed), the specification is specified. After the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if there is a loss, the effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (still display), and if it is a big hit. The jackpot effect symbol 70a may be stopped and displayed (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (still display) after the control state of the game is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the types of jackpot games executed thereafter. May be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and "222". It is assumed that "444", "666", and "888", and the combinations of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game are "111", "555", and "999".

When the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1 ↓ 1" which constitutes a part of the combination of the jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game, the jackpot game executed after that is the first. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols different from the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then executed. When the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of the same or different jackpot effect symbols as the reach combination by the effect symbols forming the reach state). It is advisable to stop and display.

Further, the special symbol TZ does not stop and display (still display) with a number that is the same combination as the effect symbol 70a after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, but the combination is different from the effect symbol 70a. It may be set to stop display (still display) with a number.

In addition, when the normal game state and the customer waiting state are after the power supply is restarted and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary display), while the power supply is turned on. If the specific game state (low-accuracy time-short game state, high-accuracy time-short game state) and the customer waiting state after restarting and the control state is restored, the effect symbol 70a is not stopped and displayed (still display). The special symbol TZ may be stopped and displayed (still display).

(Example of effect when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during continuous notice effect, hold icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 86 and 87 are diagrams showing an example of an effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the continuous notice effect, the hold icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 86A, the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the third display unit 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the first hold icon (shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2) ( By changing the display mode of the icon final display mode (red character icon) to a blue character icon and displaying it, the hold icon change effect is started, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to the blue flashing state. By doing so, the lamp change effect is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes a preliminary variation is started, as shown in FIG. 86 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2 are displayed. The displayed first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the hold icon change effect and the lamp change effect are continued. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device is hidden and the winning opening lamp NR is turned off, as shown in FIG. 86 (g).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 86 (h), the image display device displays the initial screen including the characters "reading", but the winning opening lamp NR is a lamp. Keep the lights off without restarting the change effect.

Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the second power supply restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the character "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device as shown in FIG. 87 (i). The returning screen including the above is displayed over the execution period of the pre-variation, but the winning opening lamp NR remains off again.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-variation ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the loss), the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway variation) as shown in FIG. 87 (j). Instead, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the lamp change effect is changed in advance without restarting. Is finished.

At this time, a CD icon that is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed on the icon display area 70C. However, when the square area image is displayed, the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state where the effect image such as the background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is started, as shown in FIG. 87 (k), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1 displays the variable display. 1 The hold icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if the newly executed lottery for the icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result. The icon change effect is started. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the winning opening lamp NR remains off and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if the lottery related to the alternative notice effect performed when the power supply is resumed is won, the mini character MCB will be displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB will be moved so as to be framed out. A notice effect is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (l), the dialogue issued by the ally A is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the image display device, and the voice "Chance has arrived!" Corresponding to the dialogue from the voice output device 9. Is displayed to execute the dialogue notice effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (m), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 87 (n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 87 (o), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 87 (p), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333" suggesting the type of the jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off during the display of the initial screen and / or the returning screen, it is not used in the lamp change effect (it does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a big hit) (for example, white lighting). ) May turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

Further, if the special symbol confirmation command cannot be received during the fluctuation effect (temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) of the effect symbol 70a), the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped and displayed (sway fluctuation) does not stop and display. The temporary stop display (sway fluctuation) will be continued.

As described above, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure stored at the time of restoration is stored. It is possible to execute an alternative advance notice effect different from the continuous advance notice effect without restarting the continuous advance notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the determination information. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, the icon is displayed as a special icon (including the case where the final display mode has not changed and the case where the final display mode has changed). When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold icon that was displayed as a special icon is now displayed as a normal icon. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, when the power supply stopped during the execution of the icon change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is restored. In the variable effect corresponding to, the hold icon change effect is not executed, but the icon change effect can be executed again. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the icon change effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, even when the icon change effect is executed again during the execution of the variation effect corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration. It is no longer executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

Further, according to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 86 to 87, the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect (the lighting color (blue, red) with high expectation of winning the winning opening lamp NR is high. Even if the power supply stopped during the storage of the special figure judgment information that will be changed to (rainbow) is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot is not restarted without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set to a notification mode (turned off or turned on in white) that does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning a big hit. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid the situation where the player is confused that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It will be possible.

(Specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes)
88 (a) and 88 (b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection state of various detection means changes during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is integrated into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. And.

First, FIG. 88 (a) will be described.
FIG. 88A is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and only the first start port detection switch 45a is not connected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, the effect control board 130 executes the connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the characters "connection error detection" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the voice output device 9 displays an alarm and "connection error". A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice of is output.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, it is detected that the connection error is canceled by the main control board 110. However, the connection error notification continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Next, FIG. 88 (b) will be described.
FIG. 88B is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed). ..

At the timing of T2, for example, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are not connected. The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error, and the effect control board 130 executes magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, and connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device has the characters "magnetic error detection" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the characters "radio error detection" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the "connection error" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the characters "detection" is displayed, and a magnetic error notification sound including an alarm and a voice "magnetic error" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board It is detected by the 110 that the magnetic error, the radio wave error, and the connection error are canceled, but various error notifications are continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off.

When the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state, the main control board 110 does not detect the occurrence of a connection error and causes an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) connected to the main control board 110. When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a) change from the connected state to the disconnected state, an error notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (half-insertion of the connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and it is possible to take a prompt response.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) is not included. Even when the connection state is restored to the connection state, the error notification of the magnetic error or the radio wave error is continued until the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts on the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, the error notification is not performed even if the payout control board 120 changes from the connected state to the unconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

Even when the power supply to the game machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , Various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. 88) from the display of the initial screen or after the end of the initial screen (when the display of the first standby screen or the second standby screen starts). Radio error notification) may be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first start port detection switch 45a is used. The connection error notification may be canceled when the connection state is changed from the unconnected state. By doing so, it is possible to continue the game as it is in a case where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, the radio error notification sound related to a radio wave error with a lower priority (importance) than the magnetic error and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error with a lower priority (importance) than the radio wave error are referred to as magnetic errors. If they occur at the same time, they are not output, but the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Further, in the magnetic error notification, the radio wave error notification, and the connection error notification, the error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or the error notification image EG may be displayed and the error notification sound may be output. May not be output.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of lamp / drive control unit accessories)
The initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the initial processing of the accessory of the lamp / drive control unit 150.
In addition, here, the same processing as the accessory initial processing of the first embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof will be omitted, and different processing will be described.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the start of power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process is transferred to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

When the lamp CPU 150a receives a power ON command for determining whether or not a power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received in step R102A. Moves the process to step R102B, and if the power ON time command has not been received, moves the process to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds in which the recovery operation and the initial operation should have been completed from the previous power ON) has elapsed, the process is transferred to step R103, and the predetermined time has not elapsed. In that case, the process is transferred to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) to the initial process number updated in each process of the accessory initial process. Set "1" of.

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories are started. It has become. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to reduce the processing load related to the operation.

Further, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, a power ON command (power on designation) occurs after a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. When a command (command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation and the initial operation of various accessories are performed again. By doing so, the main control board 110 was not started normally, and the command when the power was turned on was transmitted later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred. It becomes possible to grasp that.

When a power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received, the recovery operation of various accessories and the return operation of various accessories are performed regardless of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1. , The initial operation may be performed. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the elapsed period from the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, and it is possible to simplify the process when the power ON time command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after turning on the power)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

The power-on accompanied by the initialization of the main RAM 110c includes a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process and a power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process. However, here, a case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. Then, the light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become. When the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T7, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T8, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T9, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. In addition, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights alternately in red and white, and the effect button LED turns red → Lights in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the fluctuation display is started on the sub first fluctuation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after the power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as a command for turning on the power transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , The light emitting mode of the effect button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. finish.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after turning on the power)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change process will be described.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED change and light up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

In the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case where the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing the setting change processing has been described, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. When the power is turned on, the setting change specification command is received by the effect control board 130 after the dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, so that the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power on specification command is output and controlled. Upon reception by the board 130, the first standby screen is displayed, and the return operation and the initial operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) are started. .. The first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the set value specification command.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power restoration)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the first power supply restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). Become.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. .. At this time, the second movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the effect is produced. The light emitting mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When it is finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member after power restoration)
FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off.
Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed in a state where the return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red (abnormality notification mode) for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting modes of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED change and light up in blue. ..

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation process is performed without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73. When it is finished, the first movable member LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lit).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the variable display is started on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are displayed. The light is turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when there is a return abnormality in the effect button after power restoration)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the effect button 17 has a return abnormality after the power supply is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed with the return abnormality occurring in the effect button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the effect button LED blinks in red for notifying the occurrence of the return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. The operation will not start.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed).

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E of the image display device and the second hold number are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting).

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T6, the hold displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub first hold display 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound from the audio output device 9 "Pon ♪" is output.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "0". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the effect button LED ends, the variation display is started on the sub first variation display 81, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changing. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 has a display mode indicating "0".

(Specific example when the state after power restoration is displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol and there is hold memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the variable display (loss variable display) of the special symbol and there is hold storage.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and the power supply is started, the origin return process is started and the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 to the origin position is started. Will be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub first fluctuation display 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, and the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

Further, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. The light emitting mode of the second movable member LED and the effect button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 maintains silence.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 3, second hold number = 0) as a command when the power is turned on is received, the image display device displays the returning screen, so that the first hold number is displayed. The state in which the reserved numbers are not displayed in the display area 70E or the second reserved number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating “3”, and the sub second hold display 84 and the sub-general figure hold display 86 have a display mode indicating “0”.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T4 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned off.

When a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (stationary) on the image display device. The stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in the displayed state is displayed, and the stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, and the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image (). The pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

When a fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E changes to "2". The effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "2" is displayed.

(Specific example when the power-on specification command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power-on designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied by (including the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command A third case or the like in which the connector of the communication line is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, when the power supply is started without supplying power to the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are kept off. Further, the sub 1st fluctuation display 81, the sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, the sub 1st hold display 83, the sub 2nd hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display are displayed. 86 is in a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started, and the T4 When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts, and the second movable member ends at the timing of T6. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command.

When the power line to the main control board 110 is connected to the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect corresponding to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. From the output device 9, an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared" is output.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. When the light is turned on (lit in white) and the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses after that, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

The first standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power-on designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the first standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The first standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of display on the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of display on the first standby screen.

(Specific example when the power recovery specification command could not be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is supplied to the effect control board 130, but the power line is disconnected from the main control board 110 or the power line connector is not connected (the power line connector is not connected). The first case where the power supply (main power supply only) is not supplied due to the half-inserted state), the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, the command communication line A third case or the like in which the connector of the above is in a non-connected state (including a half-inserted state) can be mentioned, but here, the first case will be described.

Since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, the description here is omitted, and the timing after T7 will be described.

When the power line to the main control board 110 is connected at the timing of T7, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 is in the control state in which the effect according to the command can be executed. , And the return operation of the effect button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the sound is displayed. The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are maintained in the extinguished state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the effect button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T9 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T10, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed, and the customer is waiting. It lights up (lights up in white).

The second standby screen was displayed when the effect control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, but instead of immediately displaying the second standby screen, a dark color display screen as a kind of initial screen was displayed. The second standby screen may be displayed after displaying for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the voice output device 9 was set to be silent when the power recovery designation command was received, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power was turned on (which makes it possible to grasp) is emitted for a predetermined period. The output may be made over (for example, 30 seconds). In this case, it may be the same alarm as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In FIGS. 99 to 100, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

(Specific example when the command when the power is turned on cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example when the power ON command (power ON designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is ON.

When the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally, the power is not supplied to the main control board 110, the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 is disconnected, and the command communication line. There is a case where the connector of is not connected (including the half-inserted state).

Since the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, the description here is omitted, and the timing after T5 will be described.

At the timing of T5, the special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second) is performed without the effect control board 130 receiving the first power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110. Upon receiving the hold number = 0), the image display device maintains the state in which the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are changed and turned off. It becomes.

When the first special symbol storage designation command (first hold number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 45 is received at the timing of T7, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "pon ♪" is output from the voice output device 9.

When a variation start command (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device receives the effect symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the effect symbol 70a. , The second standby screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable effect (effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ variable display, the hold icon is moved, or the icon is moved to the variable display). Change, BGM output) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

(Specific example 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 102 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 in the case of restarting after stopping.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted is the case where the power supply lines (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact with each other due to an external factor. In some cases, the connector of the power supply line (main power supply line, backup power supply line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected (including the half-inserted state), and then the connector is connected. Can be mentioned.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is stopped will be described.

At the timing of T1, the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation is completed are already in the customer waiting state, and the image display device has the effect symbol of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button are displayed. The LED is lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub-first). 1 Fluctuation display 81, Sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, Sub 1st hold display 83, Sub 2nd hold display 84, Sub normal figure fluctuation display 85, Sub normal figure hold display 86) also display contents. maintain.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power-on designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are alternately lit in red and white as the initial light emission, the effect button LED is lit in white as the initial light emission, and the image display device is powered by a power source. The effect symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol at the time of input, and the first standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still display) are displayed, and the sound output device 9 displays an alarm and "RAM". An initialization notification sound consisting of the voice "Clear" is output.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED is completed, and the lights are lit while waiting for customers (white lighting). ), And when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) elapses at the timing of T10, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the state becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the return operation, the initial operation, and the variation effect (loss variation effect) after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, and the big hit effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect). Even when the power supply to the main control board 110 (including the backup power supply) is stopped and then restarted during the control state in which the effect control board can execute the effect according to the command, such as during execution, the timing of T4 The screen displayed on the image display device by the time the power-on specification command is received is the variable effect screen (loss variable effect screen, big hit variable effect screen) or big hit effect screen (opening effect screen, round game effect screen, ending effect screen). ), It is the same as the case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the customer waiting state, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button). 17) The return operation and the initial operation are performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9.

Further, when there is an abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 91, 92, or 93. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 103 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 in the case of restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state (including the execution of the customer waiting demo effect), which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, the main control board 110 is input. A case where the main power supply is stopped and the backup power supply is continued and the main power supply is restarted will be described.

At the timing of T1, if the return operation, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed, the image display device is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. The second standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member are displayed. The LED and the effect button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, in the case of the customer waiting state after the end of the return operation, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories and the variation effect executed after the end, the image display device may be lost. The standby screen in which the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display), or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-normal figure hold indicator 86 have a display mode indicating "0".

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub 1st fluctuation display 81, sub 2nd fluctuation display 82, sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84, sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, sub-normal figure hold display 86 ) Also keeps the displayed contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, a process for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub). The first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

Even if the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving the customer waiting state specification command regardless of whether or not the fluctuation effect is completed, or When the demo waiting time has elapsed after the end of the previous customer waiting demo production), the customer waiting demo production is started.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command as the power ON time command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. Instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo effect screen, the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed (still display) on the image display device. The second standby screen of the state is displayed.

Further, when a special symbol storage designation command (first hold number and second hold number = 0) as a power ON command is received, the first hold number display area 70E and the second hold number of the image display device are received. "0" is displayed as a reserved number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first variation display 81, the sub-second variation indicator 82, and the sub-normal map variation indicator 85 continue the non-display mode (loss mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the sub-first hold indicator 83 and the sub-second hold indicator 84 have a display mode indicating "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. It ends, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and waiting for customers. It lights up (lights up in white).

When there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the initial operation and the initial light emission of the various accessories are performed in the same manner as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97.

(Specific example 3 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 104 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect (while the power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the variable effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the variation effect is being executed, the variation effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and the variation effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, the variable display is performed on the sub first variable indicator 81, and the reserved digit "1" is displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the variation effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation display 81, sub second variation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the effect control board 130 receives the power restoration designation command for during special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are received. The return operation to the origin position of is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The returning screen including the characters "Please restart the game" is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub). The second variation indicator 82, the sub first hold indicator 83, the sub second hold indicator 84, the sub-general figure variation indicator 85, and the sub-normal map hold indicator 86) maintain the displayed contents.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

When the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T10, the effect confirmation display is performed by losing the variation effect. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the stop screen in which the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed (still displayed), and the audio output device 9 is displayed. A stop sound is output from. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 has a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that the display is a loss.

When the result of the variation effect this time is a big hit, when the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the confirmation display of the variation effect is performed by the big hit. At this time, the image display device displays the effect symbol 70a such as the jackpot effect symbol "777" and the stop screen in the state where the special symbol TZ is stopped (still display), and the sub first variable display 81. Then, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the voice output device 9.

When the fluctuation start command (effect symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received at the timing of T11, the hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variation effect (variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the hold icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the sub-first variable display 81 starts the variable display, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are turned on during the fluctuation, and the sub first hold display 83 is turned on. , "0" is displayed.

At the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED have the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but the special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the power is turned off or the power is restored. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable effect recognized by the effect control board 130 elapses before the special symbol confirmation command is received, the temporary stop display or stop display of the effect symbol 70a is not performed. The fluctuation display on the sub-first fluctuation display and the sub-second fluctuation display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when only the power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
FIG. 105 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130) after the origin return process and the initial operation process are completed. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only the supply is stopped and then restarted.

Here, the supply of the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped during the execution of the jackpot effect, which is one of the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, and the backup power supply is supplied. The case where the main power supply is restarted while the power supply is continued will be described.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, the jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed on the image display device, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”). Is in a stopped display (static display) state. Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F.

At this time, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. Further, the big hit display (lighting) is performed on the sub first fluctuation display 81.

When only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped at the timing of T2, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation). The display contents 81, the sub second fluctuation display 82, the sub first hold display 83, the sub second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents. ..

When the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted at the timing of T3, the process for restoring the control state of the game is performed without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, in the image display device, the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed is maintained, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure hold display 86) also maintain the display contents.

When the effect control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the jackpot medium transmitted from the main control board 110 at the timing of T4, the origin return process is started and the origin of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 The return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as the initial light emission, and the effect button LED lights up in white as the initial light emission. The image display device displays a return-to-return screen for the jackpot medium, which includes the characters "Please resume the game (big hit in progress)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. Further, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub-normal map fluctuation display 85, sub-general). The holding display 86) maintains the displayed contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (main power supply only) is stopped during the fluctuation effect shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You may do so.

When the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is completed at the timing of T5, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. Then, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started.

When the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends at the timing of T7 and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends at the timing of T8, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED is completed and turned off. It becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot effect (round effect) is restarted. At this time, in the image display device, a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed instead of the normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ (“777”) is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as a hold number in the first hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as a hold number in the second hold number display area 70F. Further, a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) is output from the voice output device 9, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the image display device is replaced with the special jackpot effect (round effect) screen. , The normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

It should be noted that the normal ending effect screen is not when the effect control board 130 receives the round designation command while the special jackpot effect screen is displayed, but when the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Will be displayed.

Also, instead of switching to the normal jackpot effect screen when a round designation command is received while displaying the special jackpot effect screen, the special jackpot effect screen until the effect control board 130 receives the ending specification command. Or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives the customer waiting state designation command or the fluctuation start command after the jackpot game is completed.

Further, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED have the initial light emitting mode at the time of power restoration, but the special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode at the time of turning off or restoring the power supply. Then, it may be possible to grasp that the power recovery designation command has been received during the fluctuation effect.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the various accessories, the light emission (blinking red) in the initial operation of the various accessories or the abnormality notification mode is the same as in the specific example shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 102 to 105, when the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is received, the return operation of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) is performed. However, the initial operation of various accessories may be performed without performing the return operation.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the first combination. When the control state of the game is restored by displaying the first initial effect symbol (“135”), the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination of the second initial effect symbols (““ 135 ”). 753 ") is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of the power supply is performed before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device. Is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (only the initial screen display) to be displayed on the image display device when the customer is restored to the waiting state, and the restoration to the variable display of the special symbol and no hold memory / with hold memory. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) to be displayed later on the image display device is different. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display). It is possible to display the hold display indicating the number of hold memories on each of the device 83 and the sub second hold display 84), and the power supply stopped with the hold memory resumes and the control state of the game is restored. If this is the case, the hold icon display area does not execute hold display when the image display device is performing a specific display (displaying the returning screen) that suggests restarting power supply, but the sub hold display does hold hold display. It is possible. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting demo effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demo effect screen is displayed again. Instead, the second standby screen in a state where the effect symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, is stopped and displayed (stationary display) is displayed. By doing this, it is not necessary to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply is stopped is during the customer waiting demo production, and the display control when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted. It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is restarted for the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the change display of the special symbol is executed (the screen during return is displayed), the change display (the change display during the change display of the special symbol) is performed. Blinking display) is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the control state of the game is restored after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, when the change display of the special symbol is executed (the returning screen is displayed) when the control state of the game is restored, the sub-variation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display) A variable display (blinking display) may be performed in 82). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the image display device displays the returning screen for the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84). (Before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the special symbol storage designation command is received), the display mode indicates the number of pending numbers. By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of reservations immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In addition, when the sub-variation display (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82) displays fluctuations (blinking display) while the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. May have a display mode in which the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) indicates the number of holdings in accordance with the start of this variation display. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the variable display of the special symbol is executed when the control state of the game is restored and the number of holdings at that time.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed), the return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the return operation of the various accessories without complicating the control related to the return operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, various accessories (first movable member 73, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c). During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the effect button 17), the light emitting portions (first movable member LED, second movable member LED, effect button LED) of various accessories are turned off. ing. By doing so, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial operation of various accessories, and it is possible to grasp that the return operation is in progress.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light emitting portion of the accessory with the return abnormality blinks in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, abnormality notification is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the character with the return abnormality.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, until the next variation effect is started. Abnormality notification is to be continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to surely notify the character having the return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation for returning the accessory having the return abnormality to the origin position may be performed at the timing when the next variation effect is started. Further, when the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting portion of the accessory having the return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the initial operation of the various accessories without complicating the control on the initial operation of the various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c and the initialization of the main RAM 110c. In the case of power recovery without the above, the sub-hold display (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) is displayed in a display mode indicating the number of holds (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). The initial operation is performed before. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the board accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, regarding the frame accessory (effect button 17), when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. , The sub hold display (sub 1st hold display 83, sub 2nd hold display 84) performs the initial operation before the display mode indicating the number of holds is set (the returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It has become like. By doing so, it becomes easy to avoid the inconvenience that the progress of the production is hindered by the initial operation of the frame accessory. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a is output even when the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to know that the fluctuation effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. Become.

When the stop screen is displayed after the return screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect symbol 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the power ON time command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the recovery operation, the initial operation, and the operation of various accessories are performed. In addition, the initial light emission is executed and the display of the initial screen is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the display of the initial screen is continued due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command). , When the effect control board 130 is in a control state capable of executing the effect according to the command and receives a special symbol memory designation command based on the winning of the game ball from the main control board 110 to the starting port, a winning sound is received. Is to be output. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port even when the initial screen is displayed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even when the initial screen is displayed due to the inability to receive the power ON command (power on designation command, power recovery designation command), the effect is produced. When the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 110 after the control board 130 is in the control state capable of executing the effect according to the command, the variation effect is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing so, the start of the variable effect can be executed without delay, and the variable effect can be executed from the beginning to the end within the range of the variable time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the corresponding effect, the power-on designation command or power recovery designation from the main control board 110 is performed by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power-on specification command or power recovery specification command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as during the jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power-on specification command or power recovery specification command from the main control board 110 is restarted after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. Is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including the initial light emission) are executed again. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible for the effect control board 130 to execute an effect according to a command, such as in a customer waiting state after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed. Even during the control state, if a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the variable effect after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, when the power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as during the jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound is already completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is designed to do. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

When the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the voice output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, the initial operation, and the initial light emission of various accessories. You may just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the customer waiting state after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed is a command. Even during the control state in which the corresponding effect can be executed, the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped. In that case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It has become like. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

It should be noted that the control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command, such as the return operation of various accessories and the effect during the variable effect or the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed. Even in the state, if the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the variable effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is already completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as the return operation of various accessories and the jackpot effect after the initial operation (including the initial light emission) is completed responds to the command. Even in the control state where it is possible to execute the effect, the power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110 by restarting after only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped. When it is received, the recovery screen for the jackpot is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 such as during a variable effect or a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already been completed executes an effect according to a command. If the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, for example, after only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initial screen is displayed even in the control state where The first standby screen is displayed without displaying, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing so, since the command from the main control board 110 is processed without ignoring it, even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the effect control board 130 are different, the difference is found. Can be resolved.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control is performed in the control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command. Even when the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

It should be noted that the control states in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command are the customer waiting state, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect, but from the main control board 110 after activation. The state of waiting for a command (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may be included in the control state in which the effect control board 130 can execute the effect according to the command.

In the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) of "1" to "9", but may be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decorative part). In this case, the characters may be different for each number, such as "1" and character A, and "2" and character B. In addition, the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number + character in the normal game state, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed as a number only or a character smaller than the number + normal game state in the specific game state (low probability time / short game state, high probability time / short game state). It may be displayed with.

Further, three types of effect modes A to C may be provided in the normal gaming state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes D to E may be provided in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode. Further, two types of effect modes F to G may be provided in the low-accuracy time-short game state, and at least one of the numerical design of the effect symbol 70a and the character design may be different for each effect mode.

In this case, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes A to C in the normal game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode A is always set. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode D is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the power supply is stopped in any of the effect modes F to G in the low accuracy short game state, and then the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect mode F is always set. At the same time as being set, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the effect mode A is always set, and after the display of the initial screen is finished, the effect symbol 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is statically displayed without swinging. Will be.

Further, when the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect in the normal gaming state, the effect symbol 70a is changed to only a number, and the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is completed and the effect symbol 70a is provisionally. When the stop display (oscillation display) is displayed, the effect symbol 70a may be returned to the number + character.

In this case, during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal game state, that is, when the effect symbol 70a is changed to only numbers, the power supply is stopped, and then the power supply is restarted to restore the control state of the game. When this is done, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

Further, the power supply is stopped during the SP reach or the SPSP reach in the specific gaming state (low probability short game state, high probability short game state), that is, when the effect symbol 70a is only a number, and then the power supply is turned on. When the control state of the game is restored after restarting, the effect symbol 70a containing only numbers will be statically displayed without swinging after the display of the returning screen is completed. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, the number + character effect symbol 70a is statically displayed without swinging after the display of the initial screen is completed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 1>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, the special game is executed. Some such gaming machines display a reserved image corresponding to undetermined determination information (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). In addition, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal reserved image into a reserved image in a display mode suggesting that the variation effect may have a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned gaming machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) that controls the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? The slave control means includes a determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to perform the determination, and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and the slave control means holds the reserved image corresponding to the reserved right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays (hold icon) on the display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect (voice output device 9) on the effect means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing an icon generation (change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means displays an image to be displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to be updated and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game. The first change effect (change effect at the time of winning) executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the command (starting port winning designation command) indicating that the right is generated transmitted from the main control means, and the main control means. The second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the command (variation pattern specification command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from The effect executing means starts the notification effect at the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and the frame update timing is different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. The notification effect is terminated at. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? Based on the determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and the result of the determination, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. The slave control means includes an image display means (display / display /) for displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right on the display means (first image display device 70). The voice control unit 140), the effect execution means (display / voice control unit 140) that causes the effect means (voice output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) in the progress of the game. The image display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and indicates the possibility of performing the special game from the reserved image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a hold image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating that the variation display of the symbol transmitted from the main control means is started. ) Is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the first change effect (normal change pattern 01), and a predetermined command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means is received. The effect executing means starts the first change effect, including a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing of. The notification effect is started at the frame update timing, and the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on (commands, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player? Based on the determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not, the holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the right of the determination, and the result of the determination, the symbol is variablely displayed and then the symbol is stopped and displayed. The variable control means (main CPU 110a) is provided, and the slave control means has a pre-judgment pending image (hold icon) corresponding to the reserved right and after the determination is made for the right. An image display means (display / voice control unit 140) that displays a post-determination hold image (the icon) corresponding to the right in the display means (first image display device 70), and a directing means (display / voice control unit 140) in the process of proceeding with the game. The voice output device 9) is provided with an effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means each time, and the pre-judgment special hold image or the post-judgment holding image indicating the possibility of performing the special game from the pre-judgment hold image or the post-judgment hold image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) to change to a special reserved image, and the change effect is a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the variation display of the symbol starts. ), The first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing, and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means are predetermined. Including the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing, the effect execution means starts the first change effect. Compared to the case where the notification effect is started at the frame update timing to be performed, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-judgment special hold image. It is better to change to a special hold image after the above judgment. , The rate at which the second change effect is executed is high. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a secondary control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the production of a game based on (command, etc.), does the main control means perform a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player? A determination means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not the determination is made, and a holding means (main RAM 110c) capable of holding a predetermined number of the right for the determination are provided, and the slave control means corresponds to the reserved right. A predetermined notification to the image display means (display / voice control unit 140) for displaying the hold image (hold icon) on the display means (first image display device 70) and the effect means (voice output device 9) during the progress of the game. An effect executing means (display / voice control unit 140) for executing an effect (icon generation (change) notification sound) is provided, and the image display means causes the display means to display each time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that is configured to update the image and changes from the hold image to a special hold image indicating the possibility of performing the special game, and the change effect is , Is executed at the frame update timing according to the command (start opening winning designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of reserved rights changes. Predetermined predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect at the time of winning, normal change pattern 01) and the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The display mode of the special reserved image includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01) executed at the timing, and the display mode of the special hold image is the first display mode (blue character icon). And a second display mode (red character icon) that is more likely to perform the special game than the first display mode, and the effect executing means has a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started at, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is higher than when the first change effect is executed. Is more likely to change to the second display mode when is executed, and the first change When the effect changes to the second display mode, the special game is when the number of reserved rights is a second number larger than the first number than when the number is the first number. Is likely to be done. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "special hold image" and "special hold image before judgment" are those whose shape is changed from the normal hold icon, those whose color is changed, and those whose color indicates the degree of expectation of winning a big hit around the hold icon. An effect is displayed, a character showing the expectation of winning a big hit is displayed around (nearby) the hold icon, and a character image (for example, "SP") suggesting an effect to be executed around (near) the hold icon. , "Pseudo-ren", etc.) are included.

In addition, the "special hold image after judgment" is an image in which the shape is changed from the normal icon, a color is changed, and an effect of a color indicating the expectation of winning a big hit is displayed around the icon. A character that displays a character indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed around (nearby) the icon, and a character image (for example, "SP" or "pseudo-ren") that suggests an effect to be executed around (near) the icon. ) Is included.

Further, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Further, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

Further, the "post-judgment hold image" and the "post-judgment special hold image" are displayed from the start to the end of the variation effect, displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect, and the variation. The specific period (SP reach, SPSP reach, etc.) during the production includes those whose display is erased.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In the conventional gaming machine, the determination information acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied is stored as a hold memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the determination result is used. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. In such a gaming machine, an increase display or a decrease display of the hold image corresponding to each of the hold storage is performed, or an execution image corresponding to the hold storage in which the variation effect is executed is displayed. There was something that made the player grasp the progress of the game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number changes.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and the production of the game are controlled based on the signals (commands and the like) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means includes, the variable effect executing means capable of executing the variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and the first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage decreases. Yes, the decrease display (1 subtraction) of the first hold information is performed from the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variation effect is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second hold information to the execution information (movement from the hold icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first hold information (update to the hold number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means includes, the variable effect executing means capable of executing the variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and the first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the decrease display of the first hold information and the decrease display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage decreases. When the number of the reserved storages increases, the increase display of the first reserved information and the increased display of the second reserved information can be executed, and the reserved storage can be displayed during the decreased display of the second reserved information. When the number increases, the first hold is performed even before the frame update timing at which the decrease display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display unit in the hold icon display area) is completed. The increase display of information (update to the reserved number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of the reserved storages decreases, the information display means displays the reduced display of the first reserved information and the second reserved information from which the variable display is started. It is possible to execute the change display that changes to the execution information (the icon), and when the number of the hold storage increases, the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information can be executed. If the number of reserved storages increases during the change display of the second reserved information, the decrease display of the second reserved information (movement from the reserved icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing, the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is started. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. The image display means includes information display means capable of displaying a number) and a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1 /). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means can execute the increase display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information when the number of the hold storage increases. If the number of hold storages increases during the execution of the variation effect, the increase display of the second hold information (enlargement of the hold icon additionally displayed in the hold icon display area to the normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first hold information (update to the hold number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command or the like) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means comprises a variable effect executing means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination by the image display means (image display device), and a first hold information (hold) indicating the number of the reserved storages. A numerical value) and information display means capable of displaying a second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold storages are provided, and the variation effect execution means is during execution of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) that is expected to execute the special game, and the information display means obtains the first hold information when the number of hold memories increases. It is possible to execute the increase display of the second hold information and the increase display of the second hold information, and when the number of the hold memories increases during the execution of the specific effect, the increase display of the first hold information (1 is added). (Update to the hold number) is executed, but the increase display of the second hold information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that has been reduced and displayed is enlarged). It is designed not to be done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are used to control the production of the game. In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control board 130), the main control means is the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). ), A determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been executed as reserved storage. The subordinate control means includes a game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means images a variation effect according to the result of the determination. The variable effect executing means that can be executed by the display means (image display device), the first hold information (hold number) indicating the number of the hold storage, and the second hold information (holding information) indicating the identifier corresponding to each of the hold storage. The information display means includes information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold storages increases, the information display means increases the display of the first hold information and the increase display of the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as the first reserved storage, and the second acquisition condition is satisfied. The determination information based on (the entry of the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as the second hold storage, and when the number of the first hold storage increases in the specific game state, the first hold information The increase display (update to the hold number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second hold information (the last variation effect in the specific game state is completed, and the normal game state is restored). It is not executed until it is done. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of reserved storages.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information and executing the special game according to the result of the determination is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the stop of power supply (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. The member 74, the effect button 17), and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control capable of performing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means operates the initial operation mode (operation) depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. Aspects, light emission modes, etc.) are made different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, an operating means (effect button 17) capable of being operated by the player and capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode, and electric power. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of supply or restoring the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission and performing the effect light emission of the operation means during the execution of the game is provided, and the effect control means is initialized to the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is different between the case where the game is controlled and the case where the control state of the game is restored. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. ), And the effect control means is an operation mode (number of steps) of the initial operation of the movable effect means depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. The operation mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the operation of each step is the same, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means is different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. The movable effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and performing the effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect means include a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), and the effect control means is a case where the control state of the game is initialized. And, in the case where the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means. Is designed to be different. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine capable of playing the game. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state, and the variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the accompanying variable effect is provided, and the plurality of effect symbols include identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that can identify each of the effect symbols. When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means as the first combination (for example, "135"), and controls the game. Is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols displayed on the display means are set to the second combination (for example, "753"). By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or the control state of the game has been restored.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
In a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine in which the initial operation of the movable effect means was performed after the start of power supply (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that a suitable initial operation may not be performed for the movable effect means.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable effect means is returned to the first position. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. The effect control means includes a control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means has the movable effect means at the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is to be restored. In this case, the movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the movable effect means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable effect means does not return to the first position, the movable effect means does not return to the first position. The initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means is. The initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed without performing the operation. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored. In the case of, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means. Is not done. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position near the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74). In the effect control means, the first movable effect means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and the second movable effect means is the first. When it is in the position, the first movable effect means returns to the first position, and when the first movable effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable effect means. Is not performed, but the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a first position (origin position) and a second position (a position closer to the center of the first image display device 70) The movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between the two, and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of the power supply, or is restored to the state before the power supply is stopped. An effect capable of performing the initial operation of the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of being caused and the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130) is provided, and the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of itself. The effect control means includes a second movable effect means (second movable member 74) having an overlapping portion, and the effect control means is described at the start of power supply (power on) at which the control state of the game is to be initialized. When the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position, the first movable effect means is returned to the first position and the first movable is performed. When the effect means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable effect means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the stop of power supply (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply stopped during the fluctuation effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest of the game is lowered. There was a problem that it could be done.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, it is advantageous for the player based on the judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition in the gaming machine capable of playing the game. A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and the control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or the power supply is stopped. Variations of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be restored to the previous state and the determination means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing an effect, and in the variable effect, the effect symbol that is variablely displayed is oscillated (temporarily stopped) and then statically displayed (temporarily stopped). (Stop display) is possible, and the effect control means is predetermined when the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings and displays the effect symbol is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. At the timing of (when the special symbol confirmation command is received, when the customer waiting command is received), the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into a starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. It is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a plurality of displayed effect symbols, and the variation effect is provided with a reach state by some of the effect symbols. The effect control means includes a reach variation effect of displaying the formation and executing the reach effect, and the effect control means has a predetermined timing (when the power supply stopped during the execution of the reach effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to display the combination of the effect symbols on the display means in a stationary state, which is different from the reach combination by the effect symbols that formed and displayed the reach state when the special symbol confirmation command is received and the customer waiting command is received). .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores the state before the stop of power supply (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604). See Gazette). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold memory, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The determination means of the main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination means. According to the result, the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) is provided, and the state of the gaming machine is set. Is a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold memory, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means can perform a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, including the second state. The mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and restored to the customer waiting state, and the operation is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen + the display of the returning screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 7)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect by a display means when the player is not playing a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. The initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be initialized or restored to the state before the power supply is stopped, and the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the displayed effect symbol is provided, and the effect control means statically displays the effect symbol on the display means. After a lapse of a predetermined period, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is statically displayed after the variation time of the variation effect has elapsed, and the control state. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different from the case where the effect symbol is statically displayed after the initialization of the above or after the restoration of the control state. By doing so, it is possible to execute the customer waiting effect at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the determination information during execution of the variation effect on the display means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, which may reduce the interest of the game. There was a problem that there was.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the information), the determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the control state of the game after the start of power supply are determined. An effect displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped and the determination result of the determination means. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of a symbol is provided, and the effect control means is provided with the effect on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. It is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the symbol, and to the determination information during the execution of the variation effect in the predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the corresponding execution information (the icon) can be displayed and the power supply stopped during the display of the execution information is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the next step is performed from the end of the specific display. Until the variable display is started, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player know that the variable effect that was being executed when the power supply is stopped has ended, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead notice effect over a plurality of variable effects based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, JP-A-2017-143904). reference). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the look-ahead notice production is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored. there were.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. The effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means has a plurality of times of the variation effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect), and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead notice effect is restored. It is possible to execute a notice effect different from the look-ahead notice effect (for example, an alternative notice effect) in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the end of the continuous advance notice effect due to the stop of the power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 10)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game is executed over a plurality of variable effects in stages (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017). -143904 (see). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the interest of the gaming may be lowered when the power supply stopped during the specific production is resumed and the control state of the gaming is restored. rice field.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display is provided, and the effect control means steps the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over a plurality of times of the variation effect. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the above, and when the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the power supply is turned on. The specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed after the stopped variable effect, but it is not executed from the continuation of the stage suggested before the power supply is stopped. By doing so, it is possible to execute the icon change effect according to the content of the variable effect this time, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 11)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the determination information for which the execution of the variable effect has not been completed. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-06728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply stopped during the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to the display control after the restart of the power supply is high. There was a risk of becoming.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. An effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display, and the effect control means includes the determination information and the variation effect for which the execution of the variation effect has not been completed. It is possible to display the identification information (the icon, the hold icon) corresponding to each of the determination information that has not been started, and the special game is executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (for example, a CD icon) and a second stage mode (for example, blue). The power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information that includes the character icon) and the third stage mode (red character icon) and changes to the third stage mode in the second stage mode is resumed for the game. When the control state is restored, the identification information displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing so, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the hold icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is restarted.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 12)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved storages, which are determination information for which determination has not been executed, in the display area (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-06728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved storages, and the interest of the game is There was a problem that it could decrease.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problem, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) in the game machine capable of playing the game. A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as reserved storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The determination means of the main control board 110), the initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply, or for restoring the state before the stop of the power supply, and the determination means. The game is controlled by being provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result. When it is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means, and the first display area (sub first hold display 83, sub second). A hold display indicating the number of hold storages is displayed in each of the hold display 84) and the second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area. When the power supply stopped with the hold storage is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is executed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display. However, the hold display can be executed in the first display area. By doing so, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of pending storage before the end of the specific display, and the interest of the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 13)
In the conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the variation accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means according to the result of the determination. A gaming machine capable of performing a production is common. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, the interest of the game is enjoyed when the power supply stopped during the production suggesting the expectation that the special game is executed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. There was a problem that it could be reduced.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, the judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the starting port). Based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The determination means (main control board 110), the pre-determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination means, and the game control state are initialized after the start of power supply. The effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the initial processing means (main control board 110) and the determination means for causing or restoring the state before the power supply is stopped. The effect control is provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing a variation effect accompanied by a variation display, and a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) capable of changing to any of a plurality of notification modes. The means can execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and the change effect is being executed. When the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white on or off) different from the specific notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid the situation where the player is confused such that the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variation effect is not executed. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 14)
A conventional gaming machine is provided with a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with a movable effect means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate from each other is not taken into consideration.

◇ As the first configuration for solving the above-mentioned problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. Is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is specified from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. Etc.), it is possible to execute the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in the standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation) is specified from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. When a command, a power recovery designation command, etc.) are received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the variable effect can be executed from the main control means during the execution of the variable effect. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73) capable of operating (moving, emitting light) in a predetermined mode. 74, the effect button 17) is provided, and the effect control means executes the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a movable effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating in a predetermined mode and emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode. , The second movable member 74) and the initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply. , The effect control means can execute the initial operation and the initial light emission of the movable effect means, and can also execute the effect operation and the effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable effect means (operation mode such as the number of processes and the motion of each process) is the same depending on whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. However, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot) capable of performing an effect according to the signal by differentizing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the effect), the initial operation of the movable effect means can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the starting port). ), A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and an initial control state of the game after the start of power supply. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can be changed to a state before the power supply is stopped, and the effect control means is an initial operation (initial operation,) of the effect means. It is possible to execute the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display) of the movable effect means (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display), and to determine the determination means. Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the variable effect, the effect symbol displayed in the variable display is shaken. It is possible to display the motion (temporarily stop display) and then the static display (stop display), and the effect control means restarts the power supply stopped during the execution of the variable effect that swings and displays the effect symbol. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect symbol can be statically displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing (when a special symbol confirmation command is received or when a customer waiting command is received) without swinging the effect symbol. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. Is received, it is possible to perform the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variation effect is not executed, a first state which is an execution period of the variation effect without the hold storage, and an execution period of the variation effect with the hold memory. When the control state of the game is restored, the effect control means performs a specific display (display of an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect symbol on the display means. The display mode of the specific display (only the display of the initial screen) when the power supply stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state. In response to the signal, the display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display when the power supply stopped during the two states is restarted and the state is restored to the first state or the second state. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the effect, the initial stage It is possible to carry out the operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute, and it is possible to execute a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the display means. When a predetermined period elapses after the effect symbol is statically displayed, the customer waiting effect (customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the effect symbol is displayed after the variation time of the variation effect elapses. It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting effect is executed different between the case of static display and the case of static display of the effect symbol after the initialization of the control state or the restoration of the control state. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing an effect according to the signal. If so, it is possible to perform the initial operation. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading advance notice effect (continuous advance notice effect) over the variable effect a plurality of times, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the advance notice effect different from the look-ahead advance notice effect in the variation effect executed after the variation effect in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the look-ahead advance notice effect (for example). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command) is executed from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) in which an alternative notice effect) can be executed and an effect corresponding to the signal can be executed. , Power recovery designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, the effect means (first movable member 73) capable of operating (operation, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner. , 2nd movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and judgment information (special figure judgment) acquired by the establishment of acquisition conditions (entry of a game ball into the starting port). A storage means (main control board 110) that can store information) as a hold storage, and a determination means (main control board 110) that can determine whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information. The main control board 110) and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or restoring the state before the stop of the power supply are provided. The control means has an initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and an effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). It is possible to execute the variable effect accompanied by the variable display of the effect symbol displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to execute the variable effect a plurality of times. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game is executed over the variable effect, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the specific effect can be executed in the variable effect executed after the variable effect in which the power supply is stopped, but it is suggested before the power supply is stopped. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power-on designation command, When a power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a light emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes and an operation in a predetermined mode. (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17, various LEDs, sound output device 9, image display device), and establishment of acquisition conditions. Based on the storage means (main control board 110) that can store the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by (the entry of the game ball into the starting port) as the hold storage, and the determination information, the player A determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (big hit game), and a game control state is initialized after the start of power supply, or before the power supply is stopped. The effect control means includes an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state of the effect, and the effect control means has an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) of the effect means, and the effect. It is possible to execute the effect operation of the means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode. When it is possible to execute a change effect (ramp change effect) suggesting a degree, and the power supply stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is used. The main control during a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot effect) capable of controlling a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishing) different from a specific notification mode and executing an effect according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and responds to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) in which the effect can be executed, the predetermined signal is received. It is possible to output a notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, and the game is in progress. It is possible to execute the customer waiting effect in a non-waiting state (customer waiting state), and receive a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting effect. If so, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. A sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting a game effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above. The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a variable effect for notifying whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game), and during the execution of the variable effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery) is performed from the main control means. When a designated command or the like) is received, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

◆ As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. Sound output means (voice output device 9) capable of outputting game effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) in a game machine provided with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling The effect control means can output a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to execute a special game effect (big hit effect, opening effect, round effect, ending effect) during the execution of the special game (big hit game), and a predetermined signal from the main control means during the execution of the special game effect. When (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the effect control means. Become.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 15)
A conventional gaming machine generally includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine provided with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, in such a gaming machine, the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the effect control means is continued is not taken into consideration.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and an effect according to a signal (command or the like) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the above, a display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying an effect image (variable effect, jackpot effect, etc.) is provided. The effect control means can display a game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol) on the display means in a standby state (customer waiting state) in which the game is not progressing, and the effect control means can display the game standby screen (still display screen of the effect symbol). If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during the display, it is possible to continue the display of the game standby screen. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and to prevent the game from being less enjoyable.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 16)
A conventional gaming machine generally includes a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control means for controlling an effect according to a command from the main control means. Some of such gaming machines execute abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that the abnormality notification is not properly performed.

◆ As the first configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) and control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetism, etc.) is provided. Abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when the power supply to the game machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, etc.) is provided. , Radio abnormality notification, etc.), and when the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the control means and the detection means are connected for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.). The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. Notification, etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) in a gaming machine capable of playing a game Sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), control means (main control board 110 and / or effect control board 130) that performs predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. When the control means and the detection means are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality, etc.) is provided. (Notification, etc.) can be executed, and when the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) Continues to execute error notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games, but the gaming ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of the jackpot game. If this is the case, the gaming machine may be used to shift to a high-probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, if the player shifts to the high-probability gaming state after the end of all jackpot games and wins the fall lottery executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the normal game state is normally executed. It may be a gaming machine that returns to the gaming state.

If the type of the jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that continues until the jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol has priority. Although it is assumed that it is executed, it may be a gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel).

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the scope of claims and all modifications within the scope.

(When the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
Next, a case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described. When the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is not received, the command is not received due to a half disconnection or a connector disconnection. Communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or semi-disconnection are considered. In the following description, when a predetermined state in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command occurs, it is represented by “x” in the figure. Then, in a predetermined period from the first occurrence of a predetermined state in which the command cannot be received normally to the time before the command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and / or different types may not be received normally. .. Further, the command is described as "cd" in the figure.

The effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image ZE to be decorated, and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Further, it is assumed that the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification unit including the number unit (identification character).

Further, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation). Further, in the specific gaming state, it is assumed that the background image corresponding to each of the effect modes D to E is scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation).

If the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to a connector disconnection of the command line for communicating between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal game state will be described, but even if the game state is the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), it is basic. The flow is the same as in the normal game state.

Specifically, the first hold number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol hold display 63, the sub first variable display 81, and the sub first. 1 Hold indicator 83, 1st hold number display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp symbol, 1st start port 45, 2nd hold number, 2nd special symbol storage designation command, 1st 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd hold display 84, 2nd hold number display area 70F, 2nd hold icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp design, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 1 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (j) are effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 106. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol becomes the first special as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". It starts with the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". The start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol designation command, first) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing.
When the effect control unit 130m receives the special symbol variation pattern designation command), the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and starts the variation effect. Processing is performed.

At this time, the first holding number U1 indicated by the first holding number (numerical information) displayed in the first holding number display area 70E is "2" in the non-animation for one frame while the changing BGM is output. Will be "1". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol (referred to as the first lamp symbol when particularly distinguished) on the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a performs the preparatory operation. Start scrolling after going.

The first special symbol hold indicator 63 displays the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by turning on / off / blinking the LED. The fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol is performed by blinking the LED of the sub first fluctuation display 81. Further, in the sub first hold indicator 83, the first hold number U1 (hold memory) stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed by turning on / off / blinking the LED.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "2". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first hold number U1 stored (grasp) changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one hold icon T12 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B2 (see FIG. 107 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 107 (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 107 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

Next, at the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. In addition, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of one lamp symbol. Further, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 107 (d)). reference).

After that, at the P5 timing, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 107 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 107 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 107 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives a start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Further, all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display) (see FIG. 107 (g)).

Then, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the first lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub first hold display 83 continues, and the effect symbol 70a is the decorative portion as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing preparatory operations such as partial operation or full or partial scaling operation (see FIG. 107 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 107 (h)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“365”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the icon TH continues the rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 107 (i)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 107 (i)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

At this time, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P8). Also), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 107 (j)). Further, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continuously changed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). As described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect (predetermined effect) is not performed in the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P8.

As a predetermined effect to be executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol) in a state where the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110 m is "0". Is not limited to the customer waiting demonstration effect, but may be an adjustment guidance effect such as adjustment of volume or brightness of an image display device, a guidance effect related to a game operation, or other effects. In this case, the customer waiting demo effect may be executed after the effect other than the customer waiting demo effect is executed. As described above, the predetermined effect includes an effect in which the effect symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped or is actually stopped is executed until the next variable effect is started. The predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may be executed by other commands, time by a timer, or the like.

As described above, according to the specific example 1 shown in FIGS. 106 to 107, when a predetermined state in which the command is not normally received occurs in the effect control unit 130 m while the effect symbol 70a is being varied. The effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the effect symbol 70a can be continued in the swinging state even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect to perform a customer-waiting demonstration effect. It is designed not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

After that, since the first hold number U1 stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state shifts to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs a process for ending the variation effect.

In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, extinguished).

At the timing of P7, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it cannot be done will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 2 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 108. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. At this time, the winning command (first special symbol) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing when the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives the storage designation command and the first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command), the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is from "3" to "4". ". In the second embodiment, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the first hold storage due to the winning of the timing of P1. In the following description, the hold storage that is the reference of the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target hold storage.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 109 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 109 (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 109 (c)), and the first lamp is used. The design is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, a start command (first special symbol storage) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing when the first reserved number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives the designation command, the effect symbol specification command, and the first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is changed from "4" to "4". 3 ”and the process for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and scrolling is started after the preparatory operation is performed (see FIG. 109 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 109 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 109 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol continue. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 109 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 109 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 109 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 109 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is deleted and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may be left as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continued. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 109 (i)). Here, in the second embodiment, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Even in the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 109 (i)), and the effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead zone production ends when the main stop.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 109-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the notice scenario. It is also possible to end the look-ahead zone effect without executing it. When the look-ahead zone effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead zone effect is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect.

(Specific example 3 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 3 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 110. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 108. This is an example.

It should be noted that the specific example 3 of FIG. 110 is different from the specific example 2 of FIG. 109 in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the part to be done is omitted, and only the different part will be explained.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a operates a part of the decorative portion or operates in whole or in part as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operation such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 110 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 110 (d)), and an effect sound effect is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 110 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 110 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 110 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) is continuously executed, and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 is "2". Except for, the state of FIG. 110 (g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 is "2". The state shown in FIG. 110 (g) is maintained.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P9.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position (past). The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 110 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 110 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that became the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image are continued. Is executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is executed. Will scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 110 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 3, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 110-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) are performed according to the preview scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuous execution. When the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect effect is erased at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

(Specific example 4 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 4 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 108. This is an example.

In the specific example 4 of FIG. 111, the icon change effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and the effect by the first movable member 73 as the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect). Is different from the specific example 3 of FIG. 110 in that the above is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here, and only the different part will be described. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 3, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 2.

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a operates a part of the decorative portion or expands / contracts in whole or in part as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operation such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 111 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 111 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a. The partial period of the variable effect is the variable effect period from the start of the variable effect to the stop (temporary stop or main stop) of the variable effect, for example, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing at the start of the variable effect. The first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing during the variable effect, or the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing at the end of the variable effect. It is possible to execute the look-ahead effect at various times, such as executing the look-ahead effect. Then, in this specific example, it is a case where the look-ahead effect executed in a part of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effect.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 111 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 111 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 111 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 111 (g), except that the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is "2". State is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 111 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the operation of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position (past). The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 111 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is executed. Specifically, the operation effect and the light emission effect of the first movable member 73 are executed according to the advance notice scenario, and the sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 111 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect and the scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed. It will be in a state of scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 111 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Also in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are executed. Then, the pre-reading notice effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 111-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the variation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are performed according to the advance notice scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuous execution. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped at the timing of P10, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead notice effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low. Further, the look-ahead effect by the first movable member 73 or the like is not executed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of P10. However, when the first reserved number U1 changes from "4" to "2" and when the first reserved number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, the main control unit 110m grasps. If the discrepancy between the number of holdings and the number of holdings grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above-mentioned explanation.

In Specific Examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P10. As described above, in the specific examples 2 to 4, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the first hold information is displayed, the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E, the specific number is two more than the predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any need. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 5 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 5 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 112. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part.

Next, at the timing of P1, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first hold number U1 stored (grasp) changes from "3" to "4". In Specific Example 5, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the hold storage due to the winning of the timing of P1. In the following description, the hold storage that is the reference of the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target hold storage.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 113 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 113 (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 113 (c)), and the first lamp. The design is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 113 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 113 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 113 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 113 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 113 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”. At the timings of P7 to P11, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130 m receives a start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 and the surplus hold icon T12 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 are erased by non-animation for one frame. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 113). (H)). As described above, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 113 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is scrolled at high speed with the look-ahead zone effect and the background image scrolling continued. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 113 (i)). Here, in the specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Even in the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is executed according to the notice scenario (see FIG. 113 (i)), and the effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead zone production ends when the main stop.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 113-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is continued according to the notice scenario. It is also possible to end the look-ahead zone effect without executing it. When the look-ahead zone effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead zone effect is deleted at the timing of P13, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect.

(Specific example 6 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 6 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 114. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 112. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 6 of FIG. 114 is different from the specific example 5 of FIG. 113 in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. The explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a operates a part of the decorative portion or operates in whole or in part as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operation such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 114 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a (see FIG. 114 (d)), and an effect sound effect is output.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 114 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 114 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 114 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 114 (g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 114 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 to P11.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives a start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the two surplus hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position ( The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 114 (h)). As described above, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without shifting from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, the blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a according to the advance notice scenario, and the effect sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 114 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that became the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image are continued. Is executed.

When a predetermined time elapses after the display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect effect is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed at high speed. It will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 114 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0". The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the look-ahead effect effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 6, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 114-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) are performed according to the preview scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuous execution. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the look-ahead effect effect is erased (if displayed) at the timing of P12, and the expectation for the jackpot is lower than the look-ahead effect effect such as mode A background only. It is changed to the aspect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

(Specific example 7 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 7 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 115. 112 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 112. This is an example.

In the specific example 7 of FIG. 115, the icon change effect as the look-ahead notice effect is executed by the first image display device 70, and the effect of the first movable member 73 as the look-ahead notice effect (movable effect and light emission effect). Is different from the specific example 6 of FIG. 115 in that the above is executed. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted here, and only the different part will be described. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 7, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 6.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a operates a part of the decorative portion or expands / contracts in whole or in part as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operation such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 115 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 115 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. In addition, a predetermined sound effect is output. The look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a.

After that, at the timing of P5, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 115 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 115 (f)). At this time, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 115 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 115 (g), except that the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”. State is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, at the timing of P11, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 115 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

At the timings of P8 to P11, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives a start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by non-animation for one frame, and the surplus hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 is erased. T12 is erased by one frame of non-animation. All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past fluctuation effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 115). (H)). As described above, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "3", the hold icon T13 is the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without being shifted from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one required hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is executed. Specifically, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is executed according to the advance notice scenario, and the sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 115 (h)). In this way, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the look-ahead notice effect and the scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continuously executed.

After that, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon according to the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 115 (i)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number becomes "0" ( The look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are also executed in (the target of the expectation degree suggestion by the look-ahead notice effect). Then, the pre-reading notice effect ends at the timing when the effect symbol 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends. Here, in the specific example 7, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 115-1, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first hold number U1 becomes "0". Based on the fluctuation effect (target of expectation suggestion by the look-ahead effect) executed during the variation display of, the icon change effect and the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) are performed according to the advance notice scenario. The look-ahead effect may be terminated without continuous execution. If the look-ahead effect is not continuously executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is stopped at the timing of P12, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead notice effect. Further, the hold icon T1 which has been changed to a character by the icon change effect is changed to a normal mode (CD) which is an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is low.

According to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the effect command is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to Specific Examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of P10. As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "1", that is, the difference between the hold number grasped by the main control unit 110m and the hold number grasped by the effect control unit 130m is ". If it is "3", the basic flow is the same as the above-mentioned explanation.

In Specific Examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P12. As described above, in the specific examples 5 to 7, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (for example, four) three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number during the display of the first hold information), the number of hold icons that is one less than the specified number is not displayed. It is designed to display a number hold icon. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first), which is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is not displayed and the number is higher than the specific number. Also displays two fewer hold icons, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, the specific number three more than the predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 4), the number of holds is one or two less than the specified number. The predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 8 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 8 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart 4 when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. 114. This is an example of the production.

Since the specific example 8 of FIG. 117 is the same as the specific example 5 of FIG. 112 up to the timing of P0 to P11, the description thereof will be omitted.

At the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first special symbol Fluctuation display of is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, it is in the state of FIG. 117 (g).

Next, at the timing of P13, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 117 (g) is maintained.

At this time, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P12). Also), the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a is continued (see FIG. 117 (h)). Further, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may be continuously changed. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the look-ahead effect is continuously executed. As described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed in the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of P12.

As described above, according to the specific example 8 shown in FIGS. 116 to 117, when a predetermined state in which the command is not normally received occurs in the effect control unit 130 m while the effect symbol 70a is being varied. The effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a swinging state, and the effect symbol 70a can be continued in the swinging state even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect to perform a customer-waiting demonstration effect. It is designed not to run. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 117-1, since the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state may shift to the customer waiting state (game waiting state). .. When the effect control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m performs a process for ending the variation effect.

In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, extinguished).

Here, when the effect control unit 130m receives the customer wait command (customer wait state designation command), the effect symbol 70a may be stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position and are special. The symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (turned off). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed in the first image display device 70.

As described above, according to the modification of the specific example 8 shown in FIG. 117-1, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. , All the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the predetermined stop position are displayed (mainly stopped) at the stop position. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable effect has ended (shift to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

At the timings of P7, P11, and P13, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but it was transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even when the displayed effect command is displayed / the voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot be normally received, the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m is output to the effect control unit 130 m. Will be processed in the same way as when it cannot be received normally.

Here, a case where the customer waiting state designation command is received while the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" at the timing of P14 has been described, but the first hold number is Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states of "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

(Specific example 9 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 9 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (h) are effects corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of FIG. 118. This is an example.

Since the specific example 8 of FIG. 117 and the specific example 9 of FIG. 119 differ in that the command received at the timing of P14 is the opening designation command, the description of the common part is omitted here, and the different parts are described. Only explain.

At the timing of P14, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the jackpot game (special game) is started. When the effect control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m remains "3", and the jackpot game The process for starting the opening effect of is performed.

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is maintained at "3" and is displayed in the effect symbol 70a and the icon display area. The hold icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. Further, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, turned off), and the opening effect image is displayed (FIG. 119 (FIG. 119). h) See).

After that, if the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol memory designation command from the main control unit 110m during the big hit game or after the end of the big hit game (short-time game state, probability variation game state), The first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is updated to the number corresponding to the command without animation for one frame (see FIG. 119 (j)). .. Note that FIG. 119 (j) is a case where the number of held commands at the start is "1". At this time, the predetermined (same) effect symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the combination of the effect symbols 70a that is a big hit. For example, regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a is a big hit with the combination of "777" or the combination of "222", as shown in FIG. 119 (j), the effect symbols 70a of "135" are in the same combination. Is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

At the timings of P7 to P13, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect control unit 130 m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from, the effect control of the command (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the opening designation command is received in the state where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "3" at the timing of P14 has been described, but the first hold number is "4". , "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as the above-mentioned explanation even when the opening designation command is received.

As described above, according to the specific example 9 shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, it is determined in advance. The jackpot game without displaying (mainly stopping) all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position. The opening effect image of is displayed. Therefore, the opening effect is not hindered by the effect pattern, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 10 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 120. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part.

Next, at the timing of P1, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first hold number U1 stored (grasp) changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 121 (a)).

In Specific Example 10, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the first hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 121 (a). Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) in which the zone BGM is output is displayed. ) Is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 121 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 121 (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 121 (c)), and the first lamp is used. The design is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 121 (d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 121 (f)).

At the timings of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image is continuously scrolled, and the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 121 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position (past). The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 121 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T13 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started without continuing the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 121). (H)).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 121 (h)). As described above, in the specific example 10, after the target hold storage is digested, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 121 (i)).

It should be noted that, at the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

(Specific example 11 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 11 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 122. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 120. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 10 of FIG. 121 and the specific example 11 of FIG. 122 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Now, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the specific example 10, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 121 (a). In the specific example 11, as the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon is being executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a operates a part of the decorative portion or expands / contracts in whole or in part as in the present embodiment. After performing the preparatory operation such as, scrolling is started (see FIG. 122 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. Further, the icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 122 (d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 122 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 122 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 122 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 122 (g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 122 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P9.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position (past). The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 122 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T3 is set to the first. The hold icon display area 70B3 is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B3 without shifting from the hold icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon. Displayed as TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 122 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 122 (i)).

When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (hold icon change effect and icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not do. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 122 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 11, after the target hold storage is digested, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

It should be noted that, at the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) are continued according to the notice scenario. May be executed.

(Specific example 12 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 12 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 123. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 108. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 12 of FIG. 123 is different from the specific example 11 of FIG. 122 in that the look-ahead effect (operation effect and issuance effect) by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and is therefore common here. The explanation of the part is omitted, and only the different part is explained.

In the specific example 12, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 123 (a), the look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the big hit is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 12, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined operation and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon is executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 123 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a sound effect is output. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 123 (d)). The look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a, and in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined operation effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 123 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 123 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 123 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, except that the look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”, FIG. The state of g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 123 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

At the timings of P8 and P9, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2", but from "3". It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2", but directly changes from "3" to "1". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 123 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the hold icon T1 is set to the first. It is erased from the first hold icon display area 70B without shift display in the hold icon display area 70B.

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 123 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 123 (i)).

When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed, the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light emission effect is performed in a modest manner than the extinguishing or pre-reading notice effect. As such, the effect is changed to an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 123 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 11, after the target hold storage is digested, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

It should be noted that, at the timing of P10, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

According to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P9. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of P10. As described above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "2" and when the first hold number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the hold known by the main control unit 110m. If the discrepancy between the number and the number of holdes grasped by the effect control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow is the same as the above description.

In the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P10. As described above, in the specific examples 10 to 12, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the first hold information is displayed, the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, the specific number two more than the predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any notice. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 13 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 13 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 124. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part.

Next, at the timing of P1, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "4". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first hold number U1 stored (grasp) changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T14 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 125 (a)).

In the specific example 13, based on the first hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 125 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) in which the zone BGM is output is displayed. ) Is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 125 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 125 (b)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”) (see FIG. 125 (c)), and the first lamp. The design is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 125 (d)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 125 (f)).

At the timings of P0 to P6, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, the background image is continuously scrolled, and the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) while the effect symbol 70a is performing a variable effect.

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 125 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “2”.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes “1”.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P11, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 125 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 125 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the read-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (FIG. 125 (h). )reference).

When the surplus hold icon T1 is erased and the required hold icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 may remain as it is and the required hold icon T1 may be shifted and displayed.

At the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone effect is erased, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 125 (h)). As described above, in the specific example 13, after the target hold storage is digested, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 125 (i)).

It should be noted that, at the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the normal zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

(Specific example 14 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 14 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 126. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 124. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 13 of FIG. 125 and the specific example 14 of FIG. 126 are different from each other in that the look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of the look-ahead zone effect as the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the icon change effect is executed. Now, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

In the specific example 13, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 125 (a), the look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of the big hit is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 14, the look-ahead effect effect and the icon change effect are executed as the look-ahead effect. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon is being executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 126 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the look-ahead effect effect is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower part behind the effect symbol 70a, and an effect sound effect is output. Further, the icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 is changed to the blue character icon is continuously executed (see FIG. 126 (d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 126 (e)).

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 126 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp symbol are continued. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 126 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "2". , The state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. Therefore, except that the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold display 63 becomes "1". , The state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P11, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 126 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

The look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously executed at the timings of P8 and P11.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position (past). The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 126 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 126 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 126 (i)).

When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (hold icon change effect and icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the notice scenario. do not do. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead effect effect is not executed, and the mode A background is changed to an effect mode in which the expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 126 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

It should be noted that, at the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead effect effect (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change effect (hold icon change effect and the icon change effect) are continued according to the notice scenario. May be executed.

(Specific example 15 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 15 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 127. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (i) are effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 108. This is an example.

It should be noted that the specific example 15 of FIG. 127 is different from the specific example 14 of FIG. 126 in that the look-ahead effect (operation effect and issuance effect) by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, and is therefore common here. The explanation of the part is omitted, and only the different part is explained. Although the look-ahead effect effect can be executed in the specific example 15, the description is omitted because it is the same as the specific example 14.

In the specific example 15, based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 127 (a), a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to the effect that the expectation of a big hit is high is executed in advance. In the specific example 15, as the look-ahead effect, the effect by the first movable member 73 and the icon change effect are executed. Specifically, an operation effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined operation and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon is executed.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P4, the first special hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 127 (d)).

Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as the look-ahead notice effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed on the upper side of the first image display device 70 operates in a mode in which the degree of expectation for the jackpot is high (for example, a mode having a large movement or a mode similar to the jackpot). (See FIG. 127 (d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a sound effect is output. It should be noted that the look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be continuously executed in a part of each variation effect in the multiple variation effects of the effect symbol 70a in the period before the reach effect of the effect symbol 70a. be.

Further, the first hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 is changed to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is executing a predetermined operation effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 127 (e)). In addition, the look-ahead notice effect by the first movable member 73 is continuously executed.

Then, at the timing of P6, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 127 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion). In addition, the hold icon T1 that has become the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 127 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, except that the look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 becomes "2", FIG. 127 ( The state of g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “2”.

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the second 1 The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol memory specification command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing. The first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130 m remains "3", and the process for starting the variable effect is not performed. At this time, FIG. 127 (FIG. 127), except that the look-ahead notice effect by the operation of the first movable member 73 is not executed and the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is set to "1". The state of g) is maintained.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P11, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 127 (g) is maintained except that the display of the first hold number U1 of the first special symbol hold indicator 63 is “1”.

At the timings of P8 and P11, the look-ahead notice effect (operation effect and light emission effect of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at the timing of P12, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is a non-animation for one frame and does not go through "3" to "2" and "1". It becomes "0" directly from "3". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 does not go through "2" and "1", but directly changes from "3" to "0". Further, the surplus hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased by one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (past) including the effect symbol 70a deviated from the stop position. The effect symbol 70a), which was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect, is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived and displayed) (see FIG. 127 (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first hold number U1 grasped by the main control unit 110 m and the first hold number U1 grasped by the effect control unit 130 m is "3", the surplus hold icon T1 Is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Then, one required hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued. Then, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 127 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P13, when a predetermined time elapses after the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 127 (i)).

When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the variation effect executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes "0" ( Based on the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 are not continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the pre-reading notice effect by the first movable member 73 is not executed, the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light emission effect is performed in a modest manner than the extinguishing or pre-reading notice effect. As such, the effect is changed to an effect mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than that of the look-ahead effect (see FIG. 127 (h)). Further, the hold icon T1 that has been a blue character icon becomes the hold icon T1 of a normal CD image. As described above, in the specific example 14, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target hold memory is digested, and at this time, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed. Or, the effect is changed to an effect having a lower expectation for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect that has been executed earlier, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.

It should be noted that, at the timing of P13, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol in which the first hold number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (target of the look-ahead effect), the look-ahead notice effect and the icon change effect (holding icon change effect and the icon change effect) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed according to the advance notice scenario.

According to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, the effect control unit 130m normally outputs the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timings of P7 to P11. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, it is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) is performed.

According to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, the case where the first hold number stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of P12. As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "1", that is, the difference between the hold number grasped by the main control unit 110m and the hold number grasped by the effect control unit 130m is ". If it is "3", the basic flow is the same as the above-mentioned explanation.

In Specific Examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be normally received occurs at the timing of P7, and the predetermined state continues in the predetermined period before the timing of P12. As described above, in the specific examples 13 to 15, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is not executed in the predetermined period. Further, in a predetermined period, the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect has been completed can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the effect symbol 70a can be kept in the temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the first hold information is displayed, the hold icon (for example, the third) of the surplus of the specified number of hold icons is received. The required number of hold icons (for example, the first and second hold icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the hold icon). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first), which is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold information) is being displayed, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed and then the predetermined number is displayed. The hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, the specific number two more than the predetermined number (for example, one) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of variable display in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while displaying the number of holds (for example, 3), the number of holds is displayed one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending numbers without any notice. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 16 when the effect control unit cannot receive the command normally)
A specific example 16 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 128. This is an example of production.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number stored (grasped) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, while the changing BGM is being output, the first hold number U1 indicated by the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E is "2" to "1" in a non-animation for one frame. It becomes. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. .. Further, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of the first lamp symbol, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig.). 129 (a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45, the number of first holdes stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 129 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129 (c)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (Fig. 129). (D)).

After that, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect is produced. The first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130 m is changed from "1" to "1", that is, the process for starting the variable effect without changing the first reserved number U1 is performed.

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The second hold icon T1 (CD icon) of 70B is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (derivation display). (See FIG. 129 (e)).

Then, the required two hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 129 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect (SP reach effect ends), the effect symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in the reach loss mode (“161”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P8, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in the loss mode (off). This stop (see FIG. 129 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. One hold icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 129 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH (the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon TH is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 129 (FIG. 129). j) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of P2 to P4, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but the effect control unit 130m was based on the reception of this command. Even when the effect command sent from the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot be received normally, the command (winning command, stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is produced and controlled. The same processing as when the unit 130m cannot be normally received will be performed.

Here, the case where the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" at the timing of P5 has been described, but the first reserved number U1 is "0". From "0", when the first hold number U1 changes from "2" to "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "3" to "3", that is, the main control unit 110m stores. If the number of holdings (grasping) and the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

As described above, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the number of hold icons is predetermined while the hold icon display area 70C is displaying a predetermined number (for example, one) of hold icons (first hold information). When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, which is the number, the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed. Is designed to display a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the number of holds is displayed while the predetermined number (for example, one) is being held in the sub first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variation display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of hold numbers is displayed without displaying a hold number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area 70C, but the hold number is “0” while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the hold icon is displayed by one more number (for example, one) than "0", and then the hold icon is shifted and displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, the hold number is set to "0" while the hold number of "0" is displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display, the number of holds of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of holds one more than "0" (for example, one). ). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

(Specific example 17 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 17 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (f) are effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of FIG. 130. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The two hold icons T1 displayed on the 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 131 (a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 131 (b)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 131 (b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains at "1" (see FIG. 131 (b)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 131 (c)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed.

At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the first lamp symbol is variablely displayed. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, the look-ahead zone effect is maintained, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect is continued (FIG. 131). (D)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". When the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect is produced. The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon display area. The hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) for one frame in the second to fourth positions of 70B without animation. In addition, all the effect symbols 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) including the effect symbol 70a that is deviated from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (derivation display). See FIG. 131 (e)).

Then, the required four hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is continued, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 131 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 131 (f)).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timings of P2 to P6, the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command. Even if the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m (winning command, stop command). , The start command) is processed in the same manner as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command).

Here, the case where the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" at the timing of P7 has been described, but the first reserved number U1 is "1". From "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first hold number U1 changes from "0" to "1", that is, the main control unit 110m stores. If the number of holdings (grasping) is larger than the number of holdings stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130m, the basic flow is the same as the above description.

As described above, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the number of hold icons is a predetermined number while the hold icon (first hold information) of a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed in the hold icon display area. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variation display that is a larger specific number (for example, 2), it displays a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, 3), and then displays the hold icon. By shifting the hold icons, a specific number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the number of holds is displayed while a predetermined number (for example, one) is held in the sub first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E. When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which is a specific number (for example, two) more than a predetermined number, the holding number of a number one more than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without any notice. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, but the number of holds is a predetermined number (for example) while the icon is being displayed. When the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that becomes (1), the hold icons are displayed one more (for example, two) than the predetermined number, and then those hold icons are shifted and displayed. By doing so, a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, the number of holds is a predetermined number (while displaying the number of holds of "0" in the sub first hold indicator 83 or the first hold number display area 70E. For example, when the effect control unit 130m receives the command at the start of the variable display that becomes 1), the predetermined number of hold numbers is displayed without displaying the hold number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

According to the specific example described above, if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variation period of the lamp symbol. , The output period of the changing BGM is extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period during which no production is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the scrolling of the background image, the hold icon, and the rotation operation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific example described above, even when the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol is used. During the extension (continuation) of the temporary suspension period of 70a, the advance notice mode (icon type, zone effect type) of the look-ahead notice effect does not change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied without causing an abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead notice effect.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the effect is deviated from the predetermined stop position. The variable display is started after all the effect symbols 70a including the symbol 70a (the effect symbol 70a that was planned to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display). .. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable effect can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved as compared with the case where the variable display is started with the effect symbol 70a displaced from the stop position.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol are not stopped and displayed. The variable display is continued. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load without performing complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol. Further, even if the effect symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (instantaneously derived display), it is possible to inform the player that the variable effect is being performed by the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol, and the interest of the game can be enjoyed. It will be possible to improve.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a, the icon receives the normal time (stop command is received). It is erased in a shorter time (non-animation for one frame) than (animation for 10 frames). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the newly executed variable effect to be obstructed by erasing the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the effect control unit 130 m normally executes the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). When it is received in, the look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed even in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the look-ahead advance notice effect will not end, and the inconvenience that causes the player to be dissatisfied will be avoided. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the specific example described above, the effect control unit 130 m normally executes the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a in which the look-ahead advance notice effect (icon change effect, look-ahead zone effect) is continued (executed). In the case of receiving the command, it is possible to execute the effect of the content according to the scenario of the look-ahead advance notice effect in the newly executed variable effect. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command, the progress of the look-ahead advance notice effect will not be abnormal, and the inconvenience that the player will be dissatisfied will be avoided. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 18 when the effect control unit cannot normally receive the command)
A specific example 18 in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. 132 is a timing chart when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (j) are effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 132. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". .. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The two hold icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation.

Next, at the timing of P1, the shift display of the hold icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon and the icon are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control The process for updating the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by the unit 130m is not performed and remains "1".

At this time, since the winning command in which the first hold number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E is It remains "1", and the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first hold number "2" in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 133 (a)).

After that, at the timing of P3, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3" by winning a prize in the first starting port 45. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command (first special symbol memory designation command, first start opening winning designation command (look-ahead designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the effect control unit 130m The first hold number U1 stored (grasp) changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The hold icon T1 is not displayed in the second area corresponding to "2" of the first hold number U1 for which the winning command could not be received, and the hold icon T1 is not displayed and corresponds to "3" of the first hold number U1. The second hold icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) (see FIG. 133 (b)).

Next, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“814”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 133 (c)).

Then, at the timing of P5, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in a loss mode (for example, turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 133 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "3" to "2".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The second hold icon T1 corresponding to the first hold number "2" that could not receive the winning command in the area 70B is additionally displayed (displayed in normal size from the beginning) as a non-animation for one frame and displayed. The three reserved icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133 (e)).

After that, at the timing of P7, the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). (See FIG. 133 (f)).

Next, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“225”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 133 (g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol is in a loss mode (for example, turned off). This stop at (see FIG. 133 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P10, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". When the effect control unit 130 m receives the start command (first special symbol memory designation command, effect symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect control unit The process for starting the variable effect is performed when the first reserved number U1 stored (grassed) by 130 m changes from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first hold number U1 displayed in the sub first hold display 83 and the first hold number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame, and the first hold icon is displayed. The two hold icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparatory operation (see FIG. 133 (i)).

Next, at the timing of P11, when the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH (the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continued and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the icon Th is in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (FIG. 133 (FIG. 133). j) See).

After that, when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110 m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change effect ends.

At the timing of P2, the effect control unit 130 m was able to normally receive the command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, but the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command. The command (command at the time of winning) transmitted from the main control unit 110m cannot be normally received by the effect control unit 130m even when the display / voice control unit 140 and the lamp / drive control unit 150 cannot be normally received. Will be processed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is "1" and the first hold number is "3", the winning command is received. As described above, when the effect control unit 130m stores (grasps) the first hold number U1 is "1" and the first hold number U1 is "4", the effect control unit receives a winning command. When the first hold number U1 stored (understood) by 130 m is "0" and the first hold number U1 is "2", "3", or "4" when a winning command is received. However, the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. ) Is not displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of holdings is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), the predetermined number in the holding icon display area. The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, the second), but the hold icon is displayed in the area corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas (for example, the third). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holdings, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the number (for example, one) smaller than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. ) While displaying the number of holds, if the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the number of holds one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), display the number of holds. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the hold icon (first hold information) is set in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. ) Is not displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of holdings is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, the holding icon display area is set to the predetermined number. The area corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas (for example, for example) without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number from the corresponding area (for example, the second) (for example, the third). The hold icon is displayed in the 4th). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as causing the player to recognize an erroneous number of holdings, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the number (for example, one) smaller than the predetermined number (for example, two) in the sub first hold indicator 83 and the first hold number display area 70E. ) Is displayed, and when the effect control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of holds is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number, the number is one less than the specified number. It is designed to display a specific number of holds without displaying the number of holds. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, since the accurate number of holds is displayed immediately, it is possible to promptly inform the player of the number of holds.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, a predetermined number without displaying the hold icon in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of holds is a predetermined number while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the number of holds. A predetermined number of hold icons are additionally displayed in the area corresponding to a predetermined number of icon display areas (for example, the second) to display a specific number of hold icons, and then the hold icons are shifted and displayed to display a predetermined number of hold icons. The icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas and the number one more than the predetermined number (for example). For example, the number of holds is specified while the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, 4th) corresponding to a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number without displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to 3). When the effect control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number in the hold icon display area (for example, the second) and the number one more than the predetermined number (for example, the second). For example, by additionally displaying hold icons in the area corresponding to 3) and displaying a specific number of hold icons, and then shifting the hold icons, the number of hold icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the number of reserved numbers, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 to 133, the icon corresponding to the first hold storage in which the effect control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command is displayed as a hold icon. Does not execute the icon change effect, but the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed because the command at the time of winning cannot be received normally, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

In the specific example described above, when a predetermined number (4 or 3) of reserved storages are stored in the main control board 110 and an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130, the first special On the symbol hold display 63 (first display), the number of holds is continuously reduced and displayed even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of an abnormality, the effect control board 130 has a specific number (two or more less than the main control board 110) held and stored in the main control board 110, which is less than a predetermined number (4 or 3). When the command is normally received in the first image display device 70 (second display), the hold display gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number (for example, the number of hold icons is 4 to 2 or 1). 3 to 1) is not displayed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, the hold display (display of the number of holds, hold icon) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, and is produced during the execution of the look-ahead effect by the hold display. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the control board 130, the look-ahead effect by the hold display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the look-ahead zone background) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation in advance. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the background display, the look-ahead effect by the background display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received. ..
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance by displaying characters (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE"), and execute the look-ahead effect by displaying characters. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the look-ahead effect by displaying characters can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, and the expectation level display is used. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect, the look-ahead effect by displaying the expectation degree can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a preliminary notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, operation such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, same color chance eyes of the effect pattern, etc.), and the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect. When an abnormality occurs due to, the look-ahead effect can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, and during the execution of the look-ahead effect, an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, and the effect control If there is a big hit in the hold memory that the board 130 has missed, the look-ahead effect by the hold display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received, and the predetermined big prize opening is opened. good.
Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player even when an abnormality occurs, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a preliminary notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, operation such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, same color chance eyes of the effect pattern, etc.), and the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect. When a command is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to the above, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not performed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a preliminary notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, a look-ahead effect (for example, the first movable member 70) that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach There are board and frame accessories such as, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, and chances of the same color of the production pattern). After an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a continuous look-ahead effect that spans a plurality of symbol fluctuations based on the first hold storage, the command is stored after the first hold storage. When the command corresponding to the second reserved storage is normally received, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be continuously executed based on the predetermined reserved storage is not performed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when a predetermined number (4 or 3) of reserved storages are stored in the main control board 110 and an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130, the first special In the symbol hold display 63, the number of holds (first display) is continuously reduced and displayed even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the occurrence of an abnormality, the effect control board 130 has a specific number (two or more less than the main control board 110) held and stored in the main control board 110, which is less than a predetermined number (4 or 3). When the command is normally received in, the hold display (second display, for example, four hold icons) is gradually reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in the hold number display areas 70B and 70D of the first image display device 70. 2 or 1 from 3 to 1) is not displayed. On the other hand, in the hold number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the hold display (third display, for example, the hold number) gradually decreasing from the predetermined number to the specific number is not displayed. It is designed to change to a specific number of hold displays.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130, the effect symbol 70a for which the variation effect has been completed can be displayed in a temporary stop state (oscillation state). Even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a, the temporary stop state (swing state) of the effect symbol 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demo effect is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold storage, the second hold storage stored after the first hold storage is performed. When the command corresponding to is normally received, the read-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold storage is not continuously performed in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is normally received. , Or, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first reserved storage. Do not continue the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously, change the look-ahead effect to a display with a low degree of expectation, or delete the look-ahead effect. It has become.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE") based on the first hold storage. When a command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a is continuously executed for the first reserved storage. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the scheduled character display is not continuously performed, the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the pre-reading effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, when the command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a is continuous with respect to the first reserved storage. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the expected degree display that was scheduled to be executed is not continuously performed, the pre-reading effect is changed to the display with a low expectation degree, or the pre-reading effect is deleted. ..
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. As a preliminary notification to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, a look-ahead effect that can be executed in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects in the period before reach (for example, a board accessory such as the first movable member 70) Actions such as frame accessories, vibration of operation buttons, light emission,
There is a chance of the same color of the production pattern). Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead effect executed in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects in the period before reach. When a command corresponding to the second reserved storage stored after the first reserved storage is normally received after the abnormality occurs due to, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, the first reserved storage is displayed. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not continuously performed, the look-ahead effect is changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect is deleted.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, when an abnormality occurs in the effect control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of the command and the command (holding memory) missed by the effect control board 130 has a big hit, it is stored after the big hit hold memory or the big hit hold memory. When the command corresponding to the hold storage is normally received, in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is normally received, the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory. May not be performed continuously, the look-ahead effect may be changed to a display with a low degree of expectation, or the look-ahead effect may be erased.
In this case, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it becomes easy to understand that the abnormality has occurred, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold storage, the command is stored before the first hold storage or the first hold storage. When the command corresponding to the second hold storage is normally received, the read-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that was normally received. Can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect based on the first hold storage, the command is stored before the first hold storage or the first hold storage. When the command corresponding to the second hold storage is normally received, the read-ahead effect (advance notification) that was scheduled to be continuously executed for the first hold memory in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a that was normally received. Is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage stored before the first reserved storage is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for the reserved memory of 1, can be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, the command is abnormally received or not received on the effect control board 130 during the pre-reading effect by the background display (for example, a background image different from the one normally used such as the pre-reading zone background). When a command corresponding to the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage stored before the first reserved storage is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to reception, the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a shows the first. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the background display, which was scheduled to be continuously executed for the reserved memory of 1, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE") based on the first hold storage. , When a command corresponding to the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage stored before the first reserved storage is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, with respect to the first reserved storage. It is now possible to continuously execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying characters, which was planned to be executed continuously.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead effect by character display (for example, a telop or character such as "ZONE") based on the first hold storage. , When a command corresponding to the first reserved storage or the second reserved storage stored before the first reserved storage is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a, with respect to the first reserved storage. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying characters, which was scheduled to be executed continuously, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). When a command corresponding to the first hold storage or the second hold storage stored before the first hold storage is normally received after the occurrence, the first hold storage is displayed in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. It is now possible to continuously execute the look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the expectation level, which was planned to be continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the effect control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not execute the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Then, based on the first hold storage, an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs on the effect control board 130 during execution of the look-ahead effect by the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). When a command corresponding to the first hold storage or the second hold storage stored before the first hold storage is normally received after the occurrence, the first hold storage is displayed in the variable display of the normally received effect symbol 70a. The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display, which was planned to be continuously executed, is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. (Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of the accessory, the frame accessory, the operation such as the vibration of the operation button, the light emission, and the same color chance eye of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is held until the command is normally received. While the display) can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display or the operation effect of the first movable member 70) among the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. There is.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. (Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of the accessory, the frame accessory, the operation such as the vibration of the operation button, the light emission, and the same color chance eye of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is held until the command is normally received. While the display) can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, the background display or the operation effect of the first movable member 70) among the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. There is.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. (Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of the accessory, the frame accessory, the operation such as the vibration of the operation button, the light emission, and the same color chance eye of the effect pattern. When an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first image display device 70 of the plurality of look-ahead effects is used until the command is normally received. While the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold display) to be executed can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, a second look-ahead effect) executed by using a device other than the first image display device 70 among a plurality of look-ahead effects. For example, the operation effect of the first movable member 70) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. (Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of the accessory, the frame accessory, the operation such as the vibration of the operation button, the light emission, and the same color chance eye of the effect pattern. When a command is normally received after an error occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first look-ahead effect (for example, hold display) among the plurality of look-ahead effects is displayed. ) Can be continuously executed, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of look-ahead effects is not continuously executed. ..
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, as a look-ahead effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a big hit in advance, for example, a hold display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.) are normally used. (Background image different from the one used), character display (for example, telop or character such as "ZONE"), expectation degree display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It is possible to combine and execute a plurality of the accessory, the frame accessory, the operation such as the vibration of the operation button, the light emission, and the same color chance eye of the effect pattern. When a command is normally received after an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command on the effect control board 130 during execution of a plurality of look-ahead effects, the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects is executed. While the first look-ahead effect to be performed (for example, hold display) can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, for example) to be executed by using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects. , The operation effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) is not continuously executed.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Further, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, if an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which has not been started but has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold storage is continued, and the identification unit (number) constituting the effect symbol 70a and the effect (EF) associated with the character are continued. ) Is executed.
Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, if an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which has not been started but has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold memory is continued, and a part of the decoration attached to the character constituting the effect symbol 70a (for example, a bar-shaped image). The operation effect of SG) is executed.
Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormal reception or non-reception of a stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs on the effect control board 130 in a state where there is hold storage, the effect symbol 70a in the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect symbol 70a, which has not been started but has stopped fluctuating, temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T corresponding to the hold storage is continued, and the operation effect of the hold icon T is executed.
Therefore, even if the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

When the number of holdings stored in the main control board 110 deviates by 2 or more from the number of holdings stored in the effect control board 130, it is displayed on the liquid crystal display (first image display device, second image display device). The effect of gradually reducing the number of hold icons being held is rewritten to the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of hold commands input from the main control board 110 main, without performing the effect of gradually reducing the number of hold icons.
Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

As advance notification (look-ahead effect) that raises the jackpot expectation, for example, hold change, hold change character display, hold change character display change, character display suggesting transition to a mode consisting of multiple types (telop) , Background color change, background conversion, return of appearing characters, appearance of new characters, expectation display by multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), predetermined production to be performed in the first period (before reach) from the start of fluctuation It may be possible to execute (button vibration, movable frame / board, effect, lightning, character display, specific sound, predetermined lamp emission) in parallel with a plurality of variable effects.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands via a state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the effect symbol 70a is statically displayed (main stop) and the command is responded to. The display process may be executed.

Even if the effect control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the stop command, the background image associated with each of the plurality of effect modes may be displayed. At this time, in a plurality of effect modes, hold, pseudo, group notice, and the like are displayed in a common display mode (form and color), but the degree of expectation may be different depending on the effect mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a light guide plate display, a title display, and the like are displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the effect mode.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, the previous look-ahead effect may not be continuously executed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the following command is normally received, a new effect (for example, including the icon change in the relevant case) may be executed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state during the pre-reading effect, the pre-reading effect is continuously displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change to a display mode (for example, changing the hold display from a blue icon to a plain display) with a lower expectation than the previous look-ahead effect.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state during the look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage), the abnormal reception or non-reception is performed. In the state, the look-ahead effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

When the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the abnormally received or unreceived state of the stop command during the look-ahead effect of displaying a character display (for example, telop), the abnormal reception or non-reception is performed. In the state of, the look-ahead effect of displaying the character display (telop) may be continuously displayed.

Displaying expected value display (color change, effect, hold) Abnormal when the effect control board 130 normally receives the next command via the state of abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command during the look-ahead effect. In the received or unreceived state, the look-ahead effect of displaying the expected value display (color change, effect, hold) may be continuously executed.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the variation effect is not limited to displaying a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed in the temporarily stopped state (oscillation state), and the variation effect is completed. A part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in the temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), and the rest of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in the main stopped state (stationary state). For example, when a command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, while the central effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped or the two left and right effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped. Then, it can be changed as appropriate, such as stopping the central effect symbol 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a may be expanded or contracted. In this case, when the start command is received during the temporary stop, the effect symbol 70a is displaced in the direction of contraction (smaller than the normal size) and in the direction of expansion (smaller than the normal size) from the stop position. If it is large), it is better to make it a normal size and display it at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, but the effect symbol 70a does not swing and the decorative part and the number part protrude from the base image. It may be made to fluctuate like this. In this case, if the start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decoration part or the number part is displaced in the direction protruding from the base image, it will be displayed in the base image and displayed at the stop position. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the effect symbol 70a is composed of only the number portion (identification character) in the specific game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state), the decoration portion fluctuates when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the operation (effect operation) is not performed, the effect symbol 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decorative part consisting of a symbol effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation operation (directing operation) may be performed.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, an effect may be executed such that the identification unit (number) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect is completed operates. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed. The operation effect may not be executed in the remaining portion of the effect symbol 70a.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the effect (for example, the symbol effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character) associated with the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect is completed is generated. ) Should be performed. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed. The operation effect may not be executed in the remaining portion of the effect symbol 70a.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, the decoration (for example, and the bar image SG which is a part of the character) attached to the character (for example, the character image CG) constituting the effect symbol 70a for which the variable effect is completed ) Should be performed. In this case, the motion effect is not limited to the execution of the motion effect on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed, and the motion effect is executed on a part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a for which the variation effect is completed. The operation effect may not be executed in the remaining portion of the effect symbol 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the decorative portion perform a fluctuating operation (effect operation) when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the bar-shaped image SG and the design effect image ZE Only one of the above may be made to perform a fluctuating operation (directing operation).

It is preferable to execute an effect such that the hold display (for example, the hold icon) operates when the command of the effect control board 130 is missed.

It is preferable to execute an effect such that the hold display (for example, the hold icon) operates when the command of the effect control board 130 is missed.

When the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to continue the fluctuation of the special symbol TZ.

When the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is started based on the normal command after the command of the effect control board 130 is missed, even if the numerical information of the effect symbol 70a and the numerical information of the special symbol TZ are different. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are not mentioned, but the frame lighting device during the extension of the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the 10 may be set to the same mode as during the temporary stop before extension (a light emitting mode in which the brightness is lower than that during the fluctuation, and a light emitting mode having less change or movement than during the fluctuation). , At least one of the plurality of light emitting units constituting the panel lighting device 76 has the same light emission mode as during the temporary stop before extension (light emission mode in which the brightness is lower than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation). It may be set to (aspect, extinguishing). In this case, when the start command is received next time, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 76 change (switch) to the light emitting mode according to the fluctuation.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect symbol 70a in the loss mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“248”), but the same number as the effect symbol 70a is used. The main stop may be made in such a loss mode. Further, when the production symbol 70a in the jackpot mode is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped in the predetermined jackpot mode (“333”), but the book is in the same number as the production symbol 70a. You may want to stop.

Further, in the present embodiment, the start command start command (first special symbol storage designation command, effect symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern) transmitted from the main control unit 110m during the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. When the effect control unit 130m receives the designated command), the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol continues, but as with the effect symbol 70a, the variation display is instantaneously derived and displayed. You may want to start. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ deviated from the predetermined stop position may be displayed at the stop position.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start time command or the customer waiting state specification command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased without animation for one frame, but when the icon TH is stopped. It may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon TH based on the reception of a command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon T, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, it is erased by animation for 5 frames. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a start command is received while the number of hold icons larger than the number of holds is displayed, the surplus hold icon T1 is deleted by one frame of non-animation. The number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames for erasing the icon T1 based on the reception of the stop command, 20 frames for the shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames for the additional display of the hold icon, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased by the animation of the minute.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect control unit 130m receives the start command in which the hold number becomes a predetermined number, the hold number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasped). If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (abnormality that is the same number, abnormality that has a deviation in the increasing direction) with the number of hold icons, the number of hold icons that is one more than the specified number is displayed. Although a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed after the display, a predetermined number of hold icons may be displayed as they are without displaying a number of hold icons one more than the predetermined number.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 130m receives the start command in which the hold number becomes a predetermined number, and the hold number and the effect control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m are stored (grasped). If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (anomaly with the same number, anomalies with a deviation in the increasing direction) from the number of pending commands, it is executed in response to the reception of this start command. Although the icon is displayed during the variation effect, the icon may not be displayed during the variation effect executed in response to the reception of the start command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal icon is a CD icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of the effect mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the effect mode and the type of the gaming state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the normal icon. May be good. Furthermore, even when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is different depending on the effect mode and the type of the game state, the operation mode (the mode of the effect operation) during the variable effect is different depending on the form of the special icon. May be good.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the special icon is displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but the special icon or the specific icon (displayed in the process of changing to the special icon) suggesting the change to the special icon is specified. A specific icon suggesting that the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect) is executed may be provided. In this case, the form of the special icon or the specific icon or the mode of the effect operation may be different from the form of the normal icon or the special icon or the mode of the effect operation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the look-ahead specification command of the hold number specification command as the winning command is normally received, but the hold number specification command is received and the look-ahead designation is specified. The hold icon may be displayed when the command is not received normally, while the hold icon may not be displayed when the look-ahead specification command is normally received without receiving the hold number specification command normally. And vice versa. When the hold icon is displayed by receiving only one of the hold number designation command and the look-ahead designation command, the icon change effect for the hold icon may not be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode cannot be changed by the operation of the effect button 17 by the player, but the effect mode may be changed by the operation of the effect button 17. In this case, the effect control unit 130m does not accept the operation for changing the effect mode during the extension of the temporary stop period of the effect symbol 70a based on the command abnormality that the command cannot be normally received, that is, the effect button 17 It is advisable to regulate the change of the effect mode based on the operation of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon for prompting the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 is displayed. Depending on the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon for which is enabled is displayed, an operation change effect that changes the button icon to one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon may be executed. .. In this case, in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 is changed from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined ratio. You may do so. In this case, rather than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect, the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue advance notice effect or decision effect. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation unit for performing the operation effect (speech notice effect, decision effect) is only the effect button 17, but an operation unit such as an effect lever is provided separately from the effect button 17, for example. During the valid period generated during the SP reach effect, an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever is executed, and an operation effect (decision effect, etc.) is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 or the effect lever. You may. In this case, the determined effect in the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the specific game state (short-time game state, probabilistic game state) is better than the case where the SP reach effect that can be executed only in the normal game state is executed. The operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed (difficult to be executed) at a low rate.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the execution period of the reach effect, the operation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the jackpot game is executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 that has been enabled is not executed. The operation notice effect may be executed in the first half period (for example, during normal reach) and the second half period (for example, during SP reach effect) of the reach effect. In this case, the effect button 17 moves to the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the effect position) in the operation notice effect executed in the latter half period of the reach effect than in the operation advance notice effect executed in the first half period of the reach effect. ) Should be high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member are not linked, but the expectation of the notice in the jackpot notice effect and the operation of the movable member may be linked. In this case, during the execution of the variable effect, the movable member operates when the advance notice effect of the content having a high jackpot expectation is executed than when the advance notice effect of the content having a high jackpot expectation is executed. It is better to make the ratio high (easy to operate).

In the present embodiment, the hold icon T1 (T2) is displayed in the hold icon display area 70B (70C) and the hold number is displayed in the hold number display area 70E (70F) as the hold storage in the first image display device 70. There is. In this way, in the hold icon display area 70B (70C), the hold number is displayed by the display number of the hold icon T1 (T2), and in the hold number display area 70E (70F), the hold number is displayed by the numerical information of the hold number. it's shown. The hold icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, figure, character, or symbol as in the "CD" shape of the present embodiment, but may be a combination of a plurality of pictures, figures, characters, symbols, or a picture. It is possible to adopt an appropriate configuration, such as attaching effects (effect production) or decorations to the main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of holds, such as the hold icon change effect, is not limited to the change of the hold icon alone, but even if the change effect is performed so that it changes due to the action of other characters or the action of the effect such as a character. good. The change in the hold icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As an example of pre-reading effect (advance notification) by displaying characters, an example of scrolling the characters of "ZONE" in the left-right direction was given, but the character display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but symbols, pictures, figures, or these. It may be a combination with. Further, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may be different depending on the degree of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, and any mode that attracts the player's attention, such as zooming in or out, panning or tilting, can be adopted.

As a look-ahead effect (advance notification) by displaying the expectation level, a color effect that exemplifies a blue effect image EF is mentioned, but it is not limited to the color effect, for example, a light emission effect with a halo or black. Appropriate display can be adopted, such as action effects such as being sucked in like a hole or blowing wind. Further, the expectation degree display is not limited to being accompanied by the effect symbol 70a or being performed by the effect symbol 70a itself, and may be performed by a background display or the like. Further, the expectation degree display is not limited to the display on the first image display device 70, and the accessory or the light emitting device provided in the game board, the winning device such as the light emitting device or the starting port, or the accessory or the light emitting device provided in the game frame. It may be done by light emission such as.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) by the expectation degree display may be an effect executed only before the reach or an effect executed after the reach. Further, when the expectation degree display is executed after the reach, it may be continuously displayed in the pre-reach mode or may be changed to be displayed in a different mode from the pre-reach mode.

The look-ahead effect (advance notification) may be performed in a variable effect or at an appropriate timing according to the lottery scenario, but for each variable effect, the presence or absence of progress and the necessity of changing the degree of expectation are determined. A lottery may be held and the process may proceed according to the result.

As the effect effects typified by the effects, the pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character and the color effect exemplifying the blue effect image EF are mentioned, but the effect is not limited to the color effect, for example, the back light is shining. It is possible to adopt an appropriate display such as a light emission effect such as, or an action effect such as being sucked in like a black hole or blowing a wind.

In the present embodiment, a specific example in which the icon TH is not displayed when the command is normally received and returned from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be normally received in the effect control unit 130m has been described. When it is received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the effect control unit 130m described above, when the first special symbol hold display 63 cannot normally receive a command (signal) from the main control unit 110m, the hold displayed by the first special symbol hold display 63 is displayed. A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of holdings grasped (stored) by the effect control unit 130m deviate from each other.
That is, the first special symbol hold display 63 (first display means) can execute the first shift display in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started, and the effect control unit 130 m can execute the first shift display. When a specified number (for example, 2) of hold storage commands (signals), which is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 2), is received from the main control unit 110m in a state where there is a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage, the first It is possible to execute the second shift display in which the reserved memory is reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in a reduction mode different from the one shift display (a mode in which the number is directly reduced from 4 to 2 without passing through 3). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the effect control unit 130 m has an effect symbol regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variation effect of 70a is completed, the reserved memory can be reduced and displayed one by one.
According to this, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control unit 110m and the effect control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when correcting the deviation (mismatch, deviation) of the reserved number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In a specific example, the hold memory stored (grasped) by the effect control unit can be displayed at a plurality of places. In the present embodiment, the hold icon display area 70B (70) of the first image display device 70
The hold storage is displayed in two places, D) and the hold number display area 70E (70F). For example,
The hold storage may be displayed at each of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations of the second image display device 71.

In a specific example, in the hold icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to execute the first shift display in which the hold storage is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. In this first shift display, for example, the hold icon T1 (T2) is displayed so as to be shifted next to each other by one for each variation effect. Further, when, for example, four hold icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the hold icon display area 70B (70D) and the effect control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two hold storages, the hold icon is held. The hold icon T1 (T2) does not display the same as the first shift display, in which the icon T1 (T2) shifts from 4 to 3 and decreases to 3, and then shifts from 3 to 2. After the 4th item disappears, the 2nd shift display is performed so that the number is reduced from the 3rd item to the 2nd item. On the other hand, in the hold number display area 70E (70F) for displaying the hold storage by the hold number (numerical information), the hold number is displayed so as to be sequentially decreased by one each time the variation effect is started. There is. When, for example, the hold number "4" is displayed in the hold number display area 70E (70F), for example, when the effect control unit 130 m receives a command corresponding to two hold storages (second shift display is executed). ), Instead of displaying the reserved numbers one by one in order, the third shift display that displays the reserved numbers "2" corresponding to, for example, two reserved numbers from the reserved number "4" is displayed. It has become.

As the look-ahead effect (advance notification), by executing a related effect in a part of each variation effect in a plurality of variation effects, the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. It is feasible to suggest. As "related effects", various effects such as movements by accessories provided on the game frame or game board, effects by light emission, actions such as vibration of operation buttons and light emission, and the same color chance eyes of the effect symbol 70a are mentioned. Even if the same effect is executed in each variable effect, the content of the effect may be different for each variable effect, for example, different effects that increase the degree of expectation are executed as the variable effect is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease even though the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control unit 110 m, the effect related to the look-ahead effect (advance notification) is continued. It may or may not be executed. In such a case, the player's interest can be attracted by continuously executing the related effect. In addition, the consistency of the production can be maintained by not continuously executing the related production.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold storage stored after the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related effect. In addition, a related effect of the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory (for example, performing a large motion effect of the first movable member 73) is another related effect (for example, the first movable effect) having a lower expectation than the related effect. The operation effect of the member 73 may be reduced). Further, the effect related to the look-ahead effect based on the target hold storage may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold storage stored before the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be executed from the continuation of the related effect. In this case, the player's expectation can be improved by continuing the look-ahead effect.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the hold storage stored before the target memory, the look-ahead effect based on the target hold memory can be prevented from being executed from the continuation of the related effect. In this case, the consistency of the production can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as JP-A-2018-118109, a drive source for converting a large winning opening or a starting opening from a closed state to an open state is operated by controlling a main control board. ing. However, in the conventional gaming machine, when the gaming board is replaced in the game store or the gaming board constituting the front side of the gaming board is replaced, the drive source operated by the control of the main control board generates an operation trigger. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to check the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 134 to 138 has a drive source (large winning opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) in which the main control board 110 controls the operation as a result of the game, and the main control is performed. The board 110 is adapted to initially operate the drive source in a predetermined mode in a pre-start state after the power supply is started and before the game is controlled.
As a result, the special electric accessory, the ordinary electric accessory, and the distribution mechanism in the large winning opening are operated for a certain period limited to the state before the start of the game (the state before the start), and the operation is confirmed to confirm the installation. In addition, inspection and confirmation after parts replacement can be performed more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 134, when the setting change device is installed, a certain period after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed is set as the pre-start state. In this case, preparations for clearing RWM are in progress.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the setting change device is not installed, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is the pre-start state. .. In this case, there is no preparation for clearing RWM.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the setting change device is not installed, a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a is set as the pre-start state. In this case, after shifting to the pre-start state, for example, 7 seconds later, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) three times. It is good to move to the playable state after going.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the setting changing device is mounted, the setting changing or setting confirmation is in the pre-start state.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the setting change device is not mounted, the state before the start is set from turning on the power while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again. In this case, the ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) / OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) of each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game when the state shifts to the pre-start state is turned into the game-enabled state by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. Repeat until you make the transition. In this case, preparations for clearing RWM are in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, the prize ball is paid out by winning a prize at the winning opening of the game ball, the special symbol display device is operated or the special electric accessory is operated by winning the prize at the starting opening of the game ball, and the game ball is normal. The operation of the ordinary symbol display device or the operation of the ordinary electric accessory by passing through the gate or winning a prize in the winning opening related to the operation of the symbol display device is invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the launch permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so that the launch of the game ball is not invalid. In addition, in the state before the start, it is advisable to turn off (hide) the performance display monitor.

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, during the opening of the large winning opening in the state before the start, the opening signal from the game information output terminal board is not output. It is advisable to send a power-on / power-recovery command when shifting to the playable state, and perform the initial operation of the gimmick (role) after shifting to the game-enabled state. Then, during the operation of the big winning opening solenoid in the state before the start, it is preferable not to make the big winning opening LED or the like emit light as in the case of the big hit.

The performance display monitor may be fully lit for, for example, 5 seconds after the inspection mode is completed, and then the base value may be displayed. In addition, it is advisable to stop firing in a state other than "recovery" (pre-start state, unrecoverable error).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a secondary control means that controls the production of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control means. In the game machine provided with (effect control unit 130 m), the main control means (main control unit 110 m) stores a hold memory based on the establishment of a start condition (a prize for a game ball to start ports 45, 47). It is possible, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and whether to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to execute the determination of whether or not, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) controls to display the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In addition to being possible, the second display means can execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform the variable effect. It is possible to execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the hold memory one by one each time the operation is started, and the hold memory of a predetermined number (for example, 4) is displayed. When the slave control means receives a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals less than a predetermined number by 2 or more from the main control means, the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) is displayed. Is capable of executing a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) for reducing the hold memory from the predetermined number to the specific number in different reduction modes, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64). ) Is suspended each time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the memories can be reduced and displayed one by one in order.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and the hold memory is displayed as the first display means (special symbol hold indicator 6).
It can be controlled so as to be displayed on 3,64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory, and the slave control means (effect control unit) can be executed. The 130m) can be controlled to display the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, The second image display device 71) can execute the variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is reserved every time the variation effect is started. The subordinate control means (for example, in a state where the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) for sequentially decreasing the memories one by one can be executed and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed) When the effect control unit (130 m) receives from the main control means (main control unit 110 m) a specific number (for example, two) of hold storage signals that is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four), the first A second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) that reduces the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from the shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) Is feasible, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is provided by the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device). It can be executed by the hold storage (for example, the icon change effect) displayed in 71), and in the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), the specified number (for example, 2) is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4). The number of reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is the predetermined number (for example) during the period in which the reserved memories are displayed so as to decrease by one. Even in a predetermined state in which the number does not decrease from 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64). Is held and stored every time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. Is characterized by being able to be displayed in order of decrease one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (first image display device 71) can be used to control the display. The 1 image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold storage is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the reserved storage signal is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the reserved storage is stored in the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) To the specific number (for example, 2), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed by the background display (for example, change to the look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display. In the means (special symbol hold display 63,64), the second display means is displayed so that the hold storage is reduced by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). Even if the hold storage displayed on the (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces), the front It is possible to continuously execute the pre-article notification, and the first display means (special symbol) The hold indicator 63,64) determines whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that the reserved memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time the operation is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (first image display device 71) can be used to control the display. The 1 image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold storage is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed. When the reserved storage signal is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the reserved storage is stored in the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). ) To the specific number (for example, 2), the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The suggested advance notification can be executed by the character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (for example). In the special symbol hold display 63,64), the second display means (second display means) is displayed so that the hold storage is reduced by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). Even if the reserved storage displayed on the 1 image display device 70 and the 2nd image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces), the advance Notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold) The indicators 63,64) make the determination regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed. The feature is that the reserved memory can be reduced and displayed one by one each time it ends.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and is based on undetermined hold storage. The advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high can be executed by the expectation display (for example, a look-ahead effect effect), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display). The device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 pieces) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by 1 each time the variation effect is started, and holds a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). In the state where the memory is displayed, the main control means displays a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals in which the number of the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4). When received from (main control unit 110m), the reserved memory is stored from the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 pieces to 3 pieces). It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64) has the predetermined number (for example, 4).
It is displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) during a period in which the reserved memory is displayed so as to decrease by one from the specific number (for example, two). Even if the reserved storage is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, 4) does not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, 2), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (for example). The special symbol hold display 63,64) may execute either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2). Each time the determination is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and each of the variation effects can be performed in a plurality of the variation effects. By executing a related effect (for example, the motion effect of the first movable member 73) during a part of the variable effect, it is suggested that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high. The notification can be executed, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) sequentially reduces the reserved storage one by one each time the variation effect is started. Display (for example, 4 to 3) can be executed, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage is displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4). ), When a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), what is the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3)? It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for reducing the reserved memory from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in different reduction modes, and the first display means. (Special symbol hold display 63,64) may execute either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2). Each time the determination is completed, the hold memory can be reduced and displayed one by one in order, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is used in the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64). The second display means (first image display device 70, A predetermined state in which the reserved storage displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease has occurred, and the predetermined state is canceled based on the reserved storage stored after the target reserved storage that is the target of the advance notification. At the time, it is characterized in that the advance notification is not executed from the continuation of the related effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), which is an advantageous special game (big hit) based on the hold memory. It is possible to execute the determination as to whether or not to perform the operation, and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 71) can be controlled. The 1-image display device 70, the 2nd image display device 71) can execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. , A specific number (for example, 2) in which the number of the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is 2 or more less than the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a state where the reserved memory of a predetermined number (for example, 4) is displayed. When the signal of the hold storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is stored from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) to reduce the number to (number), the number of reserved memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is executed, the numerical information It is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, 4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) of the reserved storage without displaying the number of items to be reduced one by one. When either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2) is executed by the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64). Even so, it is characterized in that the reserved storage can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one each time the determination is completed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to control the hold memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol hold display 63, 64), and the special game advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. It is possible to determine whether or not to perform (big hit), and the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) displays the hold storage on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can execute a variation effect of the effect symbol, and the second display means (first image display device 71) can be used to control the display. The 1 image display device 70, the second image display device 71) can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect) when there is no hold storage after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect. It is possible to execute the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the hold memory is sequentially reduced by 1 each time the variation effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold memories is displayed. In the state, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) outputs a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four). When received from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3), the hold storage is reduced from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). Display (for example, 4 to 2) can be executed, and the first display means (special symbol hold display 63,64) holds the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). During the period in which the memories are displayed so as to decrease by one, the number of reserved memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is from the predetermined number (for example, four). When the predetermined number (for example, 2) is not reduced to the specified number, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and the predetermined number is specified even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect. The first display means without executing the effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect). (Special symbol hold display 63,64) may execute either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2). Each time the determination is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially reduced and displayed one by one.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high is high. Etc.) can be executed, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) displays the memory even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the reserved memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification. Based on the target hold storage, which does not continue to execute the advance notification based on the target hold memory when the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory stored after the target hold memory. One of changing the advance notification to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, and erasing the advance notification based on the target hold storage. It is characterized by.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). ) The display means (first image display device 70) provides advance notification suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. , It can be executed by the background display (for example, the look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second image display device 71), and the display means (for example, the display means (for example, the main control unit 110 m) increases or decreases the reserved memory. When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the above-mentioned thing. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage that is the target of the advance notification, the pre-notification can be continuously executed, and the pre-notification is based on the target hold storage. The pre-notification of the article is not continuously executed, the pre-notification based on the target hold storage is changed to another pre-notification with a lower expectation than the prior notification, and the pre-notification based on the target hold storage is performed. It is characterized in that one of the following is performed to delete the pre-article notification.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the display means (first image display device 70) provides advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. , The display means can be executed by the character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second image display device 71), and the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance is possible. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed, the target hold storage. The advance notification based on the above is changed to another advance notification with a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted. It is characterized by performing.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). Hold storage that is feasible and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed, and the advance based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed. It is characterized in that the notification is changed to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, and the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted. do.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is undetermined by executing the related effect (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variable effect in the plurality of the variable effects. It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the reserved memory of the above, and the display is displayed even though the reserved memory is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage targeted for the advance notification, the advance notification can be continuously executed, based on the target hold storage. The related effect of the advance notification based on the target hold storage (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73), which is not executed from the continuation of the effect related to the advance notification (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73). To another related effect with a lower expectation than the related effect, and to erase the related effect of the advance notification based on the target hold memory. Characterized by doing.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game based on the undetermined hold memory is high is high. ) Is feasible, and is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When returning from the predetermined state based on the hold storage stored after the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed, and the above-mentioned thing based on the target hold storage. The advance notification is changed to another advance notification having a lower expectation than the advance notification, or the advance notification based on the target hold storage is deleted, and the display is performed. The means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) in which the reserved memory is sequentially reduced by one each time the variation effect is started. It is possible, and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is larger than the predetermined number (for example, 4). When a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals, which is two or more less, is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the reduction mode is different from the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3). Hold memory in the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example) The second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number from (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and the number of reserved storage can be displayed by numerical information. When the shift display is executed, a third shift display (for example) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the reserved storage of the specific number (for example, 2) without performing the display for sequentially decreasing the numerical information one by one (for example). It is characterized in that 4 to 2) can be executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and when there is no hold storage after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect), and the main control means (main). When a predetermined state occurs in which the hold memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease even though the hold memory increases or decreases in the control unit 110 m). While the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state. At the same time, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, and the hold memory stored after the target hold memory targeted for the advance notification is stored. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the above, the advance notification based on the target hold storage, which does not continuously execute the advance notification based on the target hold storage, is expected to be higher than the advance notification. It is characterized in that one of changing to another advance notification having a lower value and erasing the advance notification based on the target hold storage is performed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target hold that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. Is possible, and the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target hold that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the background display (for example,) for displaying the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is used even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the displayed hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory which is the target of the above, the advance notification based on the target hold memory can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the background display (for example,) for displaying the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the look-ahead zone background), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is used even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the displayed hold memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold memory before the target hold memory which is the target of the target, the advance notification based on the target hold memory is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) in the display means, and a character display (for example,) for displaying a prior notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is performed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance is possible. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) in the display means, and a character display (for example,) for displaying a prior notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed on the display means. It can be executed by the "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is performed even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed in is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the advance is possible. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) in, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) in, and the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory is displayed by the expectation degree display (for example, the look-ahead effect effect). It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The first advance notification (for example, the hold icon change effect) suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and Expectations for the special game based on undetermined hold memory by executing related effects (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects. It is possible to execute the second advance notification suggesting that the value is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the second advance notification is continued. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage that is the target of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target hold storage is related. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The first advance notification (for example, the hold icon change effect) suggesting that the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed and the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and Expectations for the special game based on undetermined hold memory by executing related effects (for example, motion effect of the first movable member 73) in a part of each variation effect in the plurality of variation effects. It is possible to execute the second advance notification suggesting that the value is high, and the display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state in which the hold memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the second advance notification is continued. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage that is the target of the advance notification, the second advance notification based on the target hold storage is related. It is characterized in that it is not executed from the continuation of the effect (for example, the operation effect of the first movable member 73).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, from four) that sequentially reduces the reserved memory by one each time the variation effect is started. 3) can be executed, and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example). When a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals, which is 2 or more less than 4), is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is performed in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 pieces to 2 pieces) that reduces the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces), and it is possible to display the number of reserved storages by numerical information. Yes, the second shift display is executed If so, the third shift display (4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of the reserved storage is executed without displaying the numerical information to be sequentially reduced one by one. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute a variable effect of the effect symbol with, and advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory. It is feasible, and the hold storage displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) even though the hold storage is increased or decreased in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). When a predetermined state in which is not increased or decreased occurs, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed and becomes the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the hold storage before the target hold storage, the advance notification (for example, background display, character display, expectation degree display, etc.) based on the target hold storage is continuously executed. Instead, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is a first shift display (for example, 4 to 3) that sequentially reduces the reserved memory one by one each time the variation effect is started. In a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved storage, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4). When a specific number (for example, two) of hold storage signals, which is two or more less than the number), is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the hold storage is performed in a reduction mode different from that of the first shift display. It is possible to execute a second shift display (for example, from 4 pieces to 2 pieces) that reduces the predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces), and it is possible to display the number of reserved storages by numerical information. , Where the second shift display is executed In that case, it is possible to execute a third shift display (4 to 2) for displaying the numerical information corresponding to the reserved storage of the specific number (for example, 2) without displaying the numerical information to be sequentially reduced one by one. It is characterized by being.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is possible to execute the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and the variable effect is started. When there is no hold storage after a lapse of a predetermined time, a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect) can be executed by the display means, and the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). Regardless of this, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, and the target targeted for the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage can be continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and it is possible to execute the advance notification suggesting that the expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined hold memory, and the variable effect is started. When there is no hold memory after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demo effect), and the hold memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110 m). Regardless of this, when a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect symbol (70a) can be displayed in the temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. When the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, the customer waiting demo effect) is not executed even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, and the target targeted for the advance notification. When the predetermined state is canceled based on the hold storage before the hold storage, the advance notification based on the target hold storage is not continuously executed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display in a temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display of the hold storage is continued and the effect symbol (the effect symbol (1st image display device 70, 2nd image display device 71) is displayed. In the state where the effect effect (for example, the symbol effect image ZE) can be executed in the effect symbol (70a) while the 70a) is displayed in the temporarily stopped state, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storages are displayed. , The main control means (main control unit 110m) is a specified number (for example, 2) of pending storage signals (commands) in which the number of slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four). ), The display effect of gradually reducing the number of reserved storages is not performed for the number of deviations (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4 pieces) and the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces). It is characterized in that a predetermined number (for example, two) of reserved storage is displayed.

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In a gaming machine provided with a slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies a start condition (a winning of a game ball to a start port 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display in a temporarily stopped state, and when the predetermined state occurs, the display of the hold storage is continued and the effect symbol (the effect symbol (1st image display device 70, 2nd image display device 71) is displayed. With the 70a) displayed in the temporarily stopped state, it is possible to execute an operation effect of at least a part (for example, a bar-shaped image SG) of the decorative portion of the effect symbol (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of hold storage can be stored. In the displayed state, the subordinate control means (effect control unit 130 m) controls a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals (commands) that is 2 or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4). When received from the means (main control unit 110 m), the display effect of gradually reducing the number of reserved storages is the number of deviations (for example, 2) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2). It is characterized in that the hold storage of the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces) is displayed without performing (times).

◆ The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment produces a game based on a main control means (main control unit 110m) that controls the progress of the game and a signal (command) from the main control means (main control unit 110m). In the game machine provided with the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) for controlling the above, the main control means (main control unit 110 m) satisfies the start condition (winning of the game ball to the start ports 45, 47). It is possible to store the hold memory based on the above, and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big hit) advantageous to the player based on the hold memory. , The hold storage can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the main control means (main control) is displayed in a state where the hold storage is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of hold storages of the signal transmitted from the unit 110m) and the number of hold storages grasped by the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) are different, the effect symbol (70a) is displayed. It is possible to display in the temporarily stopped state, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) displays the effect symbol (70a) in the temporarily stopped state when the predetermined state occurs. In the state, the display of the hold memory can be continued, and the effect effect of the hold memory can be executed. In the state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the hold memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130 m) ) Is 2 or more less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), when a specific number (for example, 2) of hold storage signals (commands) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110 m), the number of hold storage The display effect of gradually reducing the number is not performed for the number of deviations (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4 pieces) and the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces), and the predetermined number (for example, 2 pieces) is held and stored. Is characterized by displaying.

(Image change production)
The image display device including the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display) can execute various effect displays according to the progress of the game. As the effect display, the customer waiting demo effect executed during the customer waiting state (waiting state in which the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol variation display is not performed, and the effect symbol executed during the customer waiting state in which the special symbol variation display is not performed. There is a variation effect accompanied by a variation display of 70a. Further, as an effect display, on the screen of the first image display device 70 and / or the screen of the second image display device 71, the image corresponding to the entire screen and / or a part of the screen is reduced, enlarged, deformed, rotated, or the like. It is possible to execute an image change effect in which one or a plurality of the above is combined and varied. It can be said that the image change effect makes the screen appear to move in a pseudo manner, such as the screen itself shaking depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, the timing during the execution period of the variable effect, the timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or the timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demo effect).

In the following description, in the figure, the change display of the screen on which the image change effect is executed is referred to as "SV display", and the display of the normal screen on which the image change effect is not executed is referred to as "normal display". Notated as. In the image change effect, the first image displayed on the screen in the normal display (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, etc .: FIG. 140 (a)) and the first image are changed to be displayed on the screen in the change display. It can be changed to a second image (for example, a reduced effect symbol 70a, a reduced background image HG, etc .: FIG. 140 (c)). It can be said that the second image of the change display can be recognized as being common and / or related to the first image of the normal display depending on its shape and information.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period such as the variation effect. The image change effect is executed, for example, at the start timing of the variable effect (synchronously), in the middle of the execution period of the variable effect, or at the end timing of the variable effect (synchronously). ) It may be executed. Further, the image change effect is triggered by an external factor such as winning a game ball to the winning opening or operating the effect button device 16, or a predetermined effect pattern such as selection of a predetermined game state or a look-ahead effect. Various conditions can be used as the trigger for execution, such as the trigger for execution by internal factors such as the selection of.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured to be able to execute the image change effect in the image display devices 70 and 71 in cooperation with the light emission effect by the board lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10. Further, the image change effect in the image display devices 70 and 71 is added to or in place of the light emission effect by the panel lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10, and the movable accessory (first movable member 73). , The second movable member 74) may be configured to be feasible in cooperation with the operation. Further, the image change effect in the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in cooperation with the sound output of the sound output device 9.

(1st movable accessory-movement)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is located above the standby position (origin position) and below by the driving force of the first movable member drive motor that is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform an effect operation that moves in the vertical direction to and from the effect position located at. The first movable member 73 can be detected to be at the origin position by the first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first aspect stopped at the standby position. Further, as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the effect position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The first movable member 73 performs a predetermined effect operation, such as vibrating greatly over the entire space between the standby position and the effect position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. To the second aspect It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect.

(1st movable accessory-1st light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 can perform effect light emission by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1 so that the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the panel lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the first movable member LED is turned on, blinks, and a color change is performed, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is turned off and the effect light is not emitted. It is possible to change the light emission state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the first movable member 73 is darkened, and the first light emitting region HK1 is in the first state in which the effect is emitted. The first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the first movable member LED makes the effect emission darker than in the second state, for example, the hue is darker than in the first state. It may be darkened, the brightness may be lower than that of the first state, or the saturation may be lower than that of the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED such as turning on or off.

(2nd movable accessory-movement)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, has a standby position (origin position) located on the upper right side due to the driving force of the second movable member drive motor which is a part of the panel drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform an effect operation that moves diagonally up and down with the effect position located at the lower left. The second movable member 74 can be detected to be at the origin position by the second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first aspect stopped at the standby position. Further, as the second movable member 74 moves diagonally downward from the standby position to the effect position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The second movable member 74 performs a predetermined effect operation, such as vibrating greatly over the entire space between the standby position and the effect position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the effect position. To the second aspect It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect.

(2nd movable accessory-1st light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 can perform effect light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the panel lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or a plurality of first light emitting regions HK1 so that the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the panel lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the second movable member LED is turned on, blinks, and a color change is performed, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is turned off and the second movable member LED is not turned off. It is possible to change the light emission state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the second movable member 74 is darkened, and the first light emitting region HK1 is in the first state in which the effect is emitted. The second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the second movable member LED makes the effect emission darker than in the first state, for example, the hue is darker than in the first state. It may be darkened, the brightness may be lower than that of the first state, or the saturation may be lower than that of the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED such as turning on or off.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is an effect operation of moving forward and backward in the second aspect, but one or a combination thereof such as forward / backward, rotation, rocking, and deformation. You may execute the effect operation with.

(Second light emitting area)
The gaming machine 1 is provided as a part of the board lighting device 76 and / or the frame lighting device 10 at at least one of the parts different from the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). It has a second light emitting region HK2. As the portion of the panel lighting device 76 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2, for example, the decorative frame 40, between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46). It may be an accessory attached to the game board 5 such as a winning opening lamp NR) for emitting light in a predetermined mode, a general winning opening 43, or a large winning opening 50, or the game board 5 itself. Further, as a part of the frame lighting device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2, for example, a glass frame 4 or the like can be mentioned. A portion other than the movable accessory such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the effect button device 16 may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting region HK2 is provided at a plurality of locations, and in the embodiment, the decorative frame 40, between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46 (the first starting port 45 and the variable starting portion 46). The case where the winning opening lamp NR) for causing the periphery of the above to emit light in a predetermined manner and the frame lighting device 10 provided on the glass frame 4 functions as the second light emitting region HK2 is illustrated. The second light emitting region HK2 may be divided into a plurality of different members such as a decorative frame 40 and a winning opening, and may be plurality in one member such as in the decorative frame 40.

The second light emitting region HK2 can perform effect light emission by lighting the LED (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light emitting region HK2 can emit light independently from the first light emitting region HK1 and other second light emitting regions. The first light emitting area HK2 is to change the light emitting state into a first state in which the LED is turned on, blinking, a color change, etc., and a second state in which the LED is turned off and the effect is not emitted. Is possible. By being in the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is turned off, in the embodiment, the entire or a part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and the second light emitting region HK2 emits light as a directing effect. By being in the 1st state, the periphery of the screen becomes brighter than when the 1st light emitting region HK2 is in the 2nd state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the effect emission of the LED is darker than that of the first state, for example, the hue is darker than that of the first state, or the hue is darker than that of the first state. The brightness may be lowered, or the saturation may be lowered from the first state. Further, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LED to be turned on or off.

(Specific example 1 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 1 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect emission using the first light emission region HK1 and / or the second light emission region HK2 will be described. FIG. 139 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. It is a timing chart of the specific example 1 which shows the relationship of the image change effect of. Further, FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the specific example 1 is executed.

As for the timing of T0, the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variation display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 140 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the lower part of the screen, and the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first hold at the lower part of the screen. It is displayed as a hold icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, the special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is variablely displayed. Then, on the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the variable display effect symbol 70a, and the background image HG is displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. As described above, on the screen, the "normal display" is executed at the timing of T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. Further, for the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 composed of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame. Each of the second light emitting regions HK2 including the lighting device 10 is in the first state in which the effect light emission is executed. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. During the output of the change notification sound described later, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing of T1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second movable member 74 of the first movable member 73 coincide with (synchronously) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off (see FIG. 140 (b)). At this time, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), the second light emitting area HK1 composed of the second light emitting area HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the winning port lamp NR is changed to the second state in which the second light emitting area HK2 including the winning opening lamp NR is turned off from the first state. Change. Further, the second light emitting region HK2 composed of the frame lighting device 10 is maintained in the first state even though the other second light emitting region HK2 changes in association with the first light emitting region HK1. Further, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which the operation can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode of stopping at the standby position. Furthermore, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the first image display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display for which drawing to the frame buffer was started prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In the first embodiment, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in accordance with (synchronously) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 are changed from the first state to the second state. 1 The change from the first aspect to the second aspect of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in the first embodiment, at the same time as the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. To.

As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when shifting from the normal display to the change display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be reduced together, and the frame is displayed from outside the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed by the frame image GG so as to surround the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to appear as if a part (or all) of the normal display is cut off. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 140 (c), an image change effect of displaying the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display so as to sway is executed. In Specific Example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, which were in the second state at the initial stage of the execution period of the image change effect, are switched to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect. It has been set (see FIG. 140 (d)). Further, in the first embodiment, the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of the execution of the image change effect, and then the output is stopped. Here, in the specific example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). However, the switching timing may be staggered. Then, in the first embodiment, in the subsequent image change effect, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 are produced and emitted in the first state.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the range in which the change display changes the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area. It is located on the outside of, so that the changing display and the reserved number and the special symbol TZ do not overlap. Further, it is displayed so that the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued, and the hold icon T1 and the hold number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball or the like.

The first movable member 73 in the second aspect is returned to the first aspect in accordance with the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4 (see FIG. 140 (e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the restored change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In the first embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is started in accordance with (synchronously) the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 140 (e), when shifting from the change display to the normal display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be enlarged together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. It is displayed so that it disappears out of. When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

At the start of the normal display at the timing of T5 (synchronously), the first movable member 73 in the second aspect stops at the standby position and returns to the first aspect (see FIG. 140 (f)). The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to normal display to the first image display device 70 is started. In the first embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is completed in accordance with (synchronously) the end frame update timing.

In the first embodiment, when the image change effect is performed, the light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2. It is configured in. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to the change display on the screen, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. Instead, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. Then, in the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the hold number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. .. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information displayed at the same position (third image) has the same content as the information changed by the image change effect (first image and second image).

In the first embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. Then, in the image change effect, the visibility changes depending on whether the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are changed and displayed and the normal display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved digit so that the visibility does not change regardless of whether the change is displayed or the change is displayed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the first embodiment, when the image change effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG change from the normal display to the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70. It is possible to display the frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be more attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. The frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these, and the effect symbol 70a, It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the first embodiment, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed at the start of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 1, the change to the second aspect of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed at the start of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 1, the change to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is executed at the end of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change from the change display to the normal display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 2 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect emission using the first light emission region HK1 and / or the second light emission region HK2 will be described. FIG. 141 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. It is a timing chart of the specific example 2 which shows the relationship of the image change effect of. Further, FIG. 142 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 2 is executed.

As for the timing of T0, the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variation display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 142 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the lower part of the screen, and the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first hold at the lower part of the screen. It is displayed as a hold icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, the special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is variablely displayed. Then, on the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the variable display effect symbol 70a, and the background image HG is displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. As described above, on the screen, the "normal display" is executed at the timing of T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. Further, for the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 composed of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame. Each of the second light emitting regions HK2 including the lighting device 10 is in the first state in which the effect light emission is executed. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. During the output of the change notification sound described later, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing of T1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second movable member 74 of the first movable member 73 coincide with (synchronously) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off (see FIG. 142 (b)). At this time, in accordance with the start of the transition to the change display (synchronically), the second light emitting area HK1 composed of the second light emitting area HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the winning port lamp NR is changed to the second state in which the second light emitting area HK2 including the winning opening lamp NR is turned off from the first state. Change. Further, the second light emitting region HK2 including the frame lighting device 10 also changes from the first state in which the effect is emitted to the second state in which the light is turned off. Further, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position to the second mode in which the operation can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is kept in the first mode of stopping at the standby position. Furthermore, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the first image display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display for which drawing to the frame buffer was started prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In the second embodiment, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in accordance with (synchronously) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the second light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 are changed from the first state to the second state. 1 The change from the first aspect to the second aspect of the movable member 73 is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started. As described above, in the second embodiment, at the same time as the start of the image change effect on the screen, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. To.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b), when shifting from the normal display to the change display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be reduced together, and the frame is displayed from outside the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed by the frame image GG so as to surround the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to appear as if a part (or all) of the normal display is cut off. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 142 (c), an image change effect of displaying the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display so as to sway is executed. In Specific Example 2, a part of the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and a part of the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40) that were in the second state at the initial stage of the execution period of the image change effect. Is set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 142 (d)). Further, in the second embodiment, the remaining portion of the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the remaining portion of the second light emitting region HK2 (winning port lamp NR, lighting device for frame) during the execution period of the image change effect. 10) is set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 142 (d)). In the second embodiment, the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the image change effect, and then the output is stopped. Here, in the second embodiment, the timing of switching the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 from the second state to the first state is matched (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing of T3). However, the switching timing may be staggered.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the range in which the change display changes the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area. It is located on the outside of, so that the changing display and the reserved number and the special symbol TZ do not overlap. Further, it is displayed so that the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued, and the hold icon T1 and the hold number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball or the like.

The first movable member 73 in the second aspect is returned to the first aspect after the change display at the timing of T4 starts to return to the normal display (see FIG. 142 (e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returned change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In the second embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is started after the return frame update timing of the change display is delayed.

As shown in FIG. 142 (e), when shifting from the change display to the normal display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be enlarged together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. It is displayed so that it disappears out of. When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

The first movable member 73 in the second aspect stops at the standby position and returns to the first aspect at a timing shifted after the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at the timing of T5 (FIG. 142 (f)). reference). The first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning port lamp NR) in the second state at a timing shifted after the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at the timing of T5. , The frame lighting device 10) returns to the first state, and the effect light emission is executed. The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to normal display to the first image display device 70 is started. In the second embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is completed at the same time as the end frame update timing, and the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 return to the first state.

In the second embodiment, when the image change effect is performed, the light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2. It is configured in. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to the image change effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. Instead, the change display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1 and the background image HG. Then, in the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the hold number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. .. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information displayed at the same position (third image) has the same content as the information changed by the image change effect (first image and second image).

In the second embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1 and the background image HG. Then, in the image change effect, the visibility changes between the case of the change display in which the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are changed and displayed, and the case of the normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility does not change in either the normal display or the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the second embodiment, when the image change effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG change from the normal display to the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70. It is possible to display the frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can attract the attention of the player more, and the interest of the game can be improved. The frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these, and the effect symbol 70a, It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the second embodiment, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed at the start of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the change to the second aspect of the first movable member 73 and the output of the change notification sound are executed at the start of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the change to the first aspect of the first movable member 73 is executed at the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed at the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change from the change display to the normal display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 3 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect emission using the first light emission region HK1 and / or the second light emission region HK2 will be described. FIG. 143 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. It is a timing chart of the specific example 3 which shows the relationship of the image change effect of. Further, FIG. 144 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the specific example 3 is executed.

As for the timing of T0, the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variation display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 144 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the lower part of the screen, and the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first hold at the lower part of the screen. It is displayed as a hold icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, the special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is variablely displayed. Then, on the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the variable display effect symbol 70a, and the background image HG is displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. As described above, on the screen, the "normal display" is executed at the timing of T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. Further, for the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 composed of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame. Each of the second light emitting regions HK2 including the lighting device 10 is in the first state in which the effect light emission is executed. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. During the output of the change notification sound described later, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

In the third embodiment, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame) at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect is started to be executed. 40, the winning opening lamp NR, the frame lighting device 10) changes from the first state to the second state in which the lights are turned off (see FIG. 144 (a)). Then, at the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the frame lighting device 10 are set in accordance with (synchronously) the start of the transition to the change display. 2 The light emitting region HK2 changes from the second state to the first state to execute the effect light emission (see FIG. 144 (b)). At this time, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in which the standby position is in the standby position to the second mode in which the operation can be produced. The first movable member 73 is kept in the first mode of stopping at the standby position. Further, at the start of the transition to the change display (synchronously), a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9. The first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting region HK1 of the winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state for the execution period of the image change effect.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the first image display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display for which drawing to the frame buffer was started prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In the third embodiment, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at the start frame update timing of the change display. At the same time (synchronously) with the start frame update timing of the change display, the change from the first aspect to the second aspect of the second movable member 74 is started, and the change notification sound is output from the voice output device 9. It will be started.

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), when shifting from the normal display to the change display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be reduced together, and the frame is displayed from the outside of the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed by the frame image GG so as to surround the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to appear as if a part (or all) of the normal display is cut off. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), an image change effect of displaying the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display so as to sway is executed. In Specific Example 3, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2, which were in the second state at the start of execution of the image change effect, are set to switch to the first state (FIG. 144 (d)). reference). Further, in the third embodiment, the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of the execution of the image change effect, and then the output is stopped.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the range in which the change display changes the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area. It is located on the outside of, so that the changing display and the reserved number and the special symbol TZ do not overlap. Further, it is displayed so that the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued, and the hold icon T1 and the hold number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball or the like.

The second movable member 74 in the second aspect is returned to the first aspect in accordance with the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at the timing of T4 (see FIG. 144 (e)). The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the restored change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In the third embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the second movable member 74 is started in accordance with (synchronously) the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 144 (e), when shifting from the change display to the normal display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be enlarged together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. It is displayed so that it disappears out of. When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

At the start of the normal display at the timing of T5 (synchronously), the second movable member 74 in the second aspect stops at the standby position and returns to the first aspect (see FIG. 144 (f)). The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to normal display to the first image display device 70 is started. In the third embodiment, the change from the second aspect to the first aspect of the second movable member 74 is completed in accordance with (synchronously) the end frame update timing.

In the specific example 3, when the image change effect is performed, the light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2. It is configured in. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to the change display, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. Instead, the player's attention can be drawn to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1 and the background image HG. Then, in the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the hold number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. .. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information displayed at the same position (third image) has the same content as the information changed by the image change effect (first image and second image).

In the third embodiment, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numbers can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1 and the background image HG. Then, in the image change effect, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved number so that the visibility does not change in either the normal display or the change display. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 3, when the image change effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG change from the normal display to the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70. It is possible to display the frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be more attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. The frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these, and the effect symbol 70a, It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the specific example 3, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed at the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 3, the change to the second aspect of the second movable member 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed at a time shift from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 3, the change to the first aspect of the second movable member 74 is executed at the end of the image change effect (synchronously). By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change from the change display to the normal display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 3, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed shortly before the start of the image change effect, and is synchronized with the start of the image change effect (synchronized). The change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the first state is executed. By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Shortly before the start of the image change effect, the movable members 73 and 74 are changed to the second aspect, and at the same time as (synchronously) with the start of the image change effect, or after the start of the image change effect. The movable members 73 and 74 may be returned to the first aspect.

(Specific example 4 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 4 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect emission using the first light emission region HK1 and / or the second light emission region HK2 will be described. FIG. 145 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the sound output of the sound output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. It is a timing chart of the specific example 4 which shows the relationship of the image change effect of. Further, FIG. 146 shows an effect example when the image change effect of the specific example 4 is executed.

As for the timing of T0, the variation effect accompanied by the variation display of the effect symbol 70a executed during the variation display of the special symbol is executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 146 (a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the lower part of the screen, and the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is the first hold at the lower part of the screen. It is displayed as a hold icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reserved number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the effect control unit 130m is displayed as the first reserved number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, the special symbol TZ that is variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is variablely displayed. Then, on the screen, the background image HG is displayed behind the variable display effect symbol 70a, and the background image HG is displayed so as to perform a predetermined operation such as scrolling. As described above, on the screen, the normal display is executed at the timing of T0.

At the timing of T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in the first state in which they are stopped at the standby position. Further, for the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 composed of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame. Each of the second light emitting regions HK2 including the lighting device 10 is in the first state in which the effect light emission is executed. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs sound (music, voice) by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), and the like. During the output of the change notification sound described later, the sound effect may be continuously executed or the sound effect may be interrupted.

Specific example 4 shows a first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and a second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device) at the timing of T1a before T1 when the image change effect is started to be executed. 10) changes from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off (see FIG. 146 (a)). At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning port lamp NR) remain in the first state. At the timing of T1a before the start of execution of the image change effect, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the first aspect to the second aspect. Then, at the timing of T1, when the image change effect is executed, a change notification sound such as "Pickin" is output from the voice output device 9 in accordance with (synchronously) the start of the transition to the change display. At the timing of T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting region HK2 of the winning opening lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. do. Further, at the timing of T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first aspect in which the second movable member 74 is in the standby position to the second aspect in which the operation can be produced.

The timing of T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the first image display of image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display for which drawing to the frame buffer was started prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In the specific example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at the start frame update timing of the change display. Further, the change from the first aspect to the second aspect of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started at a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. On the other hand, the output of the change notification sound from the voice output device 9 is started in synchronization with the start frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 146 (b), when shifting from the normal display to the change display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be reduced together, and the frame is displayed from outside the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed by the frame image GG so as to surround the outer periphery of the image, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to appear as if a part (or all) of the normal display is cut off. When shifting from the normal display to the change display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 146 (c), an image change effect of displaying the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG in the change display so as to sway is executed. Further, in the specific example 4, the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of the execution of the image change effect, and then the output is stopped.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the range in which the change display changes the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area. It is located on the outside of, so that the changing display and the reserved number and the special symbol TZ do not overlap. Further, it is displayed so that the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is continued, and the hold icon T1 and the hold number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball or the like.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second aspect are returned to the first aspect in accordance with (synchronously) or shifted from the change display at the timing of T4 to the start of the return to the normal display. The timing of T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the variation effect is started. At this frame update timing, the display of the image data (background image, various variation effect images, various symbol images, various icon images, etc.) related to the restored change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 146 (e), when shifting from the change display to the normal display, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 are changed so as to be enlarged together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. It is displayed so that it disappears out of. When shifting from the change display to the normal display, the first hold number displayed in the first hold number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are enlarged and changed together with the effect symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as it is.

In the specific example 4, at the timing of T5a before the end of the image change effect, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame lighting device 10). ) Changes from the second state to the first state, and the effect light emission is executed. At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning port lamp NR) remain in the second state. Further, before the timing of T5a before the start of execution of the image change effect, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the second aspect to the first aspect, and at the timing of T5a, the first movable member 73. Returns to the first aspect and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second aspect. Then, at the timing of T5, the change display returns to the normal display, and the image change effect ends.

At the timing of T5b after the end of the image change effect, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning port lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state. It changes and the effect light emission is executed. Further, the second movable member 74 starts changing from the second aspect to the first aspect at the timing before the execution of the image change effect is started, and the first movable member 74 is the first aspect at the timing of T5b. Go back to and stop. The return of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first aspect may be started after the image change effect is completed or at the end of the image change effect (synchronously).

In the specific example 4, when the image change effect is performed, the light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2. It is configured in. By doing so, the player's attention can be drawn to the change display, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, when the image change effect is performed, the player's attention is directed around the screen of the first image display device 70 by changing from the relatively bright first state to the second state darker than the first state. Instead, the player's attention can be drawn to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. Then, in the image change effect, the special symbol TZ and the hold number can be displayed at the same position regardless of whether the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. .. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information displayed at the same position (third image) has the same content as the information changed by the image change effect (first image and second image).

In the specific example 4, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the effect symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. Then, in the image change effect, the visibility of the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved digit so that the visibility does not change regardless of whether the change is displayed or the change is displayed. By doing so, even if the image change effect is executed, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the necessary information, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) that does not change the visibility is the same as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the specific example 4, when the image change effect is executed, the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG change from the normal display to the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70. It is possible to display the frame image GG to be displayed. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the change display, the change display can be more attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved. The frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the effect symbol 70a, the hold icon T1 and the background image HG, and may be set as a different image (another image layer) from these, and the effect symbol 70a, It may be expressed so as to change together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the specific example 4, the change of the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state is executed at the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the change to the second aspect of the movable members 73 and 74 and the output of the change notification sound are executed at a time shift from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started to be executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the change of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first aspect is completed at the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change from the change display to the normal display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the specific example 4, the first light emitting region HK1 and / or the second light emitting region HK2 is returned to the first state at the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is completed, the change from the change display to the normal display can be attracted to the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in the image change effect, the effect EF that decorates the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be a moving image or a fixed image, and may or may not be changed according to the change display. Further, the effect EF is displayed so as not to overlap with the change display even if it is superimposed on the front side of the change display (FIG. 147 (a)) or displayed behind the change display (FIG. 147 (b)). Either (Fig. 148) may be used.

In the image change effect, when the effect EF is displayed together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape or color corresponding to the degree of expectation for a big hit. For example, when the degree of expectation is low, the blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 148 (a)), and when the degree of expectation is high, the red effect EF is displayed. The expected degree display by the effect EF may be changed during the period of the image change effect.

In the image change effect, an effect linked with a light guide plate or other effect means may be performed. Further, the effect linked with the screen of the second image display device 71 may be performed in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70. For example, with the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 as the second state, the screen of the second image display device 71 is darkened in accordance with the effect of relatively darkening the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70. And so on.

In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as the effect symbol 70a or the hold icon is not included in the change display, and the effect symbol 70a or the hold icon is fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display, as in the normal display. It may be displayed (FIG. 149 (a)). In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as a hold icon may not be included in the change display, and the hold icon or the like may be erased or invisible during the execution period of the image change effect (for example). FIG. 149 (b)). In the image change effect, a predetermined image such as the effect symbol 70a or the hold icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display. ..

It is displayed on the screen of the system information IF1 such as characters for inducing right-handed strike included in the normal display (FIG. 150 (a)) and the game information IF2 such as characters indicating the number of time reductions after the jackpot game is completed. The information may be set as follows in the image display effect. For example, in the image change effect, the system information IF1 may not be included in the change display, and the system information IF1 may be fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display, and may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display (FIG. 150 (b)). .. Further, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 150 (b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the reduced game information IF2 in the change display may be enlarged and displayed on the change display.

In the image change effect, an effect EF that associates the movable members 73, 74, which is the second aspect of performing the effect operation, with the change display may be displayed (FIG. 151 (a)). Then, in the image change effect, for example, the position of the change display is changed by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74, and the operation effect and / or the effect EF of the movable members 73, 74 in the second aspect. It may be linked with the change of the change display (FIGS. 151 (b) and 151 (c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, the image change effect may be performed during the look-ahead continuous effect.

Execution start or end of the image change effect (start of reduction of the normally displayed image or return to the normal display of the changed and displayed image) may be associated with the operation of the operation means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16. .. For example, when the image change effect becomes executable, a button image may be displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is executed, the image change effect may be started to be executed. If the button image is used in common in a plurality of effect modes, the amount of data can be compressed. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, long press or repeated hitting) is satisfied by the operation of the operation means such as the button operation of the effect button device 16, the change display or the effect EF or the image displayed together with the change display is changed (for example). , The glass breaks). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, long press or repeated hitting) is satisfied by the operation of the operating means, the change display or the effect EF displayed together with the change display or the change of the image is gradually advanced (for example, the glass gradually changes. It may be broken into pieces).

The image change effect may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect symbol 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the background image HG does not include the effect symbol 70a are set. May be.

The change display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in synchronization. For example, by forming an image larger than the displayable area of the screen, the frame image GG cannot be seen in the normal display (FIG. 152 (a)), and the change display is smaller than the displayable area of the screen. By changing the frame image GG, the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen (FIG. 152 (b)). The change display can be rotated or swung (FIG. 152 (c)), for example deformed to be stretched laterally (FIG. 152 (d)), for example tilted and stretched (FIG. 152 (e)), or reduced. -It can be executed in various modes such as enlargement. Then, when the image change effect is finished, the change display may be changed so as to be larger than the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 153 (a) and 153 (b)). Further, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, for example, a whiteout for displaying a white image for a moment may be inserted (FIG. 153 (c)). After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“285”) (FIG. 153 (d)). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation). Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (FIG. 153 (e)).

As for the image change effect, the display effect of the change display is executed according to the frame update timing. At this time, other effects (sound effect, light emission, operation of the accessory) other than the change display can be executed according to the change of the change display. Alternatively, other effects may be executed at a timing different from the change in the change display. Then, when the change display returns from the changed state to the normal display that does not change, the end timing of other effects (sound effect, light emission, operation of the character) other than the change display executed according to the change display is set. It can be earlier, later, or the same as the change end timing of the change display.

At the start of the image change effect (when the change display is reduced), multiple effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) start at the same frame update timing, and at the end of the image change effect (change display). (When is enlarged), a plurality of effects (sound, image, lighting device, movable accessory operation) may not be started at the same frame update timing.

In the image change effect, a change display is started in which a predetermined image (for example, the effect symbol 70a, the background image HG, etc.) that was in the normal position in the normal display is reduced toward the back side of the screen and changes to the change position. The predetermined image that was in the changed position in the display is enlarged from the back side to the front side of the screen and returned to the normal position to return to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, the start period in which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the change position may be longer than the return period in which the predetermined image changes from the change position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display is reduced at the start of the image change effect (start period) may be larger than the number of frames when the change display is expanded at the end of the image change effect (return period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to draw attention to the image change effect and improve the interest of the game. In addition, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be quickly shifted to the interest in the next variable effect. Here, the movements of the movable members 73, 74, which are executed in accordance with the reduction / enlargement change of the predetermined image in the image change effect, and the changes of the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 are also executed in conjunction with the start period. , It is better to make the time longer than the one executed in conjunction with the return period.

Although a specific example of operating the movable members 73,74 in the image change effect has been described above, it is not always necessary to operate the movable members 73,74, and the movable accessory 73,74 is stopped during the execution period of the image change effect. You may.

(When the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
Next, a case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130m does not meet the predetermined conditions will be described. When the effect control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, for example, the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is not received, the command is not received due to a half disconnection or a connector disconnection. Communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or semi-disconnection are considered. In the following description, the time when the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the command is represented by "○" in the figure, and the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command occurs. , It is represented by "x" in the figure. Then, in a predetermined period from the first occurrence of a predetermined state in which the command cannot be received normally to the time before the command can be normally received, one or more commands of the same type and / or different types may not be received normally. .. Further, the command is described as "cd" in the figure.

The effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state decorates a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image ZE and an identification part consisting of a hexagonal base image and a number part (identification character). Further, it is assumed that the effect symbol 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the specific game state is composed only of the identification unit including the number unit (identification character).

In the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the effect modes A to C are scrolled left and right (reciprocating motion). Further, in the specific gaming state, it is assumed that the background image corresponding to each of the effect modes D to E is scrolled left and right (reciprocating operation).

It should be noted that predetermined detection sensors (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a).
, Radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) When the connector is disconnected, abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to a connector disconnection of the command line for communicating between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130, the abnormality notification is not performed.

In the following specific example, the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state will be described, but even if the gaming state is the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state), it is basic. The flow is the same as in the normal game state.

Specifically, the first hold number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol hold display 63, the sub first variable display 81, and the sub first. 1 Hold indicator 83, 1st hold number display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp symbol, 1st start port 45, 2nd hold number, 2nd special symbol storage designation command, 1st 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol hold display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd hold display 84, 2nd hold number display area 70F, 2nd hold icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp design, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 155 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive a command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 154 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and FIG. 155 is an effect example corresponding to the timing chart of FIG. 154.

At the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60, and the game state designation command, the effect symbol designation command, and the variation pattern designation as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol (see FIG. 155 (a)).

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern specification command. If reception is not possible, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation. The period of variation display of the first lamp symbol on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first variation indicator 81. In, the first lamp symbol stops in a lost manner (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. If reception is not possible, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ variation display is stopped, and the effect is displayed. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P13, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. If reception is not possible, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ variation display is finally stopped, and so on. Further, the period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

Specific example 1 relates to the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a, and the effect pattern designation regarding the effect symbol in the effect control unit 130 m. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the effect symbol 70a starts to change, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the effect stop of the effect symbol 70a change is not satisfied (missing). The effect symbol 70a, which is determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command), swings and fluctuates. On the other hand, although the effect control unit 130 m satisfies the first condition (game state specification command) regarding the designation of the game state (normal reception), the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and effect regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a. If at least one of the third condition (variable pattern specification command) related to the specification of the symbol effect pattern is not satisfied (missing), (regardless of the satisfaction (normal reception) / missing abnormality of the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command)). , The fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 2 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 156 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and a specific example 2 will be described with reference to an effect example of FIG. 155.

When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P1, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command and the variation pattern specification command. Upon reception, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is continued. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but the effect symbol 70a may be started in a variable display after being temporarily stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a starts. At the same time, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is continued. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but the effect symbol 70a may be started in a variable display after being temporarily stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten.

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first variation indicator 81 is used. The first lamp symbol stops in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P13 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the second specific example, in the effect control unit 130 m, the first condition relating to the game state (game state designation command), the second condition relating to the effect symbol 70a (effect symbol designation command), and the effect pattern (variation pattern) relating to the effect symbol 70a. When the three conditions (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state for starting the variation effect is set, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the effect symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition is used. The determined effect symbol 70a is in the second state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed. On the other hand, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the effect control unit 130 m, but the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first condition is satisfied. When the same fluctuation effect as in the 1st state is started and the 4th condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the same swing fluctuation as in the 2nd state can be executed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the specific example 2, when the effect control unit 130 m satisfies the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the effect symbol 70a, regardless of whether the conditions related to the game state (game state specification command) are satisfied or insufficient. , When the condition for starting the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a and stopping the variation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the predetermined condition effect symbol designation command) causes the fluctuation variation. It is feasible. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 3 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 157 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 157 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and a specific example 3 will be described with reference to an effect example of FIG. 155.

When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P1, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is not started. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation. The period of variation display of the first lamp symbol on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first variation indicator 81. In, the first lamp symbol stops in a lost manner (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command and the effect symbol specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ variation display is stopped, and the effect is displayed. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P13, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the effect is stopped. Further, the period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the third specific example, in the effect control unit 130 m, the first condition regarding the game state (game state designation command), the second condition regarding the effect symbol 70a (effect symbol designation command), and the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the effect symbol 70a. When the three conditions (variable pattern designation command) are satisfied, the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of the variation of the effect symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (effect symbol) is insufficient. It is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the effect symbol 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130 m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient. , It is possible to control so as not to start the variable effect of the effect symbol 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 4 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 158 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 158 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and a specific example 4 will be described with reference to an effect example of FIG. 155.

When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P1, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern specification command. When not received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and special. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. If reception is not possible, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 155 (c)). reference).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation. The period of variation display of the first lamp symbol on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the book of the effect symbol 70a. The period of the stop, the main stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. If reception is not possible, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 155 (c)). reference).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation. The period of variation display of the first lamp symbol on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the book of the effect symbol 70a. The period of the stop, the main stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P13, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command and the variation pattern specification command. Upon reception, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of one lamp symbol. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (e)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but the effect symbol 70a may be started in a variable display after being temporarily stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten.

After P17, it is as described above.

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 4, the effect control unit 130 m satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, but the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol 70a and the effect pattern (variation) of the effect symbol 70a. When at least one of the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the pattern) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130 m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient while the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the effect is produced. When the fluctuation of the symbol is started and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 5 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 159 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive a command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 159 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and a specific example 5 will be described with reference to an effect example of FIG. 155.

When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P1, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern specification command. When not received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and special. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P7 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. When not received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P10 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. When not received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and special. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P13 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub 1st fluctuation display 81 is not started, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub 1st fluctuation display 81. The period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and special. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state specification command and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. Upon reception, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P17, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P18, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P19, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. Upon reception, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the effect symbol 70a is stopped, the special symbol TZ is stopped, and the variation display is stopped. , The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

At the timing of P20, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation indicator 81 are the first. 1 The stop period of the lamp symbol is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P21, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and special. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (c)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P22, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 5, when the predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect symbol 70a is insufficient in the effect control unit 130 m, the condition regarding the game state (game state specification command) and the variation stop of the effect symbol 70a. Regardless of whether the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied or insufficient, it is possible to control not to start the variable effect. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 6 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 160 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, and a specific example 6 will be described with reference to an effect example of FIG. 155.

When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P1, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started (see FIG. 155 (a)). At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“285”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (b)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 155 (c)), and the sub first. In the variation display 81, the first lamp symbol is stopped in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command and the variation pattern specification command. Upon reception, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of one lamp symbol. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (e)).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a loss mode (“164”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. If the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the process for ending the variable effect is not performed. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is not started. At this time, while the background image is scrolled, the hold icon H1 and the icon TH are continuously rotated, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is variablely displayed, and the sub first variable indicator 81 is used. The period of the fluctuation display of the first lamp symbol of No. 1 is extended, and the output of the BGM during the fluctuation is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 155 (f)). The temporarily stopped effect symbol 70a slightly swings (swings and displays) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image constituting the effect symbol 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (directing motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the variation display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation. The period of variation display of the first lamp symbol on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (f)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the effect symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (see FIG. 155 (g)), and the sub first variation indicator 81. In, the first lamp symbol stops in a lost manner (for example, extinguished).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, while the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the variation pattern specification command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The period of main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. If the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not been started, so the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped and the special symbol is displayed. The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P13, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, while the effect control unit 130m normally receives the effect symbol specification command. When receiving, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 do not start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. At this time, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped at the stop position, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub first variation display 81 (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues at (see FIG. 155 (g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the effect symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped, the special symbol TZ variation display is finally stopped, and so on. Further, the period of the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variation indicator 81 is extended (see FIG. 155 (g)).

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The fluctuation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is started. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (h)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 155 (i)).

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 6, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the effect control unit 130 m, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol 70a and the effect pattern (variation) of the effect symbol 70a are obtained. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the pattern) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of the variation of the effect symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (effect symbol) is satisfied. It is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the effect symbol 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130 m, when the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient. , It is possible to control so as not to start the variable effect. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 161 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive a command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 161 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m.

At the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command (game state A), the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a , The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started. The effect control unit 130m determines the internal state to the game state A based on the game state designation command for designating the game state A. In addition, the effect control unit 130m stores the reception history of the game state designation command.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command (game state A), the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a , The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started. In this case, in the effect control unit 130m, the game state specification command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P4 has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state specification command (game state A) (timing of P1). Since it is a command, the internal state remains the game state A. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

At the timing of P5, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P7, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command (game state B), the effect symbol specification command, and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol 70a , The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation indicator 81 is started. In this case, in the effect control unit 130m, the game state specification command for designating the game state A received at the timing of P7 has the same content as the reception history of the previous game state specification command (game state A) (timing of P4). Since it is not a command, the internal state is switched to the game state B. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P10, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the game state specification command (game state A) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol specification command and the variation pattern specification command are produced and controlled. When the unit 130m normally receives, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. In this case, the effect control unit 130m has the same game state specification command as the previous (P7 timing) game state specification command (game state B) reception history for specifying the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10. Although it is not a command of the content, it remains in the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A. It should be noted that the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155 (d)). reference). After that, when a predetermined time elapses, the effect symbol 70a is in a state of scrolling at high speed while the background image is continuously scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

At the timing of P11, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the scrolling of the background image, the holding icon T1 and the rotation operation (effect operation) of the icon TH continue.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P12, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process for ending the variation effect is performed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P13, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state specification command (game state A) and the effect symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect control unit controls the variation pattern. When the unit 130m normally receives, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol are displayed. The stopped state continues. In this case, the effect control unit 130m has the same game state specification command (game state B) as the previous (P7 timing) reception history game state specification command for designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10. Although it is not a command of the content, it remains in the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P15 after passing through P14, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. Even if the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so that the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The 1-lamp symbol on the sub 1st variation indicator 81 remains in the stopped state and does not change.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P16, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the game state specification command (game state A) and the variation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect symbol specification command is produced and controlled. When the unit 130m normally receives, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol are displayed. The stopped state continues. In this case, the effect control unit 130m has the same game state specification command (game state B) as the previous (P7 timing) reception history game state specification command for designating the game state A that could not be received at the timing of P10. Although it is not a command of the content, it remains in the game state B without switching the internal state to the game state A.

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P18 after passing through P17, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a lost manner. Even if the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110 m at this timing, the variable effect has not started, so that the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the effect symbol TZ The 1-lamp symbol on the sub 1st variation indicator 81 remains in the stopped state and does not change.

Temporarily, at the timing when the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60, the game state designation command (game state A) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m is output to the effect control unit. When the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive at least one of the effect symbol designation command and the variation pattern designation command while the effect symbol 70m is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 are used. 1 The fluctuation display of the lamp symbol does not start. In this case, if the game state of the game state specification command received at this timing is the same as the game state specification command of the previous reception history, the effect control unit 130m does not switch the internal state of the previous game. It remains in the state. On the other hand, if the game state of the game state specification command received at this timing is not the same as the game state specification command of the previous reception history, the effect control unit 130m uses the game state specification command of this time. Switch the internal state to the game state determined based on.

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 7, when the effect control unit 130m satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state (normal reception), the game is determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). If the state is the same as the first condition (game state designation command) specified last time, the game state grasped by the effect control unit 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the game state determined based on the first condition (game state specification command) is different from the previously specified first condition game state specification command), the game state grasped by the sub is used. The game state is changed to the game state determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). Further, if the effect control unit 130 m does not satisfy (miss) the first condition (game state specification command) regarding the designation of the game state, another condition (second condition (special symbol specification command) regarding the specification of the effect symbol) and the effect Regardless of the third condition (command for specifying the effect pattern) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the symbol, the game state is not changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. 162 in the case where the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 162 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m.

As shown in FIG. 162 (a), at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (winning symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (hit effect) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , The effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of one lamp symbol. In this case, if the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is a hit, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a hit, the variation effect is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (hit symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (loss effect) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is not started, and the 1st lamp symbol of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is stopped. It is kept in a state. In this way, when the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is a hit, while the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a loss, the variation effect is achieved. Does not start.

As shown in FIG. 162 (b), at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m normally receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (loss symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (loss effect) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. , The effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of one lamp symbol. In this case, if the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is lost and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is lost, the variation effect is started.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the effect control unit 130 m receives the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (lost symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (hit effect) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m. The variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is not started, and the 1st lamp symbol of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub 1st variation indicator 81 is stopped. It is kept in a state. In this way, when the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is lost, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is a hit, the variation effect is achieved. Does not start.

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 8, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) relating to the designation of the effect symbol 70a in the effect control unit 130 m is a hit, and the effect pattern 70a of the effect symbol 70a (the effect pattern 70a). When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the designation of the variation pattern) is a hit, the effect symbol 70a can be started to vary. Similarly, in the effect control unit 130 m, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a is lost, and the effect pattern 70a is designated. When the fluctuation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is a loss, the effect symbol 70a can be started to change. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130 m, (the first condition regarding the designation of the game state (game state specification command), the second condition regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a (effect symbol designation command), and the effect pattern of the effect symbol 70a. Even when the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the designation is satisfied (received), the effect symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a and the effect If the hit / miss is different from the fluctuation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the designation of the effect pattern of the symbol 70a, the variation of the effect symbol 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Specific example 9 when the conditions are not met in the production control unit)
A specific example 9 will be described with reference to FIG. 163 when the effect control unit 130 m cannot normally receive the command and the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the predetermined conditions. FIG. 163 is a timing chart when predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m.

As shown in FIG. 163 (a), at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (for the first special symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (for the first special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 m are sent to the effect control unit 130 m. Is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. In this case, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is for the first special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If so, start variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (for the first special symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (for the second special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 m are sent to the effect control unit 130 m. Is received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 are not started. 1 The lamp symbol is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is for the first special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If it is, the variable effect is not started.

As shown in FIG. 163 (b), at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (for the second special symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (for the second special symbol) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m are sent to the effect control unit 130 m. Is normally received, the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 start the variation display of the one lamp symbol. In this case, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is for the second special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If so, start variable production.

At the timing of P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost manner. At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation).

When the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P3, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation cd in the figure) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation effect is terminated. Processing is done. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol is lost in the sub-first variation display 81. For example, it is turned off) to stop the main operation.

When the stop time of the special symbol elapses at the P4 timing, the variation display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command (for the second special symbol), and the variation pattern specification command (for the first special symbol) as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110 m are sent to the effect control unit 130 m. Is received, the variation display of the 1-lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is not started, and the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation indicator 81 are not started. 1 The lamp symbol is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the effect symbol 70a determined based on the effect symbol designation command is for the second special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If it is, the variable effect is not started.

Although the effect control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command transmitted from the main control unit 110 m, the effect command transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m based on the reception of this command is displayed / voice control unit 140 and the lamp /. Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive, the same processing as when the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In the specific example 9, in the effect control unit 130 m, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) relating to the designation of the effect symbol 70a is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special symbol). In addition, when the third condition (variable pattern designation command) for designating the effect pattern of the effect symbol is selected under the predetermined winning conditions (for the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the effect symbol 70a Can start to fluctuate. On the other hand, in the effect control unit 130 m, (the first condition regarding the designation of the game state (game state specification command), the second condition regarding the designation of the effect symbol 70a (effect symbol designation command), and the effect pattern of the effect symbol 70a. Even when the third condition (variable pattern designation command) related to the designation is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition (directed symbol designation command) related to the designation of the effect symbol 70a is the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol). Or, while it is selected in the second special symbol), the third condition (variable pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the effect pattern of the effect symbol 70a is a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special). If it is selected under different winning conditions (for the second special symbol or for the first special symbol) (for the symbol), the change of the effect symbol is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a defect has occurred in the effect control unit 130 m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

As a condition for executing a predetermined control in the effect control unit 130m, the command transmitted from the main control unit 110m is exemplified as described above, but the command is not limited to this, and other factors such as the passage of time and the operation of operation buttons are not limited to this. The event may be a condition.

As shown in FIG. 164, even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 9), a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is transmitted from the main control unit 110m. Etc.), the above-mentioned initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, the effect button 17, and the like can be executed. Specifically, even if the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, the main control unit 110 m is displayed on the screen during the period in which the effect symbol 70a is fluctuating. When the effect control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the above, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during the period when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the first movable member 73 and the like can be moved while the effect symbol 70a that is shaking and fluctuating is displayed on the screen. Perform the initial operation of the accessory. Further, when the effect control unit 130m normally receives a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m during the period when the effect control unit 130m does not meet the conditions and the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped, the effect symbol 70a is stopped. Is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. As described above, in the embodiment, regardless of the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) with the effect control unit 130 m, the effect symbol 70a is displayed if the initial operation condition based on the predetermined signal from the main control unit 110 m is satisfied. Regardless of the embodiment, the initial operation is performed. In the specific example 10, the relationship between the condition that the effect control unit 130 m is aligned (not aligned) and the effect symbol 70a is the same as that of the specific example 1, so the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, a detection means for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave, etc.) even when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m (specific examples 1 to 10 described above). (Starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) and the main control means 110 are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the game machine 1. (Disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. This abnormality notification can be executed over a predetermined period. Specifically, even if the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130 m, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed when the disconnection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs during the period when the effect symbol 70a is fluctuating. .. Further, during the period in which the effect control unit 130m does not meet the conditions and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, if the non-connection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) is reached, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Further, during the period in which the effect control unit 130 m does not meet the conditions and the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped, if the non-connection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) is reached, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. As described above, in the embodiment, regardless of the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) with the effect control unit 130 m, if the abnormality notification condition that causes the non-connection state is satisfied, the effect symbol 70a is displayed regardless of the display mode. , Abnormality notification is executed. At this time, the image display devices 70 and 71 may perform abnormality notification in an area where the image display devices 70 and 71 overlap with the effect symbol 70a which is temporarily stopped or in the main stop state, or overlap with the effect symbol 70a, and an image such as the effect symbol 70a may be notified. It is possible to execute the abnormality notification using the image display devices 70 and 71 in various modes such as turning off the display and performing the abnormality notification. In the eleventh embodiment, the relationship between the conditions aligned (not aligned) with the effect control unit 130 m and the effect symbol 70a is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

When the conditions are not met by the effect control unit 130 m, other events, operations, effects, operations, notifications, and the like described in the present embodiment may be combined and executed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment I>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, the special game is executed. As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that deforms the display area of the image display device and also deforms the image being displayed in the display area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the above-mentioned gaming machine in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is changed into the first aspect (stop at the standby position) and the second aspect (directing operation). A movable accessory (movable member 73,74) that is possible, and a light emitting state in the first state (effect light emitting state) and the second state (for example, extinguished) that are provided on the movable accessory (73,74) and emit light. A first light emitting region (HK1) capable of changing the image, and a first state (directed light emitting state) and a first state in which light is emitted at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73,74). The second light emitting region is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) capable of changing the light emitting state into two states (for example, extinguished) and display means (70,71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect. In the variation effect, the first image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and the first image have a plurality of (HK2). When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) that changes and is displayed on the screen and changes to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) is performed. , The light emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguished) by linking at least one of the first light emitting region (HK1) and the second light emitting region (HK2) is feasible, and the display means. A third image (for example, a special symbol TZ) can be displayed on the screen of (image display devices 70, 71) together with the first image, and the first image and the second image can be displayed as the first image. Three images (for example, special symbol TZ) can be displayed at the same position.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member) that can be changed into the first aspect (stop at the standby position) and the second aspect (effect operation). 73,74) and the first light emitting region provided in the movable accessory (73,74) and capable of changing the light emitting state between the first state (effect light emitting state) and the second state (for example, extinguished) of light emission. (HK1) and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguishing) which are provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable member 73,74) and emit light. The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) capable of changing the light emitting state and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect. In the variable effect, the first image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and the first image are changed to the screen. When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) that can be changed to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) is performed, the first image is displayed. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguishing) by linking the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2), and the display means (image display device). A third image (for example, special symbol TZ) can be displayed together with the first image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) on the screen of 70,71), and the first image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) can be displayed. Etc.) is changed to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) to change the visibility, while the third image is either the first image or the second image. (For example, a special symbol TZ) can be displayed so as not to change the visibility.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (movable member) that can be changed into the first aspect (stop at the standby position) and the second aspect (effect operation). 73,74) and the first light emitting region provided in the movable accessory (73,74) and capable of changing the light emitting state between the first state (effect light emitting state) and the second state (for example, extinguished) of light emission. (HK1) and a first state (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, extinguishing) which are provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable member 73,74) and emit light. The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) capable of changing the light emitting state and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect. In the variable effect, the first image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and the first image are changed to the screen. When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) that can be changed to the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a of the change display) is performed, the first image is displayed. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that changes to the second state (for example, extinguishing) by linking the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2), and the display means (image display device). On the screen of 70,71), a third image (for example, for example, the effect symbol 70a for normal display) changes in association with the change from the second image (for example, the effect symbol 70a for change display). It is characterized in that the frame image GG) can be displayed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment II>
In the conventional gaming machine, when the starting condition is satisfied, the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game advantageous to the player is acquired, and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is satisfied, the stored determination information is determined, and the variation effect according to the result of the determination is executed, and when the variation effect becomes a special result, the special game is executed. Some such gaming machines include a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the production of the game based on a signal (command) from the main control board (for example). Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-033816). However, the above-mentioned gaming machine does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the effect control means deviate from each other, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. Has been done.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). In the effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the third condition regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a). When the (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) relating to the variation stop of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (effect symbol designation) is insufficient. The effect symbol (70a) determined based on the command) can execute the shaking fluctuation, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command). When at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). In the effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the third condition regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a). When the (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the first state for starting the variation effect is set, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition is satisfied. The effect symbol (70a) determined based on the effect symbol (70a) is in the second state in which the shaking variation can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has the first condition (game state designation). Although the command) is insufficient, when the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the fluctuation effect is started in the same manner as the first state, and the fourth condition is described. When the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is characterized in that it becomes a state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). When the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied in the effect control board 130), regardless of whether the conditions related to the game state (game state specification command) are satisfied or insufficient. When the fluctuation effect is started and the condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the determination is made based on the predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command). It is characterized in that the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). In the effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the third condition regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a). When the (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the variation stop of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the determination is made based on the second condition. It is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) and the second condition (effect symbol). When at least one of the designated command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). Although the effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a) and the third condition regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol are satisfied. When at least one of the conditions (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started, and the first condition (game state designation command) in the effect control means (effect control board 130). When the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the effect symbol (70a) starts to change, and the effect symbol (70a) is started to change. When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). And.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). When the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a) are insufficient in the effect control board 130), the conditions regarding the game state (game state designation command) and the effect symbol (70a) It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the fluctuation effect regardless of whether the condition for stopping the fluctuation (special symbol determination command) is satisfied or insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). In the game machine (1) provided with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command or the like) of the above, the movable effect means (first movable member 73) that can be operated in a predetermined mode. , Second movable member 74, effect button 17), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) initially operates the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17). (Initial operation, initial light emission) and the effect operation (effect operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, effect button 17) can be executed, and the signal can be used. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuation effect, jackpot effect) capable of executing the corresponding effect. Is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, and the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (the effect control means). Although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the effect control board 130), the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a) and the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a). When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the above is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) relating to the stoppage of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute the shaking fluctuation with the effect symbol determined based on (the effect symbol designation command), and the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the effect control means (effect control board 130). When at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol. When the second condition (effect symbol designation command) relating to (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the variation effect is started and the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). Although the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command), at least the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied. When one of them is insufficient, it is possible to control so as not to start the variation effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.) of the game in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol. When the second condition (effect symbol designation command) relating to (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the first state for starting the variation effect is set. When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation variation is executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). The second condition is possible, and although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (the effect symbol designation command) When the fluctuation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the fluctuation effect is started as in the first state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. It is characterized by being in a state of being.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, variation) regarding the effect symbol (70a). When the pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variable effect is started and the condition for stopping the variation of the effect symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state specification command) is satisfied or insufficient. ) Is insufficient, it is characterized in that the shaking variation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol. When the second condition (effect symbol designation command) relating to (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the variation effect is started and the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) relating to the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect). When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient in the control board 130), the said The feature is that it can be controlled so as not to start the variable effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state. , When at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol is insufficient, the variation effect is not started. It is controllable, and while the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern) are insufficient. When the designated command) is satisfied, the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) relating to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (effect) is satisfied. It is characterized in that the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the symbol designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, variation) regarding the effect symbol (70a). When the pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variation effect is started regardless of whether the condition regarding the game state (game state specification command) and the condition regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to be.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, from the main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (main control board 110). It is possible to output the sound of the game (BGM, SE, etc.) in the game machine (1) equipped with the effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling the effect according to the signal (command, etc.) of. A sound output means (voice output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) has a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the voice output means (voice output device 9). , Power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) can be output, and the display means. (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state. When the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the variation effect is started and the above-mentioned When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation variation can be executed by the effect symbol determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). In the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, and at least of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command). When one of them is insufficient, it is possible to control so as not to start the variation effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). In, it is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state and the second condition regarding the effect symbol (70a). When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the variation effect is started and the fourth condition relating to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. When the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command), and the effect control means (effect control) can be executed. When the first condition (game state designation command) is satisfied in the board 130), but at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the above-mentioned It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the variable effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the control is performed. The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). In, it is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state and the second condition regarding the effect symbol (70a). When the (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the first state for starting the variation effect is set, and the effect symbol (70a) is changed. When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) related to the stop is insufficient, the second state in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) is established. Although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied. In that case, the fluctuation effect is started as in the first state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. And.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the effect symbol (70a). In this case, regardless of whether the condition related to the gaming state (game state designation command) is satisfied or insufficient, the variable effect is started, and when the condition related to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the above-mentioned It is characterized in that the shaking variation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on a predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). In, the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state and the second condition regarding the effect symbol (70a). When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the variation effect is started and the fourth condition relating to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. When the condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute the fluctuation. When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the variation effect is not started. It is characterized by being controllable.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). In, the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed, and although the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) If at least one of the second condition (command for designating the effect symbol) and the third condition (command for specifying the variation pattern) related to the effect pattern of the effect symbol is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started, and the effect is described. When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient in the control means (effect control board 130), while the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied. , When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) and the fluctuation stop of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command). It is characterized in that the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the determined effect symbol (70a).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows the execution of predetermined control based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when the power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to execute the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) lacks predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the effect symbol (70a). In this case, it is possible to control not to start the variable effect regardless of whether the condition related to the game state (game state designation command) and the condition related to the stop of the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized by that.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board). ) Allows execution of predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the game machine is started, the said The main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are not connected (connector disconnection, disconnection). Etc.), a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is a display means (image display devices 70, 71). In, the variable effect of the effect symbol (70a) can be executed, and although the effect control means (effect control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the effect symbol (70a) When the second condition (command for designating the effect symbol) and the third condition (command for specifying the variation pattern) regarding the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) are satisfied, the variation effect is started and the effect symbol (70a) is changed. When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) related to the stop is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command), and the effect control means (effect). When the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient in the control board 130), the above. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the variable effect.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signals from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). The effect can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the above. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the variation effect is started and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) relating to the stoppage of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. If there is a shortage, the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) can execute the shaking fluctuation, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute the first. When the condition (game state designation command) is satisfied, but at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so that the variation effect is not started. It is characterized by being possible.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined controls (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signals from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and power is supplied to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). The effect can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the above. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) related to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the first state for starting the variation effect is set, and the fourth condition (special symbol) for stopping the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is set. When the confirmation command) is insufficient, the second state is reached in which the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command), and the effect control means (effect control board) is reached. In 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient, when the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state and the above are satisfied. Similarly, when the fluctuation effect is started and the fourth condition (special symbol determination command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed as in the second state.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and power is supplied to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). When the effect can be executed and the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), the condition regarding the game state (game). If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) for starting the variation effect and stopping the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient regardless of the satisfaction or deficiency of the state designation command), the predetermined condition (effect symbol designation command, It is characterized in that the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command).

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). The effect can be executed, and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation command) regarding the effect symbol (70a), and the above. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the variation effect is started, and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) relating to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is set. If it is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute the first condition (game state designation command). ) Is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started. do.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). Although the effect can be executed and the effect control means (effect control board 130) satisfies the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation) regarding the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. When at least one of the command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol is insufficient, it is possible to control so that the variation effect is not started, and the effect control means (effect control board 130). In the case where the first condition (game state designation command) is insufficient while the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the effect symbol (70a) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the start of fluctuation and the stop of fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient, the effect symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command) is insufficient. ) Is characterized by being able to carry out shaking fluctuations.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with a detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and power is supplied to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are disconnected (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is determined. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). When the effect can be executed and the predetermined conditions (effect symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) related to the effect symbol (70a) are insufficient in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the conditions related to the game state (game). It is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the fluctuation effect regardless of whether the condition (special symbol determination command) for stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied or insufficient.

◆ In order to solve the above problems, according to the game machine (1) of the present embodiment, the main control means (main control board) capable of controlling the progress of the game in the game machine (1) capable of executing the game. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), and a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio wave). Etc.), and the main control means (main control board 110) and / or the effect control means (effect control board 130) are provided with detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.). It is possible to execute predetermined control (big hit determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a non-connected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.), a predetermined state is specified. Abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) changes the effect symbol (70a) in the display means (image display devices 70, 71). Although the effect can be executed and the effect control means (effect control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (effect symbol designation) regarding the effect symbol (70a) is insufficient. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) relating to the effect pattern of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied, the variation effect is started and the fourth condition (special symbol) relating to the stop of the variation of the effect symbol (70a) is satisfied. When the confirmation command) is insufficient, the shaking fluctuation can be executed by the effect symbol determined based on the second condition (effect symbol designation command), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can execute the shaking fluctuation. If one condition (game state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so that the variation effect is not started. It is characterized by being possible.

(About the time-saving game state)
The above-mentioned "low-probability short-time game state" is in addition to or in place of the "low-probability short-time game state after big hit" executed after the end of the big hit game. A "low-probability time-saving game state with a specified number of fluctuations" may be set as a trigger for execution. The "low-probability time-shortening game state triggered by the specified number of fluctuations" is executed in the low-probability game state including the low-probability time-shortening game state, for example, after 1000 symbol fluctuations have been performed, and whether or not it is a big hit. In addition to the effect, it is possible to combine and execute a time-saving rush effect such as counting down the number of fluctuations until the time-saving occurs.

In addition, the "low-probability short-time gaming state" is added to or in place of the "low-probability short-time gaming state after a big hit" and / or the "low-probability short-time gaming state based on a specific symbol combination" in advance in the low-probability gaming state. A "low-probability time-saving game state based on a specific symbol combination" may be set when a specified combination of special symbols is displayed. The "low probability short game state based on a specific symbol combination" is executed after displaying a specific symbol such as "1 ・ 2 ・ 3" or "7 ・ 8 ・ 7" in a low probability state, such as whether it is a big hit or not. In addition to the effect of, it is possible to execute by combining the reach of whether or not the time reduction occurs and other time reduction rush effects.

(Winning of a game ball to the starting port)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on condition that when the gaming ball is launched so as to pass through the left region of the gaming area 5a, the gaming ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the normal gate 44. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 47, which is opened depending on the result of winning the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is performed on the condition that the gaming ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the normal drawing gate 44 when the gaming ball is launched so as to pass through the right region of the gaming area 5a. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting port 47, which is opened depending on the result of winning the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol.

When the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is launched into the right side region of the gaming area 5a, it is easier to pass through the normal gate 44 than when it is launched into the left side region of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the normal gate 44, the second starting port 47 is opened in a “non-time saving gaming state”, which makes it easier to control than the “non-time saving gaming state” (specific gaming state). In the case where the player aims to launch the game ball into the right side area of the game area 5a and win the prize in the second starting port 47, the player can use the game ball rather than launching the game ball into the left side area of the game area 5a. It is possible to advance the game advantageously without consuming.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and the gaming ball is always won a prize directly under the stage portion 42 in which the gaming ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. A first starting port 45 capable of (entering a ball) is provided. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving game state" (normal game state) in which the second starting port 47 is difficult to control from the "time-saving game state" when the game ball passes through the normal game gate 44, the left side area of the game area 5a. Aiming to launch a game ball into the first starting port 45 to win a prize is more advantageous for the player to play the game without consuming the game ball than in the case of launching the game ball in the right area of the game area 5a. It will be possible to proceed.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a difference in advantages and disadvantages for the player depending on whether it is launched in the left side region or the right side region of the gaming area 5a, and the game is played according to the gaming state. It is advisable to switch the launch area of the area 5a. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game aiming at winning a prize at the starting ports 45, 47 according to the gaming state. However, since it is left to the player's launch operation to decide whether to launch in the right side or the left side of the game area 5a, the player advances the game aiming at winning a prize in the wrong starting port 45,47. There is a risk that it will end up.

In both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state", even if the gaming machine is such that the gaming ball can be launched into the same region (for example, the left region) of the gaming region 5a, the right side of the gaming region 5a or Which area on the left side is left to the player's launch operation, so there is a risk that the player will proceed with the game aiming for a prize at the wrong starting port 45,47. There is no change.

(Specific production example 1)
FIGS. 166 and 167 are diagrams showing specific example 1 of an expectation degree display, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a notification sound effect, an operation effect of a movable member, and a continuous advance notice effect by these. In addition, various effects that expect the execution of the big hit game may be referred to as a hit suggestion effect.

As shown in FIG. 166 (a), the first hold icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B. At that time, it is assumed that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed.

After that, when the variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, and the third display unit are started. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display unit 70B1, and the second display unit 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started by displaying the blue effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, and the first effect is shifted and displayed on the second display unit 70B2. When the display mode of the hold icon changes to a blue character icon and is displayed, the hold icon change effect is started, and along with that, the lamp change effect changes from the state where the winning opening lamp NR is off to the state where it blinks blue. It will be started. Further, an operation effect of operating in a weak operation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period. The operation effect of the first movable member 73 in the weak operation mode is started at the timing before the effect symbol 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the effect symbol 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparatory operation). ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 166 (c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Further, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to the zone background A, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the left-right direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 166 (d), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166 (e), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started and displayed on the first display unit 70B1 and the second display unit 70B2. The first hold icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display unit 70B1, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the second effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, and the hold icon change effect, the lamp change effect, and the zone effect continue. Will remain. Further, an operation effect of operating in a weak operation mode in which the first movable member 73 vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 166 (g), after the effect symbol 70a indicating the loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss effect symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. ..

After that, when the variation effect that becomes the variation is started, as shown in FIG. 166 (h), the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started, and the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is started. Is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, so that the third effect of the continuous advance notice effect is started, but the effect image EF has a higher expectation for the jackpot game than the blue color. Displayed in high red. In addition, the pattern effect image ZE is displayed in a color changed to a color having a higher degree of expectation for the jackpot game than before. In addition, the hold icon change effect is continuously displayed. Further, by changing the winning opening lamp NR from the blue lighting to the red blinking state, the lamp change effect with a higher expectation for the big hit than the blue lighting is executed. In addition, an operation effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an operation effect that operates in a weak operation mode in which the second movable member 74 moves so as to vibrate in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display is displayed with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the previously executed one.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (i), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is stopped. The zone effect is displayed by switching to the zone background B, which is a display having a higher expectation for a big hit than the zone background A.

As shown in FIG. 167 (j), the mini character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and for example, the mini character MCB that moves across the screen executes an effect that arouses a sense of expectation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 167 (k), for example, the dialogue "CHANGE!" Issued by the ally is displayed in the dialogue window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 responds to the dialogue. When the voice "Chance has arrived!" Is displayed, the dialogue notice effect is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (l), the effect symbol 70a of "3" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, and the central variable display area. A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed is executed. At this time, the display mode of the first hold icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to the red character icon, so that the hold icon change effect having a higher expectation for the jackpot game than the blue character icon is executed. .. Further, the winning opening lamp NR changes from red lighting to multicolor (rainbow color) light emission, so that a lamp change effect having a higher expectation for a big hit than red lighting is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 167 (m), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70B and the second. The hold icon display area 70D is erased. The reduced display of the effect symbol 70a is a decorative portion composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a symbol effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. The normal display mode, which is composed of a hexagonal base image and an identification unit consisting of a number unit (identification character), is changed to a simple reduced display mode in which only the identification unit is used.

Then, when the SPSP reach is developed, as shown in FIG. 167 (n), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect, which is a big hit, ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 167 (o), this big hit game (here, the first). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "333" suggesting the type of the jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

Although the winning opening lamp NR remains off while the SP and / or SPSP reach is displayed, the lamp change effect is continued or is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the jackpot winning expectation). ) The winning opening lamp NR may be turned on in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting).

(Expectation display)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, it is possible to execute a so-called expectation degree display that expects the execution of a jackpot game such as a color effect such as an effect image EF or a symbol effect image ZE. .. As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a variable display of the effect symbol 70a based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning opening 45, which is executed in the normal gaming state. Hereinafter, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the expected degree display by the color effect than the special 1 variable display (execution rate a3 <execution rate). a1). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the color effect is used in the special 1 variation display, as compared with the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Expectation display is difficult to execute.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning opening 47 executed in the specific gaming state ( Hereinafter, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the expected degree display by the color effect than the special 2 variable display (execution rate a3 <execution rate). a4). That is, the color effect is applied in the special 1 variation display when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, rather than when the game ball is hit to the right side in the specific game state. Expectation display is difficult to execute.

With such an execution ratio of the expectation degree display, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The degree of expectation display is not limited to color effects, but may be superimposed on an image such as a background image or a production pattern, or characters or decorations performed around the image, and may be a big hit depending on the content or color difference. Anything that can be expected to play is sufficient.

The number and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 168 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of the expectation degree display by the color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of the expectation degree display by the color effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern A32 in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern A32 is not set), the effect pattern A12 is displayed in the normal game state. Although the expected degree display of is feasible, the expected degree display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern A32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern A32 is not set), the effect pattern A42 is displayed when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state. Although the expected degree display of is feasible, the expected degree display of the effect pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern A42 is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the expectation degree display of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, it is possible to execute a zone effect accompanied by a scene change of the background image in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. The zone effect is to expect the execution of the jackpot game over a predetermined period, and either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions. It is possible to execute at the timing of.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (Execution rate b3 <execution rate b1). That is, the zone effect in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state than when the game ball is hit to the left side in the specific game state. Hard to execute.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. (Execution rate b3 <Execution rate b4). That is, the zone effect in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right side in the specific game state. Hard to execute.

With such a zone effect execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The number and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 169 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern B32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern B32 is not set), the effect pattern B12 is displayed when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal gaming state. Although the zone effect of can be executed, the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern B32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern B32 is not set), the effect pattern B42 is displayed when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state. Although the zone effect of can be executed, the zone effect of the effect pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern B42 is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the zone effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of variable displays, and the zone effect may be performed by a single variable display. Then, when it is possible to execute a hit suggestion effect such as a zone effect over a predetermined number of times of variation display, the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. However, the ratio of short times (including 0 times) may be large. In other words, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state performs a hit suggestion effect such as a pattern zone effect over a shorter number of variable display times than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can be said that it is easy to be done.

In the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to change the scene such as the background, the telop flowing on the screen, the pattern decorative change that changes to the effect symbol 70a for zone effect, and the like. However, in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of scene changes such as the background, telops flowing on the screen, and changes in the decorativeness of the symbol that changes to the effect symbol 70a for zone effect.

Even if you do these things, even if you accidentally hit the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to let the first prize opening 45 win the game ball. It can be noticed by the player. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Notification sound production)
When the CD icon is generated as the hold icon, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment outputs the first generation notification sound as the notification sound when the icon is generated. Further, as shown in FIG. 166 (b), when the hold icon and the blue character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the second generated notification sound is used as the notification sound when the icon is generated (changed). (First change notification sound) is output. Further, as shown in FIG. 167 (l), when the hold icon and the red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, the third generation notification sound (when the icon is generated (changed)) is generated. The second change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, the fourth generation notification sound (third change notification sound) is set to be output as the notification sound when the icon changes.

In the present embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the generated notification sound when the CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon. , And a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, or when a CD icon is generated, the notification sound is not output, and only when the icon changes to any mode, the notification sound is output. It may be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is confirmed to be a big hit, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided to make three types.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Is smaller (execution rate c3 <execution rate c1). That is, the change notification sound in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state than when the game ball is hit to the left side in the specific game state. It is difficult to perform the production.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state has an execution rate of the change notification sound effect more than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. Is smaller (execution rate c3 <execution rate c4). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the change notification in the special figure 1 variation display is better than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. Sound production is difficult to perform.

Due to the execution ratio of such a change notification sound effect, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of the change notification sound effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

The change notification sound effect is not limited to when the hold icon changes, but may be executed by a sound for fanning when a prize is won, when the fluctuation starts or when the fluctuation stops.

For example, when the execution rate of the specific change notification sound in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state is displayed. At this time, the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound can be executed, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution rate of the specific change notification sound in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is performed. At this time, the notification sound effect by the predetermined change notification sound can be executed, but the notification sound effect by the specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the notification sound effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The notification sound effect is not limited to being performed in association with the change of the hold (corresponding) icon. Button change sound when buried operation buttons such as, etc. appear, operation sound of movable members 73, 74, change start sound / return sound when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design, and specific design It can be done in relation to various conditions such as the completed sound when the sound is made.

When the notification sound effect can be executed in association with the predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state rather than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the notification sound effect is executed may be small.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, for example, it is possible to execute the effect by the definite notification sound of the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the definite notification is executed. It may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect by sound. It should be noted that the same can be applied not only to the definite notification sound but also to the various notification sound effects described above. That is, in the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the effect by the predetermined notification sound among the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is predetermined. It will be possible to regulate the execution of the effect by the notification sound.

By doing so, even if the player mistakenly hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. Can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Hold icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the form and color of the hold icon are changed and displayed, so that the hold icon effect expected to be a big hit game can be executed. The hold icon change of the present embodiment is expected to execute the jackpot game over a predetermined period, and is a predetermined variation display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variation based on the determination of a plurality of starting conditions. It can be executed at any timing of the display period.

As shown in FIG. 171 in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the hold icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Is smaller (execution rate d3 <execution rate d1). That is, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display when the left-handed hit is made in the specific game state than when the so-called left-handed hit is made toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to perform the production.

As shown in FIG. 171 in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the hold icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state. Is smaller (execution rate d3 <execution rate d4). That is, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, so-called right-handed. It is difficult to perform the production.

Due to the execution ratio of such a hold icon change effect, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The number and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 171 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of the hold icon change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of the hold icon change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The hold icon change effect is not limited to the color change of the hold icon (including the icon) and the change of the mode of the icon itself, but the effect and character attached to the icon change the effect attached to the icon itself or the icon. You may. Further, the hold icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to a character icon as in the embodiment, but may change the shape such as a triangle or a square.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern D32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern D32 is not set), the effect pattern D12 is displayed when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal game state. Although the hold icon change effect of can be executed, the zone effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the hold icon change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern D32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern D32 is not set), the effect pattern D42 is displayed when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state. Although the hold icon change effect of can be executed, the hold icon change effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D42 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the hold icon change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of hold icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, in the hold icon change effect, the CD icon may be changed stepwise from blue to red to rainbow, or the CD icon may be selectively changed to blue, red, or a rainbow. The number of types of display modes of the change destination that can be changed from the current hold icon display mode in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. May be less.

For example, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, the hold icon change effect can be executed, but in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the execution of the hold icon change effect can be restricted. May be. In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, for example, it is possible to execute the effect for change when the hold icon change is changed, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the change is possible. It may be possible to regulate the execution of the effect. Even when the hold icon effect is not executed, the icon decoration displayed along with the hold icon, such as the pedestal on which the hold icon is placed or the frame surrounding the hold icon, may be displayed.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Lamp change production)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, it is a kind of pre-reading advance notice effect that expects the player to execute the jackpot game by changing the light emitting mode of the winning opening lamp NR over one or a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to perform a certain lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. It is smaller (execution rate e3 <execution rate e1). That is, the lamp icon changes in the special 1 variation display when the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state, rather than when the game ball is hit to the left side in the specific game state. It is difficult to perform the production.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. It is smaller (execution rate e3 <execution rate e4). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the ramp change effect is produced in the special 1 variation display, rather than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. Is difficult to execute.

Due to the execution rate of such a ramp change effect, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The number and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 172 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of the lamp change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of the lamp change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning opening lamp NR, but in addition to the winning opening lamp NR, other lighting such as movable members 73, 74, a decorative frame 40, a game board 5, and a frame lighting device 10 for a glass frame 4 are used. It may be executed in cooperation with the device.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern E32 in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E12 is displayed in the normal game state. Although the lamp change effect of the above can be executed, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E12 is not executed. At this time, when the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the lamp change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern E32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E42 is displayed when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state. Although the lamp change effect of the above can be executed, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E42 is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the lamp change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

The number of types of the lamp change effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. Further, in the lamp change effect, the lamp may be changed stepwise from no light emission to blue to red to a rainbow, or may be selectively changed from no light emission to blue, red, or a rainbow. The special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state has a smaller number of types of light emitting modes that can be changed from the current light emitting mode than the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state. May be good.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, for example, a predetermined pattern in the lamp change effect can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the lamp change of the predetermined pattern is possible. It may be possible to regulate the execution of the production.

The light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect is, for example, a hold (corresponding) icon change, a winning of a game ball to the starting port, a fixed effect (fixed effect) such as "Kyun", or "Guin". Button change sound when a buried operation button appears, operation sound of movable members 73,74, change start sound / return sound and specific when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design. It can be done in relation to various conditions such as the completed sound when the design is made.

When the lamp change effect can be executed in association with the predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state rather than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the lamp change effect is executed may be small.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, for example, among the lamp change effects, it is possible to execute the effect by, for example, the winning opening lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device). In the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state, for example, the effect of the board lighting device or the frame lighting device may be executed, while the execution of the effect by the winning opening lamp NR may be regulated. That is, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the effect by a predetermined part (area, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change effect, but the special of the specific gaming state. 1 In the variable display, it is possible to regulate the execution of the effect by the predetermined part.

The pattern selected in the lamp change effect or the lamp change effect is the timing (for example, at the time of winning, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of stop of fluctuation, the number of consecutive times, the start / stop / determination of the movable member, the vibration or operation of the operation button. Etc.). In the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, for example, it is possible to execute the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing at the time of winning and a specific timing at the time of operation of the movable member. In the special 1 variation display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing and a specific timing.

From the execution period of the lamp change effect (predetermined pattern of the lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variable display of the normal game state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, the lamp change effect performed in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state. The execution period of (predetermined pattern of lamp change effect) may be shorter.

Special 1 variation of the specific gaming state depending on the number of types of parts (areas, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emission effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. The number of types of light emitting parts (areas, members, etc.) in the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed on the display may be smaller. In addition, the light emission effect (light emission effect) performed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state from the range in which the light is emitted in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state (lamp change effect). The range in which light is emitted in the lamp change effect) may be smaller. Here, in the light emission effect, the number of light emission and the light emission range are changed stepwise by changing the number of light emission of the LEDs arranged side by side, and the light guide plate and the like overlap with the image display device and the lighting device for the panel. This may change the light emission mode.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Activation of movable members)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the player is allowed to operate the first movable member 73 in an operation mode including a weak operation mode and a strong operation mode in which the movement is larger (prominently) than the weak operation mode. It is possible to execute an operation effect that makes it expected that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 rather than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate in the weak operation mode of the effect is small (execution rate f31 <execution rate f11). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the operation mode is weaker in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the operation effect of.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 rather than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. The execution rate in the weak operation mode of the effect is small (execution rate f31 <execution rate f41). That is, when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state, so-called right-handed hit is performed, and when the left-handed hit is performed in the specific game state, the operation is weaker in the special figure 1 variation display. It is difficult to execute the operation effect of the aspect.

Due to the execution ratio of such an operation effect, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

It should be noted that the execution rate of the strong operation mode in the operation effect may be smaller, the same, or larger than that of the weak operation mode. Further, regarding the strong operation mode, the relationship between the winning of the starting ports 45 and 47 and the gaming state may be the same as the weak operation mode or the reverse of the weak operation mode, and the execution ratio may be the same. May be good.

Here, the number of types of patterns of the operation effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the operation effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation effect of other movable accessories such as the second movable member 74 may be the same as that of the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be linked (related) to operate.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state is performed. Although the operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode can be executed, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the operation effect of the specific operation mode in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is performed. Although the operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode can be executed, the operation effect of the specific operation mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined operation mode is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the operation effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

The operation effect can be executed at various timings such as the start of fluctuation, the development of the effect, the occurrence of reach, the tilting time, and the determined effect (fixed effect). In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a weak operation and a strong operation operation effect at a predetermined timing such as at the start of fluctuation and at a specific timing such as a determined effect. In the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the strong operation at a predetermined timing, while it may be possible to execute the strong operation at the specific timing. In this way, differences may be provided in the operation mode, the executionability of the operation effect, and the like depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with the light emission effect by a light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, as the light emission effect, it is possible to select a light emission pattern, a light emission color, a light emission range, etc., such as a mode in which the degree of expectation is gradually different, such as blue light emission → red light emission → rainbow light emission. Then, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute, for example, the operation effect of the predetermined light emitting mode of blue light emission and the specific light emitting mode of rainbow light emission, but the specific gaming state. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect in the predetermined light emission mode, while it may be possible to execute the operation effect in the specific light emission mode. In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute, for example, a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and a specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission in the operation effect, but the specific game state. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light emission effect of the predetermined light emission mode in the operation effect, while it may be possible to execute the light emission effect of the specific light emission mode. Further, when it has a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed when the operation is weak and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed when the operation is strong, it is specified from the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variable display of the gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Display effect by display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 174, in the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70, the jackpot game is executed for the player by displaying the light guide plate image DG over one or a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect, which is a kind of pre-reading notice effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), in the first continuous advance notice effect, for example, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed at the start of variable display, and as shown in FIG. 174 (b), the second time. In the continuous advance notice effect of, for example, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in a pose different from that of the first time is displayed at the start of the variable display, and as shown in FIG. 174 (c), in the third continuous advance notice effect. For example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG that imitates a character having the same pose as the second time but having a different color (red character or rainbow character) is displayed. The timing of the light guide plate display effect is not limited to the start of the fluctuation, but may be during the fluctuation display or the end of the fluctuation display, and the timing of the continuously executed light guide plate display effect may be different.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate is small (execution rate g3 <execution rate g1). That is, the light guide plate display in the special 1 variation display is more when the game ball is hit to the left side of the game area 5a in the normal game state than when the game ball is hit to the left side in the specific game state. It is difficult to perform the production.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective in displaying the light guide plate than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. The execution rate is small (execution rate g3 <execution rate g4). That is, in the special game state, the light guide plate is displayed in the variation display of Fig. 1 when the game ball is hit to the right side of the game area 5a in the specific game state. It is difficult to perform display effects.

Due to the execution ratio of such a light guide plate display effect, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been described, but the display effect performed by a display means different from that of the first image display device 71 such as the second image display device 71 and the 3D filter is the same as the light guide plate display effect. However, different execution ratios may be used. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (related) for execution.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern G32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern G32 is not set), the effect pattern G12 is displayed when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal game state. Although the light guide plate display effect of the above can be executed, the light guide plate display effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G12 is not executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the effect pattern G32 when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the effect pattern G32 is not set), the effect pattern G42 is displayed when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state. Although the light guide plate change effect of the above can be executed, the light guide plate change effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G42 is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as the start of fluctuation, the development of the effect, the occurrence of reach, the tilting time, and the determined effect (fixed effect). In the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, the light guide plate display effect can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of the variation and at a specific timing such as a determined effect. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to regulate the execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing, while it may be possible to execute the light guide plate display effect at a specific timing. In this way, there may be differences in the display mode, whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed, and the like, depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit suggestion effects such as an operation effect by a movable member. In this case, as the light guide plate display effect, it is possible to select a light emission pattern, a light emission color, a light emission range, or the like, such as a mode in which the degree of expectation is gradually different, such as blue light emission → red light emission → rainbow light emission. Then, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, for example, a light guide plate display effect of a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission is implied by other hits such as an operation effect. Although it is feasible to produce, in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to regulate the execution of other hit suggestion effects in the predetermined display mode, while the other hit suggestion effects in the specific display mode can be regulated. It may be feasible. In other words, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute, for example, a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission together with the operation effect, but the specific game state. In the special 1 variable display, it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of the predetermined display mode, while the specific display mode may be executed together with the operation effect. In addition, when it has a predetermined display pattern (which can be executed when the operation is weak) and a predetermined display pattern (which can be executed when the operation is strong), the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation of the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the display.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The display effect performed by other than the first image display device 71 is not limited to the light guide plate, and may be a sub liquid crystal provided on a game board such as a second image display device, a sub liquid crystal provided on a frame, or the like. A display effect may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous notice production)
As shown in FIGS. 166, 167 and 174, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes the player expect the jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined effect over one or a plurality of variable displays. It is possible to execute a continuous advance notice effect, which is a kind of look-ahead advance notice effect. In the present embodiment, a color effect, a zone effect, a change notification sound effect, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a display effect by a light guide plate, etc. are linked (related) and executed.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 169 to 173 and 174-1, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state rather than a special 1 variation display executed in a normal gaming state. However, the execution rate of the continuous notice effect is small. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the continuous notice effect in the special 1 variation display is better than the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Is difficult to execute.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the continuous advance notice effect is produced in the special 1 variation display, rather than the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. Is difficult to execute.

With such a continuous advance notice effect execution ratio, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Here, the number of types of patterns of the continuous advance notice effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the continuous advance notice effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

The continuous advance notice effect is not only a continuous or related linked effect in multiple variable displays, but also the degree of expectation for the jackpot game is increased as a predetermined condition such as the number of variable displays is repeated or the passage of time progresses. It may include a development effect (development fanning effect, step-up (SU) type effect, etc.) that becomes larger due to a target or continuous change. The development effect may be a change effect in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (time lapse or the like) is satisfied, such as a countdown or a timer effect.

Indirect production such as roulette production, selection production that suggests the difference in results depending on the selected option, such as production that increases the number of drawings at the time of reach, look-ahead suggestion characters, LCD conversation notice / cut-in notice, development destination roulette production, etc. Content suggestion that suggests the content of the event to be executed after the effect, such as a notice effect that announces the occurrence of an event that leads to a big hit such as look-ahead or reach depending on the content, and a big hit type suggestion effect (〇〇 bonus). Operation suggestion effects such as effects, button long press guidance effects on the image display device, repeated hit effects (gauges accumulate during long presses, buttons vibrate at each reaching level), and movable accessories (dedicated movable) Operation of (including accessories with other functions such as accessories and light guide plates) (weak notice (suggestion) operation, strong notice (suggestion) operation, suggestion, development, decision production), operation of operation buttons, etc. For other advance notification effects such as effects, the execution ratio may be based on the relationship between the game state and the start condition described above.

For example, when the execution rate of the continuous advance notice effect of the specific effect mode when displaying the special 1 variation in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the special 1 variation display in the normal game state is displayed. At this time, the continuous advance notice effect according to the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect of the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, when the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect of the specific effect mode in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific game state is performed. At this time, the continuous advance notice effect according to the predetermined effect mode can be executed, but the continuous advance notice effect of the specific effect mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined effect mode is not executed. At this time, when the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is executed, it is possible to execute the continuous advance notice effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed by the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state, the light emission effect of the special 1 start port 45 is executed at the winning timing of the game ball to the first winning opening 45 and / or the variation start timing of the effect symbol 70a (first special symbol). In addition to being possible, it is possible to perform an operation effect of the first movable accessory 73 and / or the second movable member 74. Similarly, in the special 2 variation display of the specific game state, the special 2 start port 45 emits light at the winning timing of the game ball to the second winning opening 47 and / or at the variation start timing of the effect symbol 70a (second special symbol). The effect may be feasible, and the motion effect of the first movable accessory 73 and / or the second movable member 74 may be feasible.

On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 start opening 45 is at the timing of winning the game ball to the first winning opening 45 and / or at the variation start timing of the effect symbol 70a (first special symbol). And / or the operation effect of the first movable accessory 73 and / or the second movable member 74 is not executed. That is, when the player hits the left in the normal gaming state, the light emitting effect and the motion effect are executed, but when the player hits the left in the specific gaming state, the execution of the light emitting effect and the motion effect is restricted.

In this way, by making the special 1 variable display in the normal game state and the special 1 variable display in the specific game state different from each other in the light emission effect and the motion effect, the left strike is mistakenly made in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Even if this is the case, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to have the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

When a specific pattern (specific roll = chance eye) appears (stops) in the three production symbols 70a, it becomes a trigger for a so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change), or SP reach (a big hit is possible even in reach). It may develop into something with high sex). The variation display in which such a chance eye appears may be a single variation or a plurality of variation. In this case, the appearance rate of the chance eye may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. Further, the ratio of the chance eyes appearing in a plurality of fluctuations may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state.

There are various display modes for the effect pattern 70a, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of identification parts such as numbers (1 to 9) and letters (A, B ...) and decorative parts such as characters, and a specific display mode consisting of only the identification parts. You may select and display from the aspect. In addition, there may be a plurality of types of predetermined display modes. Further, in addition to the effect symbol 70a or instead of the effect symbol 70a, a pseudo-continuous symbol such as "NEXT" is displayed, and it seems that the pattern is changed multiple times regardless of one starting condition (one prize). You may perform various effects (pseudo-ream). Further, in addition to or in place of the effect symbol 70a, for example, a change symbol, a mode entry symbol, a development symbol, or the like, a mode different from the present (for example, an effect mode) or an effect can be produced by the appearance of these symbols. You may expect the execution of. It should be noted that the special symbols such as the pseudo-continuous symbol, the change symbol, the mode entry symbol, the development symbol, and the like have different information (expectation degree of execution of the jackpot game) from the normal effect symbol 70a. The appearance of such a special pattern can also be an element of the linked production.

The appearance ratio of the special symbol may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is larger than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state (normal effect symbol + special symbol). May be less. In addition, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state has a higher execution rate of the linked effect linked to the appearance of the special symbol than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. It may be small.

Even in these cases, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win the game ball even if he accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Specific production example 2)
A specific example 2 of the effect of the variable display is shown.

(Special 1 variable display of normal game state)
A special 1 variation display in a normal gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. As shown in FIG. 175, at the timing of P0, the first hold number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m due to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is from "0" to "1". Increase to. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176 (a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". To. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part (see FIG. 176 (b)).

At the timing of P2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176 (c)).

At the timing of P3, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“259”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 176 (e)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P5, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“259”) (see FIG. 176 (f)), and the first lamp. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, the preparatory operation is performed, and then the scrolling is started (see FIG. 176 (g)).

At the timing of P7, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 176 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“789”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 176 (i)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“789”) (see FIG. 176 (j)), and the first lamp is used. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state according to the above flow.

The special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state has been explained, but the basic flow is also the special 1 variation display in the special 2 variation display of the normal gaming state and the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state). Same as the display.

Specifically, the first holding number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol holding display 63, the sub first variable display 81, the sub first holding display 83, the first. Each of the hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 is set to the second hold number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Read as hold indicator 64, sub second variable indicator 82, sub second hold indicator 84, second hold number display area 70F, second hold icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, second start port 47. Just do it.

(Special 1 variable display of specific game state)
A special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. As shown in FIG. 177, at the timing of P0, the first holding number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m by winning a prize in the first starting port 45 is changed from “0” to “1”. Increase to. At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (a)).

Next, at the timing of P1, the variation display of the first special symbol is started as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". To. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". The hold icon T1 is not displayed (shift is not displayed) in the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub first variation indicator 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178 (b)).

At the timing of P2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (c)).

At the timing of P3, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (d)).

After that, at the timing of P4, even if a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178 (e)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P5, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect symbol 70a remains in the stopped state. Further, the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“259”) (see FIG. 178 (f)), and the first lamp symbol is finally stopped in a loss mode (for example, extinguished).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "2" to "1". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "2" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the variation display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178 (g)).

At the timing of P7, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178 (h)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178 (i)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P9, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect symbol 70a remains in the stopped state, but the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in the predetermined loss mode (“789”) (see FIG. 178 (j)). , The first lamp symbol stops in a lost mode (for example, extinguished).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific gaming state according to the above flow. In the above example, the effect symbol 70a is not changed, but the effect symbol 70a may be changed.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ fluctuates without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state. In the variation display, the variation of the effect symbol 70a is not executed. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while the hold icon T1 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display. The TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute the specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ fluctuates without displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state. In the variation display, the variation of the effect symbol 70a is not executed. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the above-mentioned specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while the hold icon T2 is displayed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display. The TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the specific variation display, at least one of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be varied. For example, even if both the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change, the effect symbol 70a changes while the special symbol TZ does not change, but the special symbol TZ changes but the effect symbol 70a is not displayed. There may be.

In the embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the holding icon and the holding number according to the increase / decrease in the number of holdings based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 can be varied and displayed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the holding icon according to the increase / decrease in the number of holdings based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 can be varied and displayed only in the holding number different from the predetermined mode.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the embodiment, in the specific gaming state, the holding icon and the holding number according to the increase / decrease in the number of holdings based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 47 can be varied and displayed in a predetermined manner. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the holding icon according to the increase / decrease in the number of holdings based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 can be varied and displayed only in the holding number different from the predetermined mode.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, the information regarding the number of holds is displayed by the hold icon, the hold number and the display, while in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the information is displayed. It is designed to be displayed on hold numbers and indicators. That is, the total number of types of information regarding the number of pending numbers is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, it can be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information regarding the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state.

Further, the hold (corresponding) icon is not limited to be displayed in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state, and may be displayed. In addition, even if the hold (corresponding) icon is not shifted and displayed based on the increase or decrease in the number of holdings in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the holding (corresponding) icon is not operated. It may be displayed in a mode different from the display or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state. That is, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, the shift display of the hold icon is possible, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state, the shift display of the hold icon is executed. It can be regulated. Further, in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, the hold icon can be displayed in a predetermined mode, but in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state, the hold icon is displayed in a predetermined mode. It is possible to regulate the execution of the display in.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Specific production example 3)
A specific example 3 of the effect of the variable display is shown.

(Special 1 variable display of the number of hold "1" in the normal game state)
FIG. 179 will be used to describe an example of the special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is “1” in the normal gaming state. The fluctuation pattern shall be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 179 (a)).

Next, as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "1" to "0". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "1" to "0".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part (see FIG. 179 (b)).

At this time, scrolling of the effect symbol 70a starts in the order of the effect symbol 70a on the left side, the effect symbol 70a in the center, and the effect symbol 70a on the right side (see FIGS. 179 (c) to 179 (e)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“789”). At this time, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the order of the effect symbol 70a on the left side, the effect symbol 70a in the center, and the effect symbol 70a on the right side (see FIGS. 179 (f) to 179 (h)). Further, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a also swing. (Direction operation) is performed. Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIGS. 179 (f) to 179 (h)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“789”) (see FIG. 179 (i)), and the first lamp. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

(Special 1 variable display of the number of hold "4" in the normal game state)
With reference to FIG. 180, an example of the special 1 variation display when the number of holdings is “4” in the normal gaming state will be described. The fluctuation pattern shall be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180 (a)).

Next, as the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Further, in the first special symbol hold indicator 63, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "4" to "3".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub first variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part (see FIG. 180 (b)).

At this time, the left effect symbol 70a, the center effect symbol 70a, and the right effect symbol 70a start scrolling at the same time (see FIG. 180 (c)).

When the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 180 (d)).

After that, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in a lost mode (“789”). At this time, the left effect symbol 70a, the center effect symbol 70a, and the right effect symbol 70a are temporarily stopped at the same time (see FIG. 180 (e)). Further, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a also swing. (Direction operation) is performed. Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 180 (e)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“789”) (see FIG. 180 (f)), and the first lamp. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

After that, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state with the variation pattern selected according to the above flow.

The special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state has been explained, but the basic flow is also the special 1 variation display in the special 2 variation display of the normal gaming state and the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state). Same as the display.

Specifically, the first holding number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol holding display 63, the sub first variable display 81, the sub first holding display 83, the first. Each of the hold number display area 70E, the first hold icon display area 70B, the first lamp symbol, and the first start port 45 is set to the second hold number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Read as hold indicator 64, sub second variable indicator 82, sub second hold indicator 84, second hold number display area 70F, second hold icon display area 70D, second lamp symbol, second start port 47. Just do it.

In the embodiment, the three effect symbols 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling at the same time from the variable pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order and the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in order. However, the fluctuation pattern in which the effect symbols 70a of 3 are temporarily stopped at the same time has a shorter fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 181, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state is different between at least the holding numbers “1” and “4”. For example, as the holding number increases, the average fluctuation time becomes longer. .. In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the average fluctuation time when the number of holdings is "1" is the longest, and the average fluctuation time when the number of holdings is "4" is the shortest. Similarly, the average fluctuation time of the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of reservations “1” and “4”, and for example, the average fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of reservations increases. In the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, the average fluctuation time when the number of holdings is "1" is the longest, and the average fluctuation time when the number of holdings is "4" is the shortest. Even if the average fluctuation time of the hold number "2" and the hold number "3" is the same or different, the average fluctuation time of the hold numbers "2" to "4" may be the same or different. It may be either.

On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is the same or different between at least the holding numbers "1" and "4", for example, when they are different, when the holding number is "1". The average fluctuation time is the longest, and the average fluctuation time when the number of holdings is "4" is the shortest.

Here, from the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of holds "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of holds "1" is executed when the special 1 fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, in the specific gaming state. The difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holdings "4" and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holdings "1" when executing the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller. That is, the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state is smaller than the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state even when the average fluctuation time is different between the reserved numbers "4" and "1".

In addition, the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of holdings is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of holdings is "1" when executing the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state makes it special in the specific gaming state. 1 The difference between the average fluctuation display time with the number of holdings “4” and the average fluctuation display time with the number of holdings “1” when executing the fluctuation display is smaller. That is, the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state is smaller than the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state even when the average fluctuation time is different between the reserved numbers "4" and "1".

In the embodiment, the number of holdings of the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is "4" based on the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of holdings "4" of the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state and the number of holdings "1". The difference in the average fluctuation time from the number of holdings "1" is smaller, and the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of holdings "4" and the number of holdings "1" in the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state shows that in the specific gaming state. The difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of holdings "4" and the number of holdings "1" in the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller (normal special 1> specific special 2> specific special 1).

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the embodiment, the three effect symbols 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling at the same time from the variable pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order and the three effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in order. However, the fluctuation pattern in which the effect symbols 70a of 3 are temporarily stopped at the same time has a shorter fluctuation time.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected from the variation pattern of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". The pattern is easier to select than the variation pattern of FIG. 180. That is, it has a plurality of fluctuation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 179 is more easily selected than the variation pattern of FIG. 180 even if the number of reservations is “4” to “1”, and the variation pattern of FIG. 180. Is difficult to select (selection rate may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when the special 1 variation display of the loss determination is executed in the normal game state, the special 1 variation display of the loss determination is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings. In this case, the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected from the variation pattern of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". The pattern is easier to select than the variation pattern of FIG. 180. That is, it has a plurality of fluctuation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 179 is more easily selected than the variation pattern of FIG. 180 even if the number of reservations is “4” to “1”, and the variation pattern of FIG. 180. Is difficult to select (selection rate may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In this way, when the special 2 variation display of the loss determination is executed in the specific game state, the special 1 variation display of the loss determination is executed in the specific game state from the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings. In this case, the number of patterns of variable display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings is smaller.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Then, when executing the special 1 variation display of the loss determination in the normal gaming state or when executing the special 2 variation display of the loss determination in the specific gaming state, it is determined by the number of reservations from "4" to "1". From the number of patterns of the variable display time, the variable display time determined by the number of holdings determined by the number of holdings from "4" to "1" when the special 1 variable display of the loss determination is executed in the specific game state. The number of patterns is smaller. In this way, when comparing the total number of patterns of variable display time that can be determined by the number of holdings from "4" to "1" instead of comparing each number of holdings as described above, the loss determination in the normal gaming state is made. The special 1 variation display of the loss determination of the specific gaming state is less than the special 1 variation display of the special 1 variation display or the special 2 variation display of the deviation determination of the specific gaming state. Even in this way, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected from the variation pattern of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". The pattern is easier to select than the variation pattern of FIG. 180. That is, it has a plurality of fluctuation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 1 fluctuation display of the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 179 is more easily selected than the variation pattern of FIG. 180 even if the number of reservations is “4” to “1”, and the variation pattern of FIG. 180. Is difficult to select (selection rate may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the number of holds "4" and the number of holds "1" are more in the case of displaying the special 1 variation of the loss judgment in the specific game state than in the case of executing the special 1 change display of the loss judgment in the normal game state. The rate at which the same fluctuation pattern is executed is large.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected from the variation pattern of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "4", and the variation of FIG. 179 when the number of reservations is "1" to "3". The pattern is easier to select than the variation pattern of FIG. 180. That is, it has a plurality of fluctuation patterns determined according to the number of holdings in the special 2 fluctuation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern of FIG. 179 is more easily selected than the variation pattern of FIG. 180 even if the number of reservations is “4” to “1”, and the variation pattern of FIG. 180. Is difficult to select (selection rate may be 0). That is, in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the variation pattern is almost determined regardless of the number of holdings. In other words, the number of holds "4" and the number of holds "1" are more in the case of displaying the special 1 variation of the loss judgment in the specific game state than in the case of executing the special 2 change display of the loss judgment in the specific game state. The rate at which the same fluctuation pattern is executed is large.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Regardless of the number of holdings, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state (the number of holdings "4" and the number of holdings "1". But) the execution rate of the fluctuation pattern of the same stop mode or start mode is large. Further, even if the total number of variation patterns having different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. I can say.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation such as a partial operation of the decorative portion or an expansion / contraction operation of the whole or a part of the decorative portion. Depending on the presence or absence of such a preparatory movement and the type of the preparatory movement, the player is expected to execute the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the preparatory movement is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (Execution rate h3 <Execution rate h1). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the preparatory operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Hard to execute.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the preparatory movement is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. (Execution rate h3 <Execution rate h4). That is, in the case of hitting the left in the specific game state, the preparatory operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. Hard to execute.

Due to the execution ratio of such a preparatory movement, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is smaller than that of the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (Number of types of fluctuation pattern H3 <number of types of fluctuation pattern H1). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the preparatory operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to execute with the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is smaller than that of the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. (Number of types of fluctuation pattern H3 <number of types of fluctuation pattern H4). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the preparatory operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to execute with the same pattern.

With such a number of types of preparatory movements, it is disadvantageous to have the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player mistakenly hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the effect symbol 70a is configured. A stop operation is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE are fluctuating (directing operation).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (Execution rate i3 <Execution rate i1). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the stop operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Hard to execute.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. (Execution rate i3 <Execution rate i4). That is, in the case of hitting the left in the specific game state, the preparatory operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a in the specific game state. Hard to execute.

Due to the execution rate of such a stop operation, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (Number of types of fluctuation pattern I3 <number of types of fluctuation pattern I1). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the stop operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to execute with the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. (Number of types of fluctuation pattern I3 <number of types of fluctuation pattern I4). That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the stop operation is performed in the special 1 variation display than in the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. Easy to execute with the same pattern.

With such a number of types of stop motions, it is disadvantageous to have the first winning opening 45 win a game ball even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

It should be noted that instead of performing both the preparatory operation and the stop operation, only one of them may be executed.

In the embodiment, when the variation display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179, and the three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 180. There is a variable stop pattern in which 70a are stopped together. As shown in FIG. 184, the loss executed when the hold number is "4" in the specific game state from the special 1 variable display which is the loss determination executed when the hold number is "4" in the normal game state. In the special 1 variation display to be determined, the execution rate of the variation pattern in the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and stopped is smaller. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the number of reservations is "4", compared to the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and stopped in the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184, it is executed when the holding number is "4" in the specific gaming state from the special 1 variation display which is the loss determination executed when the holding number is "4" in the normal gaming state. In the special 1 variation display, which is a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order is larger. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the number of reservations is "4", compared to the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to execute the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order in the variable display.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the embodiment, when the variation display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation stop pattern for sequentially stopping (temporarily stopping) the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179, and the three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 180. There is a variable stop pattern in which 70a are stopped together. As shown in FIG. 184, from the special 2 variable display that is the loss determination executed when the hold number is "4" in the specific game state, the loss executed when the hold number is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display to be determined, the execution rate of the variation pattern in the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and stopped is smaller. That is, a mode in which three effect symbols 70a are aligned and stopped in the special 1 variation display of the reserved number "4" in the case of hitting left in the specific gaming state than in the case of hitting right in the specific gaming state. Is difficult to execute.

Further, as shown in FIG. 184, it is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state from the special 2 variation display which is the loss determination executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display, which is a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order is larger. That is, in the case of hitting left in the specific gaming state, the three effect symbols 70a stop in order in the special 1 variation display of the reserved number "4" than in the case of hitting right in the specific gaming state. Easy to carry out.

As shown in FIG. 184, the loss determination is executed when the hold number is "1" in the normal gaming state. Special 1 Variable display or the loss determination executed when the hold number is "1" in the specific gaming state. In the special 2 variation display that becomes The execution rate is the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 184, it is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the special 1 variable display or the specific game state, which is the loss determination executed when the number of holds is "1" in the normal game state. The variation of the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order between the special 2 variation display that is a loss determination and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holdings is "1" in the specific game state. The execution rate of the pattern is the same.

In the embodiment, when the variation display is started by the loss determination, the variation start pattern for sequentially scrolling the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179 and the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 180 are scrolled at the same time. There is a fluctuation start pattern that causes scrolling. As shown in FIG. 185, the loss executed when the hold number is "4" in the specific game state is obtained from the special 1 variable display which is the loss determination executed when the hold number is "4" in the normal game state. In the special 1 variation display to be determined, the execution rate of the variation pattern in the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and scrolling is started is smaller. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the number of reservations is "4", compared to the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is difficult to execute the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and scrolling is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185, it is executed when the holding number is "4" in the specific gaming state from the special 1 variation display which is the loss determination executed when the holding number is "4" in the normal gaming state. In the special 1 variation display, which is a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is larger. That is, in the case of hitting the left side in the specific game state, the number of reservations is "4", compared to the case of hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is easy to execute an embodiment in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the embodiment, when the variation display is stopped by the loss determination, the variation start pattern that starts scrolling the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 179 in order and the three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. 180 are aligned. There is a variable start pattern that starts scrolling. As shown in FIG. 185, the loss executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state is determined from the special 2 variable display which is the loss determination executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display to be determined, the execution rate of the variation pattern in the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and scrolling is started is smaller. That is, when the player hits the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the right in the specific game state, the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling together in the special 1 variation display of the reserved number "4". The aspect is difficult to carry out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 185, it is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state from the special 2 variation display which is the loss determination executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display, which is a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is larger. That is, the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order in the special 1 variation display of the reserved number "4" in the case of hitting left in the specific gaming state than in the case of hitting right in the specific gaming state. Is easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 185, the loss determination is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the normal gaming state. In the special 2 variation display that becomes Execution rate is the same. Further, as shown in FIG. 185, it is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the special 1 variable display or the specific game state, which is the loss determination executed when the number of holds is "1" in the normal game state. In the special 2 variation display that is a loss determination and the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state, the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order. The execution rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the displayed effect symbol 70a does not scroll, or a part of the decorative part such as a character disappears from the effect symbol 70a. It is not limited to the fact that 70a is not displayed, and may be other than that, for example, a decorative part such as a character of the effect symbol 70a that scrolls does not operate in a predetermined manner. That is, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state has a special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state, rather than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can be said that the ratio of the display in the special mode different from the mode displayed in the special 2 variable display is large.

The special symbol such as the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous symbol may be displayed on the effect symbol 70a or in place of the effect symbol 70a. In this case, by displaying a special symbol, all or part of the scrolling of the normal effect symbol 70a and the operation (preparation operation and stop operation) of the decorative part such as the character of the effect symbol become invisible. .. Then, the ratio of the normal symbol to be hidden by the display of the special symbol or the range in which the normal symbol is hidden in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is higher than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. Is getting smaller.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Specific production example 4)
A specific example 4 of the effect of the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 185.

As shown in FIG. 185 (a), while the effect symbol 70a of "8" is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect symbol 70a that has been variablely displayed, the effect is produced in the central variable display area. It is assumed that the reach effect of displaying the symbol 70a in a variable manner is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), the effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect symbols 70a are changed to a display mode different from the display mode so far (FIG. 186 (b). It is suggested that the degree of expectation for the jackpot game is high. Then, a symbol size change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as insertion of a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. The reduced display of the effect symbol 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG composed of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a symbol effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. The normal display mode consisting of the decorative portion, the hexagonal base image and the identification unit (identification character) is changed to the simple reduced display mode of only the identification unit.

As shown in FIGS. 185 (d) and 185 (f), the pseudo effect symbol (pseudo symbol) GZ is displayed so as to increase in three upper and lower rows, so that the effect of increasing the expectation for the jackpot game is performed. .. After that, when the execution period of the reach effect that becomes a big hit ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command indicating the big hit), as shown in FIG. 185 (g), this big hit game (here, the first big hit). The jackpot effect symbol 70a of "888" suggesting the type of the game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped and then stopped and displayed to end the variation effect.

In the embodiment, the variation display is displayed at the effect symbol 70a in the normal mode and the predetermined timing of the variation display (for example, at the time of entering the reach effect, during the reach effect, at the start of the change, during the change, at the time of stopping the change, etc.). It is possible to carry out with the effect symbol 70a of a specific aspect to be performed. The effect symbol 70a of a specific aspect is not only the changed effect symbol 70a (changed symbol) and the pseudo symbol GZ as shown in FIG. 185 (b), but also a mode entry symbol suggesting a transition to a predetermined mode and a jackpot game. It may be a development pattern that fuels the expectation of.

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller ratio of displaying the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (m32). <M12). That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode in the special 1-figure variation display when the left-handed strike is performed in the specific gaming state than when the left-handed strike is performed in the normal gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 186, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state has a smaller ratio of displaying the effect symbol 70a in the specific mode than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state (m32). <M42). In other words, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state has a larger proportion of the effect symbol 70a in the normal mode than the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. That is, it is more difficult to display the effect symbol 70a in a specific mode when the left-handed strike is performed in the specific gaming state than when the right-handed strike is performed in the specific gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 185, it is possible to execute a display size change effect that changes the display size of the effect symbol 70a in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 187, the display size of the effect symbol 70a is changed by the special 1 variation display which is executed in the specific gaming state and which is the loss determination, rather than the special 1 variation display which is the loss determination in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3 <n1). That is, it is more difficult to perform the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a in the special 1 figure variation display when the left strike is performed in the specific game state than when the left strike is performed in the normal game state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the display size of the effect symbol 70a is changed in the special 1 variable display which is executed in the specific game state and which is the loss judgment, rather than the special 2 variable display which is the loss judgment in the specific game state. The execution rate of the display size change effect to be caused is small (n3 <n4). That is, it is more difficult to execute the display size change effect of the effect symbol 70a when the left-handed strike is performed in the specific game state than when the right-handed strike is performed in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed along with the reach effect, and can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of the change or during the change. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a hit suggestion effect such as an operation effect of a movable member, a predetermined number of holdings, an operation of an operation button, or the like.

From the special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display that is the loss judgment that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state. In the special 1 variation display, which is executed when the number of pending numbers is "4" in the specific game state, the execution rate of the symbol change effect may be smaller. From the special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display that is the loss judgment that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state. , The special 1 variation display, which is executed when the number of pending numbers is "1" in the specific game state, may be smaller than the execution rate of the symbol change effect.

Special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state, and special 1 variable display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state. And, the execution ratio of the symbol change effect may be the same. In addition, from the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the specific game state, the special 1 that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the specific game state is 1 In the variable display, the execution rate of the symbol change effect may be smaller or larger.

The effect (symbol change effect) that expects the execution of the jackpot game by changing the symbol is not limited to the display size change effect, but the position where the effect symbol 70a is displayed changes, or the display order of the effect symbol 70a changes. It may be in other aspects such as changing or doing. Further, when the symbol change effect has a plurality of patterns having different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state is used to display the special 1 in the specific gaming state. In the variable display, the total number of patterns for the pattern change effect may be smaller.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 186, it is a reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development fanning effect, etc.) in the variable display. Then, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination executed in the specific gaming state, than in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination in the normal gaming state. o3 <o1). That is, it is more difficult to perform the reach effect in the variation display shown in Fig. 1 when the left-handed strike is performed in the specific gaming state than when the left-handed strike is performed in the normal gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display, which is the loss determination executed in the specific gaming state, than in the special 2 variation display, which is the loss determination in the specific gaming state. o3 <o4). That is, it is more difficult to execute the reach effect when the player hits the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the right in the specific game state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Prior to the reach effect, the first effect such as the mode entry effect and the development effect is performed, and then the second effect such as the roulette effect and the development effect is performed. By directing, expectations for big hits are raised. Here, the execution ratio of the advance notification effect executed before the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. You may. In other words, the execution ratio of the reach effect performed from the advance notification effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the number of executions of the advance notification effect executed before the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. May be good. In other words, the ratio of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state to the reach effect after performing the advance notification effect is smaller than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. ..

The special 1 variable display in the normal game state has a lower expectation of shifting to the jackpot game after the reach effect is executed, and the special 1 variable display in the normal game state has a lower expectation than the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display of is less expected to shift to the jackpot game after the reach effect is executed (special 2 variable display of specific game state> special 1 variable display of normal game state> special 1 of specific game state. Variable display).

When the reach effect is selected from multiple patterns and executed, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is the total type of reach effect rather than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. The number may be small.

Related effects such as the operation effect of the movable member and the vibration effect of the operation buttons, which are performed in association with the reach effect at appropriate timings such as during or before the reach effect, can be selected from a plurality of patterns and executed. In this case, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution ratio of the related effect performed in connection with the reach effect than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the number of types of related effects performed in connection with the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state.

The rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SPSP reach is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution period of the reach effect is shorter in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution ratio of the reach effect over a plurality of variations than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Specific production example 5)
A specific example 5 of the effect of variable display will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. In addition, the effect specific example 5 is in a specific gaming state, and a first specific notification SR1 is performed to guide the right-handed area of the first image display device 70 to perform a right-handed strike.

As shown in FIG. 189, at the timing of P0, the second hold number U2 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m due to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47 is from "3" to "4". Increase to. At this time, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol hold indicator 64 changes from "3" to "4". The first hold number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110 m is "0", and the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED in the first special symbol hold display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub second hold indicator 84 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one hold icon T2 is additionally displayed (displayed so as to gradually increase from the minimum size) as an animation for 10 frames in the second hold icon display area 70D (see FIG. 190 (a)). Further, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E is "0". Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold display 83 is "0", and the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B.

Next, at the timing of P1, the variation display of the second special symbol is started as the second reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". To. Further, in the second special symbol hold indicator 64, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED changes from "4" to "3". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the second hold number U2 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "4" to "3".

At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub second hold indicator 84 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the hold icon T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub second variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part (see FIG. 190 (b)).

At the timing of P2, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190 (c)).

Further, based on the winning of the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "right-handed" is displayed at the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 is displayed. Then, for example, the second specific notification SR2 in which a voice output such as "Please hit right" is executed (see FIG. 190 (c)).

After that, at the timing of P3, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“789”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 190 (d)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P6, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the second special symbol display 61. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“789”) (see FIG. 190 (e)), and the second lamp is used. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P5, when the stop time of the special symbol elapses, the second reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 2 The variable display of the special symbol is started. Further, in the second special symbol hold indicator 64, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED changes from "3" to "2". Further, a process is performed for starting the variable effect by changing the first hold number U1 stored (grasping) by the effect control unit 130 m from "3" to "2". The main control unit 110m also has a first hold memory based on the winning of the first winning opening 45, but the second holding memory based on the winning of the second starting opening 47 has priority, and the variation effect is performed. Will be.

At this time, the second reserved number U2 indicated by the second reserved number displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the second hold number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub second hold indicator 84 changes from "3" to "2". Further, the hold icon T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation for 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variation display of the first lamp symbol on the effect symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub second variation display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a is partially operated as in the present embodiment. Scrolling is started after performing a preparatory operation such as performing an operation or performing an expansion / contraction operation in whole or in part (see FIG. 190 (f)).

At the timing of P6, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 45, the first reserved number U1 stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol hold indicator 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reserved number U1 indicated by the first reserved number displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in the non-animation for one frame. Further, the first hold number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub first hold indicator 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190 (g)).

Further, based on the winning of the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "right-handed" is displayed at the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 is displayed. Then, for example, the second specific notification SR2 in which a voice output such as "Please hit right" is executed (see FIG. 190 (g)).

After that, at the timing of P7, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation effect, the effect symbol 70a on the left, middle, and right is temporarily stopped in the loss mode (“913”). At this time, in addition to the effect symbol 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the symbol effect image ZE constituting the effect symbol 70a fluctuate. Perform an action (directing action). Further, the hold icon T and the icon TH are in a state of performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (see FIG. 190 (h)).

Then, when the fluctuation time of the special symbol elapses at the timing of P8, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the lost mode on the second special symbol display 61. In addition, the effect control unit 130 m performs a process for ending the variable effect.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, but the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as an animation for 10 frames. Further, the effect symbol 70a that has been temporarily stopped is finally stopped at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ is finally stopped in a predetermined loss mode (“913”) (see FIG. 190 (j)), and the second lamp is used. The symbol is stopped in a lost manner (for example, turned off).

In this way, in addition to the first specific notification suggesting that the player is in the specific gaming state, and the first specific notification based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning opening 45 when the first specific notification is being executed. The second specific notification to be performed is feasible. By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The second specific notification SR2 is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 in the specific game state, unlike the right-handed notification notified at the start of the jackpot game.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (hit implied effect) such as a notification sound effect, a light emission effect such as a start port, or a hold icon change effect, but the second specific notification SR1 is executed. At that time, a predetermined effect such as a notification sound effect, a light emission effect such as a start port, or a hold icon effect (execution of a hit implied effect can be restricted. It can be said that the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of the execution of the effect.

Further, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (hit suggestion effect) is smaller when both the first specific notification SR1 and the second specific notification SR2 are executed than when only the first specific notification SR1 is executed.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Specific production example 6)
As a notification effect (advance notification effect) that expects the execution of the jackpot game, the first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation) and the second notification is executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of winning the start opening). There is. For example, in the embodiment, a first light emitting mode (see FIG. 191 (a)) in which the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) blinks in blue, for example, at the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a (special symbol), and the winning opening. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first notification with the second light emitting mode (see FIG. 191 (b)) in which the lamp NR (starting port 45, 47) is blinked in red, for example, which is different from the first light emitting mode. Further, when the game balls are awarded to the starting ports 45 and 47, for example, the winning opening lamp NR and the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 or the frame lighting device are different from the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second notification according to the third light emission mode (see FIGS. 191 (d) and (e)) in which the 10s are combined to emit light. In addition, even in the second notification, the first light emitting mode and / or the second light emitting mode may be executed. Further, as the notification effect, it has a fourth light emitting mode (see FIGS. 192 (c) and 192 (f)), which is different from the first to third light emitting modes, for example, without emitting light from the winning opening lamp NR.

As shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has the first light emitting mode, the second light emitting mode, and the third light emitting mode in the notification effect, rather than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the light emitting mode is small (p31 <p11). Further, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emitting mode is larger in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (p32> p12). That is, it is more difficult to execute the first light emitting mode, the second light emitting mode, and the third light emitting mode in the notification effect in the case of hitting left in the specific gaming state than in the case of hitting left in the normal gaming state. Further, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed when the player strikes the left in the specific gaming state than when the player strikes the left in the normal gaming state.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player notices that it is disadvantageous to make the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. Can be made. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As the notification effect, the first notification can be executed in the first light emitting mode, the second light emitting mode, and the third light emitting mode, and the second notification can be executed in the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode. The third light emission mode may be infeasible in the notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state is the first light emitting mode in the notification effect, rather than the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution ratios of the second light emitting mode and the third light emitting mode are small (p31 <p11). Further, the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth light emitting mode is larger in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (p32> p12). That is, it is more difficult to execute the first light emitting mode, the second light emitting mode, and the third light emitting mode in the notification effect in the case of hitting left in the specific gaming state than in the case of hitting left in the normal gaming state. In addition, the fourth light emission mode in the notification effect is more likely to be executed when the player strikes the left in the specific gaming state than when the player strikes the left in the normal gaming state.

Even in this way, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. Can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

As shown in FIG. 191, the vibration effect is performed by the operation button 17 in cooperation with the above-mentioned notification effect. The vibration effect is expected to be a big hit game by vibrating the operation button 17, and may be executed in combination with the button light emission effect that causes the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, in the first light emitting mode (see FIG. 191 (a)) in which the winning port lamp NR (starting port 45,47) is blinked in blue, for example, the winning port lamp NR (starting port 45,47) is first emitted. It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first notification by, for example, a second light emitting mode (see FIG. 191 (b)) in which the light flashes in red, which is different from the mode. Further, a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode, for example, a combination of a winning opening lamp NR and another light emitting means such as a panel lighting device 76 such as a decorative frame 41 or a frame lighting device 10 to emit light. It is possible to execute the second notification according to the three light emission modes (see FIGS. 191 (d) and 191 (e)).

As shown in FIG. 193, in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is larger in the second notification than in the first notification (q12> q11). That is, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. Further, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (r3 <r1). That is, it is more difficult to execute the vibration effect when the player hits the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the left in the normal game state.

The vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern executed over a fixed period or a pattern executed intermittently at predetermined intervals. Further, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns, such as a weak effect pattern such as vibrating without emitting light by itself, or a strong effect pattern such as vibrating while emitting light by itself. Then, the total pattern of the vibration effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the vibration effect of the weak effect pattern and the strong effect pattern can be executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, but the weak effect pattern is displayed in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state. While it is possible to regulate the execution of the vibration effect of the above, it may be possible to execute the vibration effect of the strong effect pattern.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The light emitting effect is not limited to the start port lamp NR, and other parts such as a game board or a frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 191, it is possible to execute a light emission effect by the winning opening lamp NR, an operation effect of the first movable member 73, and a vibration effect of the operation button 17 in accordance with the timing at the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a. .. Here, the light emitting effect is such that only the winning opening lamp NR emits light, the winning opening lamp NR and the other first movable member 73, the operation button 17, the game board (lighting device for the board), the specific position of the frame, and the like. It is possible to select and execute from a plurality of patterns, such as a mode in which light is emitted in combination. Further, the light emission effect can be executed by selecting a light emission color such as blue, red, or rainbow color from a plurality of patterns. Further, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak operation and strong operation. Further, the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be selected and executed from a plurality of patterns having different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 191 in the present embodiment, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the light emission effect at the winning opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are varied. It can be executed at the start timing. Similarly, in the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, even if the light emission effect at the winning opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) can be executed at the timing of the start of the variation. good. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the light emission effect at the winning opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing at the start of the variation. It has become. In the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the light emission effect at the winning opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) may not be executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times. ..

In this way, the total number of types of suggestive effects executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. .. The timing of executing the effect may be at the time of winning, during fluctuations, at the time of stopping fluctuations, or the like.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

(Variations of Specific Examples 1 to 6)
The effect symbol 70a is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state, but the effect symbol 70a is not displayed or scrolls even if it is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state. May be good. Further, the effect symbol 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state, but the effect symbol 70a is not displayed or scrolls even if it is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state. You may do it. By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win the game ball. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Even when the hold icon is not displayed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, the related display such as the pedestal for decorating the hold icon may be displayed.

The effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared or separated. Further, the effect symbol 70a used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the effect symbol 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be shared or separated.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state may be separated without being shared. Further, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific gaming state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state may be separated without being shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state and the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state. Further, the display position and / or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state and the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state.

The reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separated. Further, the reserved numbers used in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separated.

It is possible to combine and execute advance notice effects with different execution times. At the start of the fluctuation, the degree of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action at the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol itself or the character of the effect symbol, the change start order of the effect symbol, and the like. Further, at the end (stop) of the change, the degree of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action at the start of the change of the effect symbol itself or the character of the effect symbol, the change start order of the effect symbol, and the like. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice effect in one or more variable displays, the conversation advance notice by the display means such as the liquid crystal display in the first half (first period) of the variable display, the cut-in notice, the development destination roulette effect, Long press effect of operation button 17, repeated hit effect, hold icon change and icon change, display effect of light guide plate, operation effect of movable members 73,74 (suggestion / development / decision effect), vibration effect of operation button (suggestion / Development / decision effect), timer effect, lamp emission effect of start ports 45, 47, etc. can be executed individually or in combination. Furthermore, in the latter half of the execution period of the advance notice effect with one or more variable displays, the development effect by the display means such as the liquid crystal display, the decision effect, and the display effect of the light guide plate (light emission according to the result of the decision effect, etc.). , Vibration effect of operation button 17 (suggestion / development / decision effect), operation effect of frame accessory and board accessory (movable members 73,74), jackpot type suggestion effect (○○ bonus, etc.), timer effect, hold change It is possible to carry out the lamp emission effect of the starting ports 45, 47, etc. according to the above, alone or in combination.

In this case, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution time is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution time than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution time than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. Further, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution time than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

If there is a first effect performed in the first half of the execution period and a second effect performed in the second half of the execution period as the advance notice effect, the first effect and the second effect are displayed in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. However, while the first effect can be executed by the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state, the execution of the second effect may be restricted. Further, while the first effect and the second effect can be executed by the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, the first effect can be executed by the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state. The execution of the second effect may be restricted by.

Even in this way, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. Can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

The execution ratio of various effects that are expected to execute the jackpot game, which is performed in the special 1 variable display in the above-mentioned specific game state (time-saving game state or probability variation game state), may be "0".

In the various effects (collectively referred to as hit suggestion effects) that are expected to execute the above-mentioned jackpot game, only one effect (display) pattern may be set, but a plurality of effect (display) patterns may be set. You may select from and execute. The hit suggestion effect is not limited to the difference in the execution ratio due to the relationship between the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, and the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, for example. In the hit suggestion effect, the execution ratios of a plurality of patterns that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state (special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state) are the same. May be different.

For example, when the hit suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the execution ratio of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the hit suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is used. Even if the same or corresponding first pattern and the same or corresponding second pattern of the specific pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state have the same execution ratio, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state And the execution rate may be different. Due to the difference in the execution ratio of the patterns as described above, it is disadvantageous to let the first winning opening 45 win the game ball even if the player mistakenly hits the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that it is. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

For example, when the expected degree display by the color effect is selected from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", "red" that can be selected in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the "red" color effect that can be selected in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state may be smaller than that of the color effect. In this case, the execution ratios of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that the same can be applied not only to the expected degree display but also to various effects that expect the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot game. That is, when the hit suggestion effect is selected from a plurality of patterns, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is used from the predetermined pattern that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio may be smaller for a specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the predetermined pattern that can be selected. By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Here, the pattern selected in the hit suggestion effect or the hit suggestion effect is the timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation, at the stop of the fluctuation, the number of consecutive times), the gaming state, and other patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, etc.). ) May be associated with a predetermined condition, and the execution ratio may be different. For example, when a variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a are stopped in order is selected, the "red" color effect executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state is selected. The "red" color effect executed at the start of the fluctuation in the special 1 fluctuation display of the specific game state may have a smaller execution ratio. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the effect symbol 70a is selected, the “red” by the winning opening lamp NR executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the "red" color emission effect, which is executed at the start of the fluctuation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, may be smaller than the color emission effect. It should be noted that the same can be applied not only to the expected degree display and the start port light emission effect, but also to various effects that expect the execution of the above-mentioned jackpot game. That is, when the hit suggestion effect is executed under a predetermined condition, the hit suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of the hit suggestion effect) performed by the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state is used. The execution ratio may be smaller in the hit suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of the hit suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state. By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

From the execution period of the hit suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of the hit suggestion effect) performed in the special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display of the specific game state, the hit suggestion effect performed in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state. The execution period of (predetermined pattern of suggestive effect) may be shorter.

When it is possible to execute a joint effect in which multiple types of suggestive effects are performed at the same time, the special 1 variable display in the specific game state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. , The execution rate of the joint production may be small. If there is a joint production that is a combination of multiple types of suggestive effects performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. However, the execution ratio of the predetermined hit suggestion effect in the joint effect may be small. When there is a joint effect that is a combination of multiple types of hit suggestion effects performed at the same time, a predetermined hit suggestion effect and a specific hit suggestion are displayed in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Although the effect can be executed, in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state, the execution of the predetermined hit suggestion effect among the joint effects can be regulated, while the specific hit suggestion effect may be executed. ..

As a definite effect (including a jackpot rich effect), the movable members 73 and 74 are activated and the operation button 17 vibrates at a predetermined timing, and for example, a rainbow display, a rainbow light emission, or the like is used to display a predetermined mode. There is one effect and a second effect performed at a timing different from that of the first effect (for example, at the start of change, during change, at stop of change, etc.). The second effect is, for example, a definite notification sound output at the start of fluctuation, a pending change in a rainbow mode, or a definite change definite effect that expects the execution of a probable change depending on the effect such as a battle victory. It is feasible and has multiple patterns.

The finalized effect is a special 1 variable display of the normal gaming state or a special 2 variable display of the specific gaming state, and a special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state. It's different. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the final effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the final effect may be smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. Further, the execution ratio of one of the first effect and the second effect of the final effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. You may. At this time, the execution ratios of the other of the first effect and the second effect of the final effect may be the same or different.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the first and second effects of the final effect can be executed, but in the special 1 variation effect in the specific game state, at least the second effect is possible. Of these, it is advisable to regulate the execution of a predetermined pattern. For example, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the first effect and the operation accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation buttons 17 are executed as the definite effect, while the movable member. The pattern of the second effect accompanied by the operation of 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing so, even if the player accidentally hits the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous for the player to win the game ball in the first winning opening 45. It can be noticed. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning opening 47 in the specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. ..

Although the hit suggestion effect in the variation display of the loss determination has been explained, the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state and the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state are also described in the variation display of the collision determination. The relationship may be the same as in the case of the loss determination.

As explained above, a player who has a sense of discomfort in the degree or type of execution of the expected effect (suggestion effect) in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. Is possible. In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager confirms the control part that controls the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the configuration of the effect in the special 1 variable display of the specific gaming state described above, the configuration of the board case described later makes it easier for the hobby manager to confirm, and reduces the stress of the player to play the game. It is possible to improve the interest of.

-In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol) to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect) that expects the execution of the special game based on the determination can be executed, and the variation based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. The variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect) is smaller than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of executing a variable display and is expected to execute the special game over a predetermined period based on the determination is provided for a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of the predetermined variation display period based on the determination, and is based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution rate of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol) to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) that is expected to execute the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the first first in the normal game state. The execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) is smaller in the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than in the variation display based on the start condition. It is characterized by.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). It is possible to execute a variable display, and execute a linked effect (for example, a color effect, a notification sound effect, a light emission effect, a hold icon change effect, an operation effect of a movable member, etc.) that is continuously or related to the variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is more than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state, the linked effect (for example, a color effect, etc.). It is characterized by a small execution ratio of notification sound effect, light emission effect, hold icon change effect, operation effect of movable member, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the hold icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is satisfied changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a color character icon). The icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is the hold icon rather than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the light emission effect (for example, the light emission of the winning opening lamp NR) based on the winning of the first winning means (first winning opening 45) can be executed, and the first one in the normal gaming state. The variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the light emission effect (for example, the light emission of the winning opening lamp NR) is smaller than the variation display based on the start condition of. And.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. The first display means (first image display device 70) has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probabilistic game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and a second display means different from the first display means ( A second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45), or the second winning. The variable display of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the means (second winning opening 47). The second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) includes a first mode (for example, a blue effect) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect). The display effect can be executed, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is the second display than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first aspect (for example, a blue effect) in the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can be operated in an operation mode including a first operation mode (for example, weak operation) and a second operation mode (for example, strong operation such as determination). ) Is feasible, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more movable than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation effect by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect) that expects the execution of the special game based on the determination can be executed, and the variation based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state can be executed. The variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation degree display (for example, a color effect) is smaller than the display.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of executing a variable display and is expected to execute the special game over a predetermined period based on the determination is provided for a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, or a plurality of the above. It can be executed at any timing of the predetermined variation display period based on the determination, and is based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution rate of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) that expects the execution of the special game can be executed based on the determination, and the second second in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, the notification sound when the hold icon changes) is smaller in the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than in the variation display based on the start condition. It is characterized by.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). It is possible to execute a variable display, and execute a linked effect (for example, a color effect, a notification sound effect, a light emission effect, a hold icon change effect, an operation effect of a movable member, etc.) that is continuously or related to the variable display a plurality of times. It is possible, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution ratio of notification sound effect, light emission effect, hold icon change effect, operation effect of movable member, etc.).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the display mode of the hold icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed when the start condition is satisfied changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a color character icon). The icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is the hold icon rather than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆ In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the light emission effect (for example, the light emission of the winning opening lamp NR) based on the winning of the first winning means (first winning opening 45) can be executed, and the second one in the specific gaming state. The variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the light emission effect (for example, the light emission of the winning opening lamp NR) is smaller than the variation display based on the start condition of. And.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. The first display means (first image display device 70) has a specific game state (time-saving game state, probabilistic game state) that is more advantageous than the game state, and a second display means different from the first display means ( A second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45), or the second winning. The variable display of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the first display means (first image display device 70) based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the means (second winning opening 47). The second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) includes a first mode (for example, a blue effect) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect). The display effect can be executed, and the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is the second display than the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect by the first aspect (for example, a blue effect) in the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) can be operated in an operation mode including a first operation mode (for example, weak operation) and a second operation mode (for example, strong operation such as determination). ) Is feasible, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more movable than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation effect by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). When the variation display can be executed and the first start condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the effect symbol is displayed without displaying or operating the specific variation display (for example, the hold icon from the start to the end of the variation display). 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ is variablely displayed), and the specific variable display is not executed when the first start condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. ..
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of (effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned are described. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible, and when the variation display based on the first start condition is executed in the normal gaming state, the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized in that a predetermined effect of an effect mode (for example, a color effect, a zone effect, a hold icon change, a notification sound, light emission, an operation of a movable member, etc.) can be executed.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). When the variation display can be executed and the first start condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the effect symbol is displayed without displaying or operating the specific variation display (for example, the hold icon from the start to the end of the variation display). 70a or at least one of the special effect symbols TZ is variablely displayed), and the specific variable display is not executed when the second start condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state. ..
In order to solve the above problem, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of (effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned are described. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible, and when the variation display based on the second start condition is executed in the specific gaming state, the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized in that a predetermined effect of an effect mode (for example, a color effect, a zone effect, a hold icon change, a notification sound, light emission, an operation of a movable member, etc.) can be executed.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and in the normal gaming state, the hold display according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specificity is specified. It is characterized in that, in a gaming state, a hold display according to an increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, does not operate or does not display) different from the predetermined mode.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned normal gaming state are used. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and in the specific gaming state, the hold display according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds based on the second start condition can be displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, an operation such as rotation), and the specific state can be displayed. It is characterized in that, in a gaming state, a hold display according to an increase or decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, does not operate or does not display) different from the predetermined mode.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol) to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The fluctuation display can be executed, and the average fluctuation display time and the maximum hold in the maximum number of holdings (for example, holding 4) when the fluctuation display of the loss determination by the first start condition is executed in the normal gaming state. Based on the difference from the average fluctuation display time in the predetermined number of holdings (for example, holding 1), which is smaller than the number, the maximum number of holdings when the fluctuation display of the loss determination according to the first starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state. The difference between the average fluctuation display time in (for example, holding 4) and the average fluctuation display time in a predetermined holding number (for example, holding 1), which is smaller than the maximum number of holdings, is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The specific game can be executed from the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings when the variable display of the loss determination by the first start condition is executed in the normal game state. When the variation display of the loss determination according to the first start condition is executed in the state, the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the loss determination based on the first start condition is performed in the specific gaming state, as compared with the case where the variation display of the loss determination based on the first start condition is executed in the normal gaming state. The case of executing the variation display is characterized in that the ratio of the same variation pattern being executed is larger in the first hold number (for example, hold 4) and the second hold number (for example, hold 1).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol) to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The fluctuation display can be executed, and the average fluctuation display time and the maximum hold in the maximum number of holdings (for example, holding 4) when the fluctuation display of the loss determination by the second start condition is executed in the specific gaming state. Based on the difference from the average fluctuation display time in the predetermined number of holdings (for example, holding 1), which is smaller than the number, the maximum number of holdings when the fluctuation display of the loss determination according to the first starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state. The difference between the average fluctuation display time in (for example, holding 4) and the average fluctuation display time in a predetermined holding number (for example, holding 1), which is smaller than the maximum number of holdings, is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the specific game is based on the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of pending numbers when the variable display of the loss determination according to the second start condition is executed in the specific game state. When the variation display of the loss determination according to the first start condition is executed in the state, the number of patterns of the variation display time determined by the predetermined number of holdings is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the loss determination according to the first start condition is performed in the specific gaming state, as compared with the case where the variation display of the loss determination according to the second start condition is executed in the specific gaming state. The case of executing the variation display is characterized in that the ratio of the same variation pattern being executed is larger in the first hold number (for example, hold 4) and the second hold number (for example, hold 1).

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the operation effect (for example, the preparation operation and the stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and / or end of the variation display, and the first in the normal gaming state. The symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and / or end of the variation display by the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than the variation display based on the start condition of 1. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the motion effect (for example, preparation motion and stop motion) of is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the operation effect (for example, the preparation operation and the stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and / or end of the variation display, and the first in the normal gaming state. The symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and / or end of the variation display by the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than the variation display based on the start condition of 1. It is characterized in that the number of types of motion effects (for example, preparation motion and stop motion) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible, and the variation display is displayed in the first aspect (for example, 1 to 9) of the symbol and the second aspect (for example, having no numerical information) displayed at a predetermined timing of the variation display. It is feasible to use the symbol (such as a symbol), and the variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. , The second aspect (for example, a special symbol having no numerical information) is displayed in a small proportion.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the operation effect (for example, the preparation operation and the stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and / or end of the variation display, and the first item in the specific gaming state. The symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and / or end of the variation display by the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than the variation display based on the start condition of 2. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the motion effect (for example, preparation motion and stop motion) of is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display can be executed, and the operation effect (for example, the preparation operation and the stop operation) of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and / or end of the variation display, and the first item in the specific gaming state. The symbol (effect symbol 70a) performed at the start and / or end of the variation display by the variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than the variation display based on the start condition of 2. It is characterized in that the number of types of motion effects (for example, preparation motion and stop motion) is small.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbol can be displayed by the first symbol of a predetermined mode (for example, 1 to 9) and the second symbol of a specific mode (for example, a special symbol having no numerical information). The rate at which the first symbol is displayed in the variation effect based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state than in the variation display based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. Is characterized by being large.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). In the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the stop display period are set. From the variation display, which is a loss determination based on the first start condition when there is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time to stop) and the maximum number of holdings in the normal gaming state. The variation display, which is a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holdings is in the specific gaming state, has a smaller execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until the stop is short). It is characterized by that.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). In the stop display mode in which the variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped in the first pattern (the first stop display mode). (For example, simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the normal gaming state. From the variation display, which is a loss determination based on the first starting condition when the maximum number of holdings is reached, the variation which is a losing determination based on the first starting condition when the maximum number of holdings is reached in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is larger.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible and is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. The variation display is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display. Is characterized in that the execution rate of the symbol change effect for changing the display size of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible and is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. The variation display is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display. Is characterized by a smaller execution rate of reach production.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). In the stop display mode (for example, the time until stop is short) in which the variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode and the stop display period are set. From the variation display, which is a loss determination based on the second start condition when there is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time until the stop is reached) and the maximum number of holdings is reached in the specific gaming state. The variation display, which is a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holdings is in the specific gaming state, has a smaller execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, the time until the stop is short). It is characterized by that.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). In the stop display mode in which the variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display, the first stop display mode in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped in the first pattern (the first stop display mode). (For example, simultaneous stop) and a second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) in which the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the specific gaming state. From the variation display, which is a loss determination based on the second starting condition when the maximum number of holdings is reached, the variation which is a losing determination based on the first starting condition when the maximum number of holdings is reached in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stop in order) is larger.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible and is a loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. The variation display is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display. Is characterized in that the execution rate of the symbol change effect for changing the display size of the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variation display is feasible and is a loss determination based on the second start condition in the specific gaming state. The variation display is a loss determination based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state from the variation display. Is characterized by a smaller execution rate of reach production.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol) to be executed based on the determination. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned normal gaming state are used as the gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The first specific notification (for example, right-handed display) suggesting that the variable display is feasible and the specific gaming state is being executed, and the first specific notification (right-handed display) are being executed. The feature is that the second specific notification (display or notification different from the right-handed display) performed in addition to the first specific notification (right-handed display) based on the winning of the game ball to the winning means can be executed. And.

◆ In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition that has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). The variable display can be executed, and the light emitting effect and the movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member) at a predetermined position (for example, the starting port lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state can be executed. The operation effect of 74) can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.), and at the predetermined position (for example, starting port lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that it is possible to regulate the execution of the light emitting effect and the operation effect of the movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) at a predetermined timing (for example, a winning timing, a fluctuation start timing, etc.). do.

◆ In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). As a notification effect that can execute the variation display and expects the execution of the special game, the first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variation) and the first notification performed at a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning the start opening). The second notification can be executed, and as the first notification, the first mode (for example, the start port lamp NR flashes blue) and the second mode different from the first mode (for example, the start port lamp NR flashes red) It is feasible, and as the second notification, it is feasible in a third aspect different from the first and second aspects (for example, light emission of the start port lamp NR and the lighting device for the panel and / or the frame). The variation display based on the first start condition in the specific gaming state is the execution of the first to third aspects in the notification effect than the variation display based on the first start condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the ratio is small and the execution ratio of the notification effect of the fourth aspect (for example, the start port lamp NR does not emit light) different from the first to third aspects is large.

◆ In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol (a symbol to be executed based on the determination) is executed. When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state are described. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). As a notification effect that can execute the variation display and expects the execution of the special game, the first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the variation) and the first notification performed at a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning the start opening). The second notification can be executed, and as the first notification, a first aspect (for example, the start port lamp NR blinks blue), a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, the start port lamp NR blinks red), and It is feasible in the first aspect and the third aspect different from the second aspect (for example, light emission of the start port lamp NR and the lighting device for the panel and / or the frame), and as the second notification, the first aspect is described. The specific gaming state can be executed in the same manner as in the first aspect and the second aspect, and cannot be executed in the same aspect as the third aspect. The variation display based on the first start condition in the above is a fourth aspect (for example, a start port lamp) in which the execution ratio of the first to third aspects in the notification effect is smaller and different from the first to third aspects. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effect (NR does not emit light) is large.

◆ In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning of winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol to be executed based on the determination (a symbol (1). When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a) becomes a predetermined special result, in the gaming machine (1) capable of executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned normal gaming state are used. Based on the first starting condition, which has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, probabilistic gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is established by winning the game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). Or, based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means (second winning opening 47), the symbol (effect symbol 70a) is displayed in the display means (first image display device 70). As a light emitting effect that can execute the variable display and expects the execution of the special game, the first light emitting mode using the first winning means (starting port lamp NR) and the other in cooperation with the first winning means. It is feasible in the second light emitting mode using the light emitting means (for example, a lighting device for a board and / or a frame), and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting. The second light emitting mode has a larger execution rate of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button) than the embodiment, and is executed in the specific gaming state from the variation display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variation display based on the first starting condition is characterized in that the execution rate of the vibration effect is smaller.
[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the embodiment (third embodiment) shown in the drawings.
<Basic configuration of gaming machines>
194 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing an example of the back surface side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram which showed the structure of the game control device provided in the game machine.

In the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 194, an inner frame (opening / closing frame) 3 is openably and closably attached to an outer frame 2 attached to an island structure of a game hall, and a glass frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate (glass plate) 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10z having a board surface on which the game ball is launched is mounted on the inner frame 3, and a game area 10az in which the game ball rolls and can flow down between the board surface of the game board 10z and the transparent plate on the front side thereof. It is formed. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via the hinge mechanism portion 5z on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side facing the game machine), and the other end side in the left-right direction with the hinge mechanism portion 5z as a fulcrum. (For example, the right side facing the game machine) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 2. The glass frame 4 covers the game board 10z together with the transparent plate, and by rotating like a door with the hinge mechanism portion 5z as a fulcrum, the inner portion of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10z can be opened. On the other end side of the glass frame 4, a lock mechanism for fixing the other end side of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided. It is possible to unlock it with a special key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with an open detection switch 105z for detecting whether or not the glass frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2.

At the lower part of the glass frame 4 (lower part of the window 4a), a plate unit 7z having a storage plate 6z (upper plate 6az and lower plate 6bz) for storing game balls is provided, and the player is provided in the plate unit 7z. The effect button 8z (Fig. 194) that can be pressed, the cross key 40z that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and the discharge button 9z that discharges the game ball stored in the lower plate 6bz to the outside of the game machine. Is equipped.
The effect button 8z is effective only when, for example, a message for operating the effect button 8z is displayed on the image display device 31z described later. The effect button 8z is provided with an effect button detection switch 8az (see FIG. 196), and when the effect button detection switch 8az detects an operation of the player, further effects are executed in response to this operation.
Further, the cross key 40z is provided with a cross key detection switch (up key detection switch, down key detection switch, left key detection switch, right key detection switch).

An operation handle 11z is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. When the player touches the operation handle 11z, the touch sensor 11az (see FIG. 196) in the operation handle 11z detects that the player touches the operation handle 11z and transmits a touch signal to the launch control board 75z. .. When the launch control board 75z receives a touch signal from the touch sensor 11az, the launch control board 75z permits energization of the launch solenoid 12az. Then, when the rotation angle of the operation handle 11z is changed, the knob of the volume 11bz rotates. A voltage corresponding to the detection angle of the firing volume 11bz is applied to the launching solenoid 12az provided in the game ball launching mechanism. Then, when a voltage is applied to the launching solenoid 12az, the launching solenoid 12az operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball has a game area of the game board 10z with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 11z. Fired to 10az.

An outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the game area 10az in the game board 10z. The outer rail R1 and the inner rail R2 guide the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10az when the operation handle 11z is operated. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10az falls in the game area 10az. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 10az.
A center member 12z is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 10z. The center member 12z is provided with an image display device 31z made of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and a production accessory device 32 imitating a “sword”.

Further, a first starting port 13z into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10az on the lower center side of the center member 12z. A second starting port 14z is provided below the first starting port 13z. The second starting port 14z has an opening / closing door 14bz, and is movably controlled in a first aspect in which the opening / closing door 14bz is maintained in a closed state and a second aspect in which the opening / closing door 14bz is in an open state. .. Therefore, when the second starting port 14z is in the first aspect, there is no chance of winning a game ball, and when it is in the second aspect, the chance of winning a game ball is increased.
In the present embodiment, when the second starting port 14z is controlled in the first aspect, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 14z. However, if there is less chance of the game ball entering the ball when it is controlled in the first aspect than when it is controlled in the second aspect, the second aspect is controlled when it is controlled in the first aspect. A game ball may enter the starting port 14z. That is, the first aspect includes a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14z.

The first start port 13z and the second start port 14z are provided with a first start port detection switch 13az (see FIG. 196) and a second start port detection switch 14az, respectively, for detecting the entry of a game ball. When these detection switches detect the entry of a game ball, a lottery for acquiring the right to execute a big hit game described later (hereinafter referred to as "big hit lottery") is performed. Further, even when the first start port detection switch 13az and the second start port detection switch 14az detect the entry of a game ball, a predetermined prize ball (for example, three game balls) is paid out.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 13z and the second starting opening 14z, for example, three gaming balls are paid out. It is not always necessary to pay out when entering the ball. Further, the number of payouts may be different for each start port, for example, the number of payouts of the first start port 13z may be three and the number of payouts of the second start port 14z may be one.

Gates 15z through which game balls can pass are provided in the game areas 10az on both sides of the center member 12z. The gate 15z is provided with a gate detection switch 15az (see FIG. 196) that detects the passage of the game ball, and when the gate detection switch 15az detects the passage of the game ball, a lottery of ordinary symbols described later is performed. ..
Further, in the game area 10az on the right side of the center member 12z, a first large winning opening 16 and a second large winning opening 17z in which a game ball can enter are provided. For this reason, the game ball is configured so that the game ball does not win in the first large winning opening 16 and the second large winning opening 17z unless the operating handle 11z is greatly rotated and the game ball is launched with a strong force.

The first large winning opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by the opening / closing door 16bz, making it impossible for a game ball to enter. On the other hand, when the jackpot game described later is started, the opening / closing door 16bz is opened, and the opening / closing door 16bz functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball into the first big winning opening 16, and the game ball becomes the first. It is possible to enter one big winning opening 16. The first big winning opening 16 is provided with a first big winning opening detection switch 16az, and when the first big winning opening detection switch 16az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15) is provided. (Individual game balls) will be paid out.

The second big winning opening 17z is normally kept in a closed state by the movable piece 17bz, which makes it impossible for a game ball to enter. On the other hand, when the jackpot game described later is started, the movable piece 17bz is operated and released, and the movable piece 17bz functions as a taxiway for guiding the game ball into the second big winning opening 17z. The game ball can enter the second taxiway 17z. The second big winning opening 17z is provided with a second big winning opening detection switch 17az, and when the second big winning opening detection switch 17az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15) is provided. (Individual game balls) will be paid out.
Further, a plurality of general winning openings 18z are provided in the game area 10az. When a game ball wins in each of these general prize openings 18z, a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

At the bottom of the game area 10az, a game ball that does not enter any of the general winning opening 18z, the first starting opening 13z, the second starting opening 14z, the first major winning opening 16 and the second major winning opening 17z. An out port 19z is provided for discharging.
The image display device 31z displays an image while the game is not being played, or displays an image according to the progress of the game. In particular, when the game ball enters the first start port 13z or the second start port 14z, the effect symbol 35z for notifying the player of the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner.
The effect symbol 35 is, for example, three symbols (numbers) of the first symbol (left symbol), the second symbol (right symbol), and the third symbol (center symbol) scrolled and displayed, and the corresponding symbol 35 is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. It stops scrolling and displays a specific pattern (number) in an array.

As a result, while scrolling the symbols, the player is given the impression that the lottery is currently being performed, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the symbols displayed when the scrolling is stopped. By displaying various images, characters, and the like during the variable display of the effect symbol 35z, the player is given a high expectation that he may win a big hit.
Further, although not shown, the image display device 31z displays a fourth symbol in addition to the effect symbol 35z. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing a fluctuating state of the effect symbol 35z used for notifying the lottery result by the jackpot lottery process.
The fourth symbol does not necessarily have to be displayed on the image display device 31z, and a fourth symbol display lamp may be separately provided for display.

A pair of left and right lighting devices 33 for directing are mounted on the upper part of the glass frame 4. Each of the effect lighting devices 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and various effects are performed while changing the irradiation direction and emission color of the light of each light.
Further, the effect lighting device 33 is provided with a plurality of lights, and various effects are performed while changing the irradiation direction and the emission color of the light of each light.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 194, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a sound output device 34 (see FIG. 196) including speakers, and in addition to the above-mentioned effect devices, BGM (background music), etc. SE (sound effect) etc. are output, and the production by sound is also performed.

In the lower left side of the game area 10az, a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, and a second special symbol hold display 24, which will be described later, are located. , Ordinary symbol hold display 25z, round count display 26z, and other display areas are provided.
The first special symbol display device 20z notifies the result of a big hit lottery performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. That is, a plurality of special symbols corresponding to the jackpot lottery result are provided, and the lottery result is played by displaying the special symbol (lighting mode) corresponding to the jackpot lottery result on the first special symbol display device 20z. I try to notify people. The special symbol displayed in this way is not immediately displayed, but is stopped and displayed after being displayed (blinking) for a predetermined time.
More specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z, a big hit lottery is performed, but the big hit lottery result is not immediately notified to the player, and a predetermined time is set. The player will be notified when the time has passed. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the big hit lottery result is stopped and displayed so that the player is notified of the lottery result.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the result of the lottery of the jackpot performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z, and the display mode thereof is the above-mentioned first special symbol. It is the same as the display mode of the special symbol in the display device 20z.
The ordinary symbol display device 22 is for notifying the lottery result of the ordinary symbol performed when the game ball passes through the gate 15z. As will be described in detail later, when a predetermined hit is won by the lottery of the ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14z is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined time. As for this normal symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 15z, and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, such as blinking the normal symbol display device 22 until a predetermined time elapses. I try to do it.
Further, when the game ball enters the first start opening 13z or the second start opening 14z and the big hit lottery cannot be performed immediately, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the special game described later, certain conditions are met. Underneath, the right to the jackpot lottery is reserved. More specifically, the right of the jackpot lottery in which the game ball enters the first starting port 13z and is reserved is reserved as the first hold, and the game ball enters and is reserved in the second starting port 14z. The right to the jackpot lottery is reserved as a second hold.

For each of these reservations, the upper limit reservation number is set to 4, and the reservation number is displayed on the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 and the second special symbol reservation indicator 24, respectively.
The upper limit number of reserved symbols is also set to 4, and the reserved number is displayed in the same manner as the first special symbol reservation indicator 23 and the second special symbol reservation indicator 24. It is displayed in the vessel 25z.
The round number display 26z is for notifying the number of rounds of the round game performed during the special game described later.

As shown in FIG. 196, on the back surface of the gaming machine 1, a main control board 50z, an effect control board 55z, a payout control board 60z, a lamp control board 65z, an image control board 70z, a launch control board 75z, a power supply board 80z, and a game. An information output terminal plate 27z or the like is provided. Further, the power supply board 80z is provided with a power plug 81z for supplying electric power to the gaming machine and a power switch (not shown).
The image control board 70z is provided with a volume changeover switch 36z for switching the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 34.

A game control device for controlling the progress of a game in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 196.
In FIG. 196, the main control board 50z controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 50z includes at least a one-chip microcomputer composed of a main CPU 50az, a main ROM 50bz, and a main RAM 50cz, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.
Based on the input signal from each detection switch, the main CPU 50az reads the program stored in the main ROM 50bz and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or depending on the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards. The main RAM 50cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 50az.

On the input side of the main control board 50z, a first start port detection switch 13az, a second start port detection switch 14az, a gate detection switch 15az, a first big winning opening detection switch 16az, a second big winning opening detection switch 17az, The general winning opening detection switch 18az is connected, and the detection signal of the game ball is input to the main control board 50z.
Further, on the output side of the main control board 50z, a starting port opening / closing solenoid 14cs that opens / closes the opening / closing door 14bz of the second starting port 14z, and a first major winning opening that opens / closes the opening / closing door 16bz of the first winning opening 16z. The opening / closing solenoid 16cz and the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 17cz for opening / closing the movable piece 17bz of the second winning opening 17z are connected.
Further, on the output side of the main control board 50z, a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol hold display 23, and a second special symbol hold display are displayed. 24, a normal symbol hold display 25z, and a round count display 26z are connected, and various signals are output via the output port.
Further, the main control board 50z outputs an external information signal necessary for managing the gaming machine in a hall computer or the like of a gaming store to the gaming information output terminal board 27z.

The main ROM 50bz of the main control board 50z stores a program for game control, which will be described later, data necessary for various games, and a table.
Further, the main RAM 50cz of the main control board 50z has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, in the main RAM 50cz, a normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, a normal symbol holding storage area, a first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, and a determination storage area , 1st special symbol storage area, 2nd special symbol storage area, high probability game count (X) storage area, time saving game count (J) storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) storage area , 1st prize-winning number of balls (C1) storage area, 2nd prize-winning number of balls (C2) storage area, game state storage area, game state buffer, stop symbol data storage area, transmission data storage area for effect Etc. are provided. The game state storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high-probability game flag storage area, a special figure special electric processing data storage area, and a normal figure general electric processing data storage area. The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27z is a board for outputting an external information signal generated by the main control board 50z to a hall computer or the like of a game store. The game information output terminal board 27z is connected to the main control board 50z by wiring, and is provided with a connector for connecting to a hall computer or the like of a game store.
The main control board 80z converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply plug 81z into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. Further, the main control board 80z is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less, a power failure detection signal is sent to the main control board 50z. Output. More specifically, when the power failure detection signal becomes a high level, the main CPU 50az becomes an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal becomes a low level, the main CPU 50az becomes an operation stop state. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or a capacitor and a battery may be used in combination.

The effect control board 55z mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The effect control board 55z includes a sub CPU 55az, a sub ROM 55bz, and a sub RAM 55cz, and is connected to the main control board 50z so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 50z to the effect control board 55z. ..
The sub CPU 55az reads and calculates a program stored in the sub ROM 55bz based on a command transmitted from the main control board 50z or an input signal from the effect button detection switch 8az input via the lamp control board 65z. Along with performing the processing, the corresponding data is transmitted to the lamp control board 65z or the image control board 150 based on the processing. The sub RAM 55cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 55az.

The sub ROM 55bz of the effect control board 55z stores a program for effect control, data necessary for various games, and a table.
For example, a variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining an effect pattern based on a variation pattern designation command received from the main control board 50z, and an effect symbol pattern determination for determining a combination of the effect symbol 35z to be stopped and displayed. A table (not shown) and the like are stored in the sub ROM 55bz. It should be noted that the above-mentioned table is merely an example of a characteristic table among the tables in the present embodiment, and a large number of tables and programs (not shown) are provided in the progress of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 55cz of the effect control board 55z has a plurality of storage areas.
The sub RAM 55cz includes a command reception buffer, a game state storage area, an effect mode storage area, an effect pattern storage area, an effect symbol storage area, a determination storage area (0th storage area), a first hold storage area, and a second hold storage area. Etc. are provided. The above-mentioned storage area is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.
Further, the effect control board 55z is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock) 55d that outputs the current time. The sub CPU 55az inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 55d, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC55d is normally operated by the power supply from the gaming machine when the power is supplied to the gaming machine, and is supplied from the backup power supply mounted on the main control board 80z when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. Works by. Therefore, the RTC55d can measure the current date and time even when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. The RTC 55d may be operated by a battery provided on the effect control board 55z.

The payout control board 60z controls the launch of the game ball and the payout control of the prize ball. The payout control board 60z includes a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and is bidirectionally connected to the main control board 50 so as to be communicable. The payout CPU 60az reads out the program stored in the payout ROM 60bz based on the input signals from the payout ball counting switch 106z and the open detection switch 105z for detecting whether or not the game ball has been paid out, and performs arithmetic processing. Based on the process, the corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 50z.

Further, a payout motor 107 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the storage portion of the game balls to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 60z. The payout CPU 60az reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 60bz and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 50z, and controls the payout motor 107 of the prize ball payout device to perform a predetermined prize. Pay out the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM 60cz functions as a data work area at the time of arithmetic processing of the payout CPU 60az.
Further, it is confirmed whether the game ball lending device (card unit) (not shown) is connected to the payout control board 60z, and if the game ball lending device (card unit) is connected, the game ball is launched to the launch control board 75z. Send launch control data to allow it.
Further, a dish full tank detection switch 51z and a ball jam detection switch 52z are connected to the payout control board 60z.

When the launch control board 75z receives the launch control data from the payout control board 60z, the launch control board 75z permits the launch. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az and the input signal from the firing volume 11bz are read out, the firing solenoid 12az and the ball feed solenoid 12bz are energized and controlled to fire the game ball.
The firing solenoid 12az is composed of a rotary solenoid. A launching member (not shown) is directly connected to the launching solenoid 12az, and the launching member is rotated by the rotation of the launching solenoid 12az.
Here, the rotation speed of the firing solenoid 12az is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided on the firing control board 75z. As a result, the number of firing game balls in one minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute) because one is fired for each rotation of the firing solenoid. That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.
The ball feed solenoid 12bz is composed of a straight-moving solenoid, and feeds the game balls in the upper plate 6az (see FIG. 194) one by one toward the launching member directly connected to the launching solenoid 12az.

The lamp control board 65z is connected to the effect control board 55z so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the effect button detection switch 8a provided on the effect button 8z is connected to the input side thereof. When the detection signal is input from 8az, it is output to the effect control board 55z.
Further, the effect accessory device 32 and the effect lighting device 33 provided on the game board 10z are connected to the lamp control board 65z, and the lamp control board 65z is used for the data transmitted from the effect control board 55z. Based on this, the lighting control of the effect lighting device 33 and the drive control of the motor for changing the irradiation direction of the light are performed. In addition, a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the effect device 32 is energized and controlled. In this embodiment, since the effect button 8z is configured to protrude, the effect accessory device 32 includes the effect button 8z.
Further, the above-mentioned panel lamp 100z and frame lamp 101z are connected to the lamp control board 65z.
The image control board 150 is connected to the effect control board 55z so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 are connected to the output side thereof.

The main control board 50z will be further described.
A performance display monitor 600, a setting display monitor 650, a setting key switch 660, a setting switch 670, and an RWM clear switch 680 are further connected to the main control board 50z.
Although these details will be described later, the performance display monitor 600 displays the performance of the gaming machine, that is, the base value.
The base value is a numerical value indicating how much the payout is in the normal state (low probability time reduction timeless) excluding special states such as big hit, probability variation game state, and time reduction game state, for example, low probability time reduction. If there are 50 prize balls when the player launches 100 game balls at no time, the base is 50.
The value obtained by calculating the base value of the low probability time reduction and no time is displayed on the performance display monitor 600 for each predetermined number of launches (usually 60,000) in all the game states including the jackpot, the probability variation game state, and the time reduction game state.
In addition, in a gaming machine having a setting function, the probability of winning a big hit can be changed by changing the setting.
The set value may be displayed on the setting display monitor 650 provided separately from the performance display monitor 600, or the performance display monitor 600 may also serve as the setting display monitor 650 to display the set value. In that case, it is not necessary to separately provide the setting display monitor 650.
Instead of providing the setting switch 670 for changing the setting of the gaming machine, the RWM clear switch 680 may be used instead.

Details will be described later, but an operation of changing and confirming the settings of the gaming machine using the performance display monitor 600 will be described.
When the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened (the glass frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2), the setting key switch 660 is turned on, and the power is turned on with the RWM clear switch 680 pressed, the performance display monitor 600 is displayed at the present time. The settings are displayed and the settings can be switched.
The setting is, for example, in 6 stages of "1" to "6", and each time the RWM clear switch 680 is operated, the set value is added and displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and after "6", "6" is followed by ". Return to "1".
After selecting the setting, when the setting key switch 660 is turned off, the setting is confirmed by the setting displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and a dot is displayed on the performance display monitor 600 together with the set value display.

The display of the setting is switched to the performance display at regular intervals, and the game is ready for play. In addition, the RWM of the main control board is cleared.
During the setting switching, notification is performed by the effect display and the sound effect.
Further, when the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on, the current setting is displayed and the dot is displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting can be confirmed. Become.
While the settings are being confirmed, notification is given by the effect display and sound effects.

Next, the effect button 8z is incorporated in the central portion of the dish unit 7z.
The effect button 8z is configured to be able to advance and retreat over a normal operation position (not shown), a pressing position that moves in and out below the normal operation position, and a protruding operation position that protrudes upward from the normal operation position. .. Further, the effect button 8z is configured so that the pressing operation can be performed from an arbitrary position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the pressing position.
In this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8z is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

<Structure on the back of the game board>
Next, the configuration on the back side of the game board will be described.
FIG. 197 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame body 130z, and FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197.
As shown in FIGS. 195, 197, 198, etc., a base frame body (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 10z to form a base. An image display unit (image display device 31z and image display cover 165) 160 is attached to the back surface side (rear surface side) of the frame body 130z so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is attached to the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a board protection in which a main control board is housed in the lower back surface of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166. The case (board case) 200 is attached.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130z is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the front surface 131 of the annular body is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10z. There is a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts on the back surface of the base frame 130z.
An effect control board 55z is arranged on the back side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back surface of the base frame body 130z. The image display unit 160 slides from the side (horizontal direction), vertical direction, or diagonal direction of the base frame 130z with respect to the gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the effect control board. It is configured so that it can be installed freely.
Various circuit boards arranged on the back surface of the base frame body 130z are covered with the lid member 170 (FIGS. 197 and 198).

As shown in FIG. 197, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 included in the main control board 50z are exposed on the back side of the board case 200z.
Further, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 included in the main control board 50z can be visually recognized via the transparent board case 200z.
The staff of the gaming store opens the door of the gaming machine and operates the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 while visually observing the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 on the back of the gaming machine to clear the RWM. You can change settings, check game performance, and perform other operations.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50z is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 that can be operated by the staff of the amusement shop or the like can be operated from the opening provided at the position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680 in the board case 200z. It stands out. When the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. As a result, the RWM clear switch 680 is operated.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50z.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening provided in the board case 200z.
Amusement shop staff and the like can operate by inserting a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660.

<Main control board>
Next, various operations performed by the main control board 50z, which is the main control board of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described.
FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers acquired on the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1, where (a) is a random number for special symbol determination, (b) is a random number for jackpot symbol determination, and (c) is reach determination. Random numbers for use and (d) are diagrams showing examples of random numbers for auxiliary symbol determination.
In the main control board 50z, the special symbol is determined by the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (a) and the jackpot symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (b). Further, the auxiliary symbol is determined by the random number for determining the auxiliary symbol shown in FIG. 199 (d).

As the random number for determining the special symbol shown in FIG. 199 (a), one random number value is acquired from, for example, random numbers from "0" to "60,000" at the time of winning the starting opening.
As described above, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can change the probability of winning a big hit (determined as a big hit) by making settings using the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, and the like.
It should be noted that the pachinko machine 1 may not be provided with the setting key switch 660, the setting switch 670, and the like described above, and it may not be possible to change the probability of winning the jackpot.
Even if the gaming machine is provided with the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670, the prepared setting may be only "1" and it may be virtually impossible to change the probability of winning the jackpot.

A random number for determining a special symbol when the setting can be changed will be described.
When the setting is "1", in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), the jackpot ratio is set to 1/300, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "299", the jackpot is hit. Is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/60, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "1099", it is determined to be a jackpot. Further, in the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (a), a small hit lottery, which is a kind of loss, is also performed. Here, the ratio of small hits is set to 1/300, and when the acquired special symbol determination random value is "2000" to "2199", it is determined to be a small hit. Other than these cases, it is determined to be a loss.

When the setting is "2", in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), the jackpot ratio is set to 1/295, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "302", the jackpot is hit. Is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/59, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "1114", it is determined to be a jackpot. The small hit ratio is set to 1/300, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "2000" to "2199", it is determined to be a small hit. Other than these cases, it is determined to be a loss.

When the setting is "3", in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), the jackpot ratio is set to 1/290, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "306", the jackpot is hit. Is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/58, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "1134", it is determined to be a jackpot. Further, the small hit ratio is set to 1/300, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "2000" to "2199", it is determined to be a small hit. Other than these cases, it is determined to be a loss.

When the setting is "4", in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), the jackpot ratio is set to 1/285, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "309", the jackpot is hit. Is determined.
On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/57, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "100" to "1149", it is determined to be a jackpot. Further, the small hit ratio is set to 1/300, and when the acquired special symbol determination random number value is "2000" to "2199", it is determined to be a small hit.
Other than these cases, it is determined to be a loss.
Although the description of FIG. 199 illustrates four setting values from "1" to "4", the setting values may be six from "1" to "6".

Next, as the big hit symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (b), one random number value is acquired from 250 random numbers from "0" to "249". Then, based on the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value, any one jackpot is determined from a plurality of types of jackpots.
In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpots, a long hit with a normal time reduction, a short hit with a normal time reduction, a long hit with a high probability time reduction, a short hit with a high probability time reduction, and a short hit without a high probability time reduction are prepared.
The time-saving game state is a game state in which a game ball is more likely to win a prize in the second starting port 14z than in the normal game state. That is, when the predetermined condition described later is satisfied, the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz of the second start opening 14z is changed from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win to an open state in which the game ball is easy to win. It refers to a gaming state accompanied by opening support of the second starting opening opening / closing door 14bz, which increases the probability of the game ball entering the starting opening 14z.

In the long hit with normal time reduction, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z at the time of the big hit game is relatively long, and a relatively large amount of balls can be paid out, and after the big hit game is over, It is a big hit that grants a time-saving game for a period until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
In the short hit with normal time reduction, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z at the time of the big hit game is short and the payout of the ball cannot be expected, but after the big hit game, the special symbol is given a predetermined number of times (for example). (100 times) It is a big hit that grants a time-saving game until it fluctuates.

For long hits with high probability time reduction, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z at the time of big hit game is long, and the largest amount of balls can be paid out, and the winning probability of big hit after the big hit game is over. It is a big hit that grants both high-probability games and short-time games.
In the short hit with high probability time reduction, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z at the time of the big hit game is short and the payout of the ball cannot be expected, but the winning probability of the big hit is increased after the big hit game is over. It is a big hit that grants both high-probability games and short-time games.
In the high-probability short-time short hit, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z at the time of the big hit game is short and the payout of the ball cannot be expected, but the winning probability of the big hit is increased after the big hit game is over. It is a big hit that gives a high probability game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, some types of jackpots are selected depending on whether the game ball enters the first starting port 13z or the game ball enters the second starting port 14z. It is configured so that the proportions to be played are different.
For example, the ratio at which the long hit with a normal time reduction is selected is 35/250 in both the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z and the case where the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. .. Similarly, the ratio at which the short hit with the normal time reduction is selected is the same at 15/250 in both the case where the game ball wins in the first start opening 13z and the case where the game ball wins in the second start opening 14z. ..
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the jackpot symbol determination random numbers acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z or the second starting port 14z are "0" to "34". If, the long hit with the normal time reduction is selected, and if it is "35" to "49", the short hit with the normal time reduction is selected.

On the other hand, the ratio at which the high-probability long hit with time reduction and the high-probability short-time hit with time reduction are selected differs depending on whether the game ball wins the first start opening 13z or the second start opening 14z. For example, the ratio of selecting a long hit with a high probability is 25/250 when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z, and 175/250 when the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. To.
In addition, the ratio of selecting the short hit with high probability time reduction is 75/250 when the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z, and 25/250 when the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. To.
Further, the ratio of selecting the high-probability short-time short hit is 100/250 only when the game ball wins the first starting port 13z.
Specifically, if the random value for determining the jackpot symbol acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 13z is "50" to "74", the long hit with high probability time reduction is selected, and "75". If it is "149", a short hit with a high probability time reduction is selected, and if it is "150" to "249", a short hit without a high probability time reduction is selected.
On the other hand, if the random value for determining the jackpot symbol acquired when the game ball wins at the second starting port is "50" to "224", the long hit with high probability time reduction is selected and "225". If it is ~ "249", a short hit with a high probability time reduction is selected.

Further, the reach determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (c) is obtained by acquiring one random number value from 250 random numbers from "0" to "249" at the time of starting winning, and the acquired reach determination random number value. When is "0" to "21", it is determined to be "with reach", and when the acquired random number value for reach determination is "22" to "249", it is determined to be "without reach".

Further, as the auxiliary symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199 (d), one random number value is acquired from 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" when passing through the gate.
Then, in the low-probability gaming state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-probability flag are OFF, or in the high-probability no-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF and the high-probability flag is ON, the acquired auxiliary symbol determination random value is "7. It is judged as a hit only when.
On the other hand, in the low-probability time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is ON and the high-probability flag is OFF, or in the high-probability time-saving game state in which both the time-saving flag and the high-probability flag are ON, the acquired auxiliary symbol determination random value is When it is "0" to "9", it is determined to be a hit.

Next, the main processing executed by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. The process described below can be realized by executing a program in which the main CPU 50az of the main control board 50z is stored in the main ROM 50bz. The description of the random number update process will be omitted.

[Main processing of main control board]
The main process of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG. 200.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing a main process in the main control board. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 80z to the main CPU 50az.
First, the main CPU 50az performs the initial setting process in step S1. Specifically, the preparation process for starting the control of the game, the setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and the initialization of the predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 50cz based on the RWM clear operation. Performs RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, and the like. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S2, the main CPU 50az updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S3, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random value for normal symbol determination is updated.
In step S4, the main CPU 50az is a voltage drop detection signal indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the supply power supply (for example, the supply power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts) from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 80z. Is determined whether or not is input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input (No in step S4), the process is transferred to step S2, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input (No in step S4), the process is performed in step S5. Transfer.

In step S5, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period (Yes in step S5), the process is transferred to step S6 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period (No in step S5), The process is transferred to step S4 assuming that there is a possibility of a momentary power failure in which the voltage of the supply power supply drops for a moment.
In step S6, the main CPU 50az sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S7, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 60z that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 60z that has received the power cutoff designation command sends a command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls that indicates the number of remaining payout balls stored in the payout RAM 60cz.

In step S8, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls has not been received (No in step S8), the process is transferred to step S9, and if the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls has been received (Yes in step S8), the process proceeds to step S10. Move the process.
In step S9, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout ball number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed (No in step S9), the process is transferred to step S8, and if the waiting time has elapsed (Yes in step S9), normal communication with the payout control board 60z is performed. The process is moved to step S10 as it cannot be done.

In step S10, the main CPU 50az saves the number of payout balls in the payout counter set in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. Specifically, when the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls is received, the number of remaining payout balls specified by the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls is saved, and the command for specifying the number of remaining payout balls is not received. Saves "0" as the number of remaining payout balls. The number of remaining payout balls saved here is referred to in the payout control process of timer interrupt described later, and after the power is restored, a command for specifying the number of payout balls according to the number of remaining payout balls is transmitted to the payout control board 60z. Will be done.
The main CPU 50az clears the output port in step S11. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S12, the main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 50cz. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine the data abnormality in the RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.
The main CPU 50az saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 50cz is backed up (power recovery) in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz in step S13, prohibits RWM access in step S14, and thereafter. Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.
In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when a momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. The machine will not perform unintended operations, and it will be possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 50z will be described with reference to FIG. 201.
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board.
First, the main CPU 50az prohibits all interruptions in step S21, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S22, and performs start-up waiting processing for other boards in step S23. Specifically, the payout control board 60z and the effect control board 55z are waited for one second so that the command is not missed from the main control board 50z.

The main CPU 50az permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 50cs in step S24, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 60z in step S25. As a result, the payout control unit (payout CPU 60az, payout ROM 60bz, payout RAM 60cz) performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device (launching solenoid 12az).
In step S26, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. If the backup flag is saved (Yes in step S26), the process is transferred to step S27 as if the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved (No in step S26), the first power supply is performed. The process is transferred to step S28 as if it were input.

The main CPU 50az calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz in step S27, and determines whether or not there is a setting change operation in step S28. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660, the RWM clear switch 680, and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation (Yes in step S28), the process is transferred to step S29 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation (No in step S28), the process proceeds to step S30. Move the process.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting change process in step S29. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is changed (updated) to change (update) the game control state (set value in the RWM area). A process for initializing (other than the area) or transmitting a setting change designation command indicating that the setting is being changed to the effect control board 55z is performed, and the process is transferred to step S25. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, a process for executing the setting change notification indicating that the setting value is being changed is performed.
The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen for the image display device to recognize that the setting value is being changed, or to display a predetermined setting while the frame lamp 101z or the board lamp 100z is being changed. It is to turn on all lights with the emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 34 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed.

The main CPU 50az determines in step S30 whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz and the checksum calculated in step S27 match. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area) (Yes in step S30), the process is transferred to step S31, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area). (No in step S30) shifts the process to step S32.
When the backup flag is not saved, that is, when the power is turned on for the first time, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal.

In step S31, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is a setting changing flag indicating that the setting is being changed in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cs. If there is no setting changing flag (No in step S31), the process is moved to step S33 assuming that the previous power failure did not occur during the setting change processing, and if there is a setting changing flag (step S31). Yes), the process is moved to step S32 assuming that the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process. The setting changing flag is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the start of the setting change processing, and is cleared from the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the end of the setting change processing.

The main CPU 50az performs non-recoverable error processing in step S32. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error specification command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 55z, the timer allocation is performed. After clearing the output port, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 27z outputs an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error, and power is supplied. The process of waiting until the supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, a process for executing a non-recoverable error notification indicating that a non-recoverable error has occurred is performed. The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the control of the game is not performed (the game cannot be controlled), and the error cannot be cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 80z is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. It should be noted that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to let the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. An unrecoverable error sound ("" It is an unrecoverable error "+ buzzer sound) is output until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 50az determines in step S33 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation (Yes in step S33), the process is transferred to step S24 as a transition to the RWM clear mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation (No in step S33), the process proceeds to step S36. Move the process.
The main CPU 50az performs the RWM clear process in step S34. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the control state of the game is initialized (initializing other than the set value area of the RWM area), or the RWM clear designation indicating that the RWM clear is being prepared. A process for transmitting a command to the effect control board 55z is performed, and the process is transferred to step S25. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, a process for executing the RWM clear preparation notification indicating that the RWM clear preparation is being performed is performed.

"RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear confirmation screen to make the image display device recognize that RWM clear is performed by operating the RWM clear switch 680, and to confirm RWM clear of the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z. It is to turn on all lights with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) throughout. The voice output device 34 may output a confirmation sound indicating that the RWM clear is being confirmed (“The RWM is cleared by operating the RWM clear switch”).
In step S35, the main CPU 50az issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-saving game state as a normal game state), and the payout control board 60z and It is transmitted to the effect control board 55z, and the process is transferred to step S31. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, a process for executing a power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized is performed.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "123") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or to display a frame. A power-on notification sound indicating that the lamp 101z or the panel lamp 100z is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the voice output device 34. ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 50az determines in step S36 whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 660 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation (Yes in step S36), the process is transferred to step S37 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation (No in step S36), the game is controlled. The process is transferred to step S38 in order to return the state to the state before the power was cut off.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting confirmation process in step S37. Specifically, the setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is displayed on the information display 113, or a setting confirmation specification command indicating that the setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control board 55z. Perform processing to do so. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, a process for executing the setting confirmation notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" is a predetermined setting confirmation screen for displaying the setting confirmation screen for the image display device to recognize that the setting value is being confirmed, or a predetermined setting while the frame lamp 101z or the board lamp 100z is being confirmed. It is to turn on all lights with the emission color (for example, white). The voice output device 34 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“setting is being confirmed”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed.

In step S38, the main CPU 50az clears (0 clears) the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cs, and sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S39, the main CPU 50az transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of a power failure to the effect control board 55z. As a result, on the effect control board 55z, processing is performed to execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like described later. ..

"Power recovery notification" means that the power recovery screen (image) is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. , The frame lamp 101z and the panel lamp 100z are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or a power source indicating that the power supply is restored from the audio output device 34 (from a power failure). The recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In step S40, the main CPU 50az transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 55z. As a result, the effect control board 55z can grasp the number of special figure holdings, and also performs a process for displaying the first holding icon and the second holding icon on the image display device.

The main CPU 50az activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S41, permits all interrupts in step S32, and ends the current initial setting process. ..

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine performs an unexpected operation, which is a nuisance to the game store and the player. It is possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.
Also, if there is a setting changing flag, that is, if the previous power outage occurred during the setting change, even if the checksum is normal, the unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped. As a result, the game does not proceed in a state where the set value not intended by the game store is set, and the reliability of the game machine can be improved.

It should be noted that the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation include the fact that the open detection switch 105z is in the ON state, but do not include the fact that the open detection switch 105z is in the ON state. good.
In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power recovery) and there is no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S40, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is initialized (cleared to 0), the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area, and step S25. The process may be transferred to.

In addition, the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game status, but after the power-on designation command and power recovery designation command are sent, the current game status is sent. You may send a game state specification command indicating.
Further, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting changing flag, the unrecoverable error processing may not be performed even if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az has random number update processing (S61), start port SW processing (S62), gate detection SW processing (S63), special symbol processing (S64), customer waiting setting processing (S65), and auxiliary symbol as timer interrupt processing. The processing (S66), the large winning opening processing (S67), the second starting opening opening processing (S68), and the like are executed.

Next, various processes executed as the timer interrupt process will be described.
[Starting port SW processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of a start port SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In this case, in step S101, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the first start port detection SW13a of the first start port 13z is ON, and if it is determined that the first start port detection SW13a is ON, the main CPU 50az determines. In step S102, it is determined whether or not the reserved number U1 of the first start port detection SW13a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the reserved number U1 is less than "4", "1" is added to the reserved number U1 in step S103. After that, in step S104, a special symbol determination random value for a special symbol, a jackpot symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, a variation pattern random value, and the like are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that 180 fluctuation pattern random values (0 to 179) are prepared.

Next, in step S105, the main CPU 50az increases the number of holds displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 23, and sets the first hold number increase command. When the first hold number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the first hold number increase command to the effect control board 55z. If a negative result is obtained in step S102, that is, if it is determined that the number of reserved items U1 is "4", which is the maximum number of items that can be reserved, the process of steps S103 to S105 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S106.

Next, in step S106, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the second start port detection SW14a of the second start port 14z is ON, and if it is determined that the second start port detection SW14a is ON, the main CPU 50az determines. In step S107, it is determined whether or not the reserved number U2 of the second start port detection SW14a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the reserved number U2 is less than "4", "1" is added to the reserved number U2 in step S108. After that, in step S109, a special symbol determination random value for a special symbol, a jackpot symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, a variation pattern random value, and the like are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 50az increases the number of holds of the second special symbol hold indicator 24 and sets the second hold number increase command. When the second hold number increase command is set, the main CPU 50az sends a second hold number increase command to the effect control board 55z to end the start port SW process. If a negative result is obtained in step S107, that is, if it is determined that the number of reserved items U2 is "4", which is the maximum number of items that can be reserved, the start port SW process is terminated.

[Gate detection SW processing]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the gate detection SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S121, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the gate detection SW15a of the gate 15z is ON, and if it is determined that the gate detection SW15a is ON, the number of times the gate detection SW15a has passed through the gate in step S122. It is determined whether or not G is less than "4".

If it is determined in step S122 that the number of times G has passed through the gate is less than "4", "1" is added to the number of times G has passed through the gate in step S123, and in the following step S124, a random number for determining an auxiliary symbol is acquired. It is stored in the main RAM 50 cz, and the gate detection SW process is completed.
When it is determined in step S121 that the gate detection SW15a is not ON, or when a negative result is obtained in step S122, that is, when it is determined that the number of times G through the gate is "4", which is the maximum number that can be held. The gate detection SW process is terminated.

[Special design processing]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S131, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special game flag is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game or the small hit game is in progress, and determines that the big hit game or the small hit game is not in progress. In this case, in the following step S132, it is determined whether or not the special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is changing.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is not changing, then in step S133, it is determined whether or not the reserved number U2 of the second starting port detection SW14a to be preferentially digested is larger than "1". If it is determined in step S133 that the number of reserved pieces U2 is more than "1", the number of reserved pieces U2 is subtracted by "1" in step S134.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S133 that the reserved number U2 is not ≧ 1, that is, if the reserved number U2 is “0”, then in step S135, the reserved number U1 of the first start port detection SW13a is “1”. If it is determined in step S135 that the number of reserved pieces U1 is more than "1", the number of reserved pieces U1 is subtracted by "1" in the following step S136.

Next, in step S137, the main CPU 50az turns off the customer waiting flag if it is ON, and then executes the special game determination process (FIG. 207) described later in step S138. After executing the special game determination process in step S138, the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 208) described later is executed in step S139. After the variation pattern selection process is executed in step S139, the symbol variation of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is started in step S140, and the effect control board 55z is started in the subsequent step S141. Set the variable start command to be sent to.
The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a jackpot or small hit command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, a jackpot symbol command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot symbol, and a reach indicating the lottery result of the reach lottery. Includes commands, game status commands related to the current game status, and the like.

Next, in step S142, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first or second special symbol has elapsed a predetermined fluctuation time.
If it is determined in step S142 that the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, in the following step S143, the fluctuation of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and the predetermined special symbol is displayed.
After that, in step S144, the fluctuation stop command is set, and in the following step S145, the stopped processing (FIG. 210) described later is executed to end the special symbol processing.

If it is determined in step S131 that the special game flag is ON, or if it is determined in step S142 that the fluctuation time of the special symbol has not reached the predetermined fluctuation time, the special symbol processing is terminated.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S142 to determine whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed a predetermined variation time.
Further, in step S135, when it is determined that the reserved number U1 is not ≧ 1, that is, when it is determined that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are not reserved, the customer waiting setting process shown in FIG. 206 is executed in step S146. End the special symbol processing.

[Customer waiting setting process]
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of a customer waiting setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S151, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, and if it is determined that the customer waiting flag is ON, the main CPU 50az ends the customer waiting setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S151 that the customer waiting flag is not ON, the customer waiting command is set in step S152, and in the following step S153, the customer waiting flag is turned ON and then the customer waiting setting process is terminated.
The customer waiting flag is turned from OFF to ON when the state where the special symbol is not held is continued for a predetermined period and is not in the jackpot state.

[Special game judgment processing]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of a special game determination process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S161, the main CPU 50az determines the special symbol determination random number value stored in the main RAM 50cz, and in the subsequent step S162, determines whether or not the jackpot has been won.
If it is determined in step S162 that the jackpot has been won, in the following step S163, the jackpot symbol determination random number value stored in the main RAM 50c is determined, and in step S164, the first special is determined based on the determination result. The jackpot symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S162 that the big hit has not been won, then in step S165, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won based on the special symbol determination random number value.
If it is determined in step S165 that the small hit has been won, in the following step S166, the small hit symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is performed. To finish.
If it is determined in step S165 that the small hit has not been won, the special game determination process is performed by setting the lost symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 in step S167. To finish.

[Variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern selection process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving game state is ON is ON. If it is determined in step S171 that the time saving flag is ON, in the following step S172, a time saving gaming state table is set as a variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S171 that the time saving flag is not ON, in step S173, a non-time saving gaming state table is set as the variation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.
Next, in step S174, the main CPU 50az determines the previously acquired fluctuation pattern random value, and in the subsequent step S175, sets the fluctuation pattern based on the set fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern random value. And end the variation pattern selection process.

FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for a non-time-saving gaming state, and FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving gaming state.

First, the variation pattern table for the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209 (a) will be described.
In the variation pattern table for non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209 (a), when the special symbol determination result is a big hit and the variation pattern random value is "0 to 89", the variation time is as long as 90 seconds. 1 is selected. When the variation pattern 1 is selected, a hit effect accompanied by reach A is performed.

Further, when the special symbol determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation pattern random value is "90 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 2 having a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 2 is selected, a hit effect accompanied by reach B is performed.
If the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the variation pattern 3 having a variation time of 60 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random value "0 to 179". When the variation pattern 3 is selected, a chance effect is performed.

Next, a case where the special symbol determination result is lost and the gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state will be described.
When the random value for special symbol determination is lost, the variation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the random value for reach determination, the variation pattern random value, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2" and the reach determination random number value is "22 to 249" without reach, the variation pattern to be selected. Regardless of the random number value "0 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 4 having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 4 is selected, the effect of the variation A is usually performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 29". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 5 having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a loss effect accompanied by reach A is performed.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "30 to 179". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 6 having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a loss effect accompanied by reach B is performed.

Next, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3" and the reach determination random number value is "22 to 249" without reach, the selected variable pattern random number value "0". ~ 179 ”, the fluctuation pattern 7 having a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 7 is selected, the effect of the variation B is normally performed.
When the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 29". , Select the fluctuation pattern 5 having the above-mentioned fluctuation time of 90 seconds.
When the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "30 to 179". , Select the variation pattern 6 having the above-mentioned variation time of 30 seconds.

Further, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8" and the reach determination random number value is "22 to 249" without reach, the selected variable pattern random value " Regardless of "0 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 8 having a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 8 is selected, the effect of the shortened variation A is performed.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 29". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 5 having the above-mentioned fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30 to 179". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 6 having the above-mentioned fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the variation pattern table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209 (b) will be described. The variation pattern table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209 (b) has the same method for determining the variation pattern at the time of big hit or small hit as the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209 (a). Therefore, the explanation is omitted here, and only the case where the random value for special symbol determination is lost and the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state will be described.
When the random value for determining the special symbol is lost, the variation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the random value for reach determination, the variation pattern random value, and the like.
Specifically, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5" and the reach determination random number value is "22 to 249" without reach, the variation pattern to be selected. Regardless of the random number value "0 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 4 having a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 4 is selected, the effect of the variation A is usually performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 29". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 5 having a fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 5 is selected, a loss effect accompanied by reach A is performed.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "30 to 179". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 6 having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 6 is selected, a loss effect accompanied by reach B is performed.

On the other hand, when the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8" and the reach determination random number value is "22 to 249" without reach, the selected variable pattern random value " Regardless of "0 to 179", the fluctuation pattern 9 having a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected. When the variation pattern 9 is selected, the shortened variation B is produced.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 29". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 5 is selected.
Further, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the reach determination random number value is "0 to 21", and the fluctuation pattern random number value is "30 to 179". In the case of, the fluctuation pattern 6 is selected.
In this embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special symbol determination random value and the fluctuation pattern random value, but this is just an example, and the special symbol determination random value. And the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the jackpot symbol determination random value, or the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the special symbol determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, and the fluctuation pattern random value.

[Processing during stop]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the stopped processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON in step S181, and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, the remaining time saving game stored in the main RAM 50cz is determined in the following step S182. Subtract "1" from the number of games J.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines in step S183 whether or not the remaining game count J is "0", and if the remaining game count J is "0", the variation display of the special symbol is displayed in the time-saving game. Since it means that the game has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the time saving flag is turned off in the following step S184.
If it is determined in step S181 that the time reduction flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S183 that the number of remaining games J is not "0", the process proceeds to step S185.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the high probability flag is ON in the following step S185, and if it is determined that the high probability flag is ON, it is stored in the main RAM 50cz in the following step S186. "1" is subtracted from the remaining number of games X of the high-probability game.
Next, in step S187, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the remaining number of games X is "0", and if the remaining number of games X is "0", the variable display of the special symbol in the high-probability game is displayed. Means that has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 times), and therefore, in the subsequent step S188, the high probability flag is turned off.
If it is determined in step S185 that the high accuracy flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S187 that the number of remaining games X is not "0", the process proceeds to step S189.

Next, in step S189, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a big hit by the special symbol set in the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21, and determines that it is not a big hit. Next, in step S190, it is determined whether or not the set special symbol is a "small hit". Here, if it is determined that the hit is a small hit, the small hit game flag is turned ON in step S191. After that, in step S192, the jackpot opening is started, and in step S193, the jackpot opening command is set to end the stopped processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S190 that it is not a small hit, the variable stop processing is terminated without turning on the small hit game flag.
Further, if it is determined in step S189 that it is a big hit, then in step S194, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a long hit, and if it is determined that it is a long hit, in step S195, it is long. The winning game flag (special game flag) is turned ON, otherwise, in step S196, the short hit game flag (special game flag) is turned ON. After that, in step S197, the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game and the remaining number X of the high-probability game are set to "0" respectively, and after resetting the remaining number of games J / X, the time-saving flag is set in step S198. The high probability flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S192.

[Auxiliary symbol processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S201, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, the main CPU 50az ends the auxiliary symbol processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, it is determined in step S202 whether or not the auxiliary symbol is changing. If it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is not changing, in step S203, it is determined whether or not the number of times G through the gate, which stores the number of times the game ball has passed through the gate detection SW15a, is greater than "1". If the number of gate passages G is more than "1", the number of gate passages G is subtracted by "1" in the following step S204, and it is determined that the number of gate passages G is not more than "1", that is, "0". In the case of, the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines the random number value for auxiliary symbol determination in step S205, sets the stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the auxiliary symbol display device 22 in the following step S206, and sets the fluctuation time in step S207. do.
Here, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary symbol may be set to, for example, 4.0 seconds if the time saving flag is OFF, and 1.5 seconds, for example, if the time saving flag is ON.
Next, the main CPU 50az determines in step S209 whether or not the fluctuation time of the auxiliary symbol has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, stops the fluctuation in step S210. .. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the fluctuation time of the auxiliary symbol has not elapsed for a predetermined time, the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 50a determines in step S211 whether or not the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, and if the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, in step S212, the auxiliary game flag is turned ON and the auxiliary symbol is turned on. End the process.
If it is determined in step S211 that the stopped symbol is not a winning symbol, the auxiliary symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.
If it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S209 to determine whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has elapsed a predetermined variation time.

[Large winning opening processing]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the large winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S221, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the small hit game flag or the special game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the small hit game flag or the special game flag is ON, in step S222, the main CPU 50az determines. It is determined whether or not the opening is in progress. If it is determined in step S222 that the jackpot is being opened, then in step S223, it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S223 that the opening time has elapsed, in the following step S224, the value of the number of rounds R is set to "0" and the number of rounds (R number) / operation pattern is set.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing an example of setting the number of rounds / operation pattern. For example, when the special game is a long hit with a normal time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is 4R, and the operation pattern in 1R is 29. .Open for 5 seconds x 1 time. If the big hit is a short hit with a normal time reduction, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open × 1 time. If the jackpot is a long hit with a high probability of shortening, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 16R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open x 1 time, and the jackpot is a short hit with a high probability of shortening. In the case of high probability no time reduction and short hit, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern in 1R is set to 0.1 second open × 1 time.
If it is a small hit, for example, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 1R, and the operation pattern during 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open × 2 times.

Next, in step S225, the main CPU 50az sets "0" in the number counter C indicating the number of winnings per round to the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z, and in the following step S226. , Add "1" to the value of the number of rounds R. Then, in the subsequent step S227, the operation of the first special winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17z is started. That is, either the first large winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17z is changed from the closed state to the open state.

Next, in step S228, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17z has elapsed, and the operating time has elapsed. If it is determined that there is no such value, in the subsequent step S229, it is determined whether or not the value of the number counter C has reached the specified number.
If it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C is the specified number C, the operation of the first special winning opening 16 or the second large winning opening 17z is terminated in step S230. That is, the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z in the open state is closed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, the large winning opening process is terminated.
Further, in step S228, if the operating time of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17z has elapsed the predetermined operating time, the process of step S229 is skipped and the number of the number counter C is set. Without checking, in step S230, the operation of the first special winning opening 16 or the second special winning opening 17z is terminated.

Next, in step S231, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the number of jackpot rounds is the maximum number of rounds R. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot round is the final round.
If it is determined in step S231 that the jackpot round is the final round, the ending is started in step S232 and the ending command is set in step S233.

Next, the main CPU 50az sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" in step S234. After that, in step S235, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, in the following step S236, the game state setting process described later is executed. After that, in step S237, the special game flag is turned off, and the large winning opening process is completed.
Further, in step S222, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in the opening, it is determined in step S238 whether or not the ending is in progress, and if it is determined that the ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S235 and the ending is in progress. If it is determined that this is not the case, in step S239, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening is in operation.

If it is determined in step S239 that the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17z is operating, the process proceeds to step S228, and the first prize opening 16 or the second prize opening 17z is operating. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S225.
If it is determined in step S221 that the opening time has not elapsed, the large winning opening process is terminated. Similarly, when it is determined in step S229 that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, when it is determined in step S231 that the jackpot round is not the final round, or when the ending time has elapsed in step S235. Even if it is determined that there is no such thing, the large winning opening process is terminated.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the game state setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a small hit, and if it is determined that it is a small hit, the game state setting process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S241 that it is not a small hit, then in step S242, it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (a long hit with a normal time reduction or a short hit with a normal time reduction), and it is a normal hit. If it is determined that, in step S243, the time saving flag is turned ON, and in step S244, for example, "100" is set for the remaining number of games J of the time saving game, and the game state setting process is terminated.

Further, in step S242, if it is determined that the game is not a normal hit, it is a big hit that grants a high-probability game. Therefore, in step S245, the high-probability flag is turned ON, and in step S246, the number of remaining games of the high-probability game is set. For example, "10000" is set in X.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines in step S247 whether or not the hit is a hit with a reduced working hours, and if it is determined that the hit is a hit with a reduced working hours, in step S248, the time saving flag is turned ON and the step is performed. In S249, for example, "10000" is set in the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game, and the game state setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S247 that it is not a hit with a time reduction, the time reduction flag is turned off in step S250, and the remaining number of games J of the time reduction game is reset in step S251 to end the game state setting process. ..

[Second start port opening process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the second start port opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in step S261, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, then in step S262, the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz is set. It is determined whether or not it is in operation. If the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz is not operating (opening) in step S262, the operating pattern of the second starting opening opening / closing door 14bz is set according to the gaming state in step S263, and the operation pattern of the second starting opening opening / closing door 14bz is set in step S264. 2 The operation of the start port opening / closing door 14bz is started.
Here, the operation pattern (time) of the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz to be set is, for example, 0.15 seconds open x 1 time when the time reduction flag is OFF, and 1.80 seconds when the time reduction flag is ON. It is conceivable to set it to open x 3 times.

Next, in step S265, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined operating time has elapsed, the step S In S266, the auxiliary game flag is turned off to end the second start opening opening process.
If it is determined in step S262 that the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz is in operation, the process proceeds to step S265.
If it is determined in step S261 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S265 that the operating time of the second starting port 14z has not elapsed, the second starting port opening process is terminated. ..

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, the first start port 13z is reached. When a game ball enters a ball, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for jackpot symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, etc. are acquired by lottery, and the first of the first special symbol display devices 20z is obtained. The special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the acquired special symbol determination random value has won the special game, the first special symbol of the first special symbol display device 20z is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, any of the above-mentioned long hit, short hit, or small hit special game is executed.

During the long-hit game, you can get a ball by firing a game ball aiming at the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z that is in the open state.
On the other hand, during the short hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, so even if the game ball is launched aiming at the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z, most of the balls can be obtained. It is not possible.

Similarly, for example, when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z when the fluctuation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped, this entry is made. Taking the sphere as an opportunity, a special symbol determination random value, a jackpot symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, and the like are acquired by lottery, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is displayed in a variable manner.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired special symbol determination random value has won the special game, the second special symbol of the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped at a specific symbol. After that, either the above-mentioned big hit (long hit or short hit) or small hit special game is executed. During the long-hit game, a ball can be obtained by firing a game ball aiming at the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z which is in an open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, as in the above, during the short hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, so even if the game ball is launched aiming at the first big winning opening 16 or the second big winning opening 17z, most of the balls are obtained. You can't do it.

After the jackpot game is completed, based on the lottery result of the random value for determining the jackpot symbol, as a privilege game, a time-saving game with opening support of the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz is performed for a predetermined period, the above-mentioned time-saving game and the jackpot. Either a high-probability time-saving game (so-called probabilistic change game) in which a high-probability game with a high probability of winning is performed for a predetermined period, or a high-probability time-saving non-game (so-called latent probability change game) in which only a high-probability game is performed for a predetermined period. It shifts to the game state.
The high-probability game is continuously performed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a preset number of times (for example, 10,000 times) or the jackpot is won again.

On the other hand, the time-saving game continues until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a preset number of times (for example, 100 times for a normal time-saving game and 10,000 times for a high-probability time-saving game) or the jackpot is won again. It is done.
Further, during the time-saving game, the fluctuation time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of fluctuation is set to be shorter than that during the normal game, and the winning probability of the auxiliary symbol is set to be higher than that during the normal game.
Further, the opening time of the second start opening opening / closing door 14bz at the time of winning the auxiliary symbol is set longer than during the normal game.
Therefore, during the time-saving game, the winning rate of the game ball to the second starting port 14z is higher than that during the normal game, so that the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second starting port 14z during the normal game. Compared with this, the game efficiency can be greatly improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ratio of winning a jackpot advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z is higher than when the game ball enters the first starting port 13z. Because of the higher value, it is easier to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player during the short-time game than during the normal game.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control board 55z will be described.
[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the effect control board. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 216 can be realized by executing a program in which the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z is stored in the sub ROM 55bz.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z executes a command reception process (step S310), an effect button process (step S320), a command transmission process (step S330), and the like as timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of the main processing executed by the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z as the timer interrupt processing will be described. The process described below can also be realized by executing a program in which the sub CPU 55az of the effect control board 55z is stored in the sub ROM 55bz.

[Command reception processing]
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In step S401, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not the hold number increase command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number increase command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes the hold number increase command reception process in step S402.
Next, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not the variation start command has been received in step S403, and if it is determined that the variation start command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes the effect selection process in the following step S404.
The effect selection process in step S404 is a process of selecting an effect to be performed while the special symbol is changing.
If it is determined in step S403 that the fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S405 without executing the effect selection process.

Next, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received in step S405, and if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes the variable effect end-ending process in the following step S406. ..
Examples of the process during the end of the variable effect include analysis of the variable stop command, various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, and a process of setting the variable effect end command.
If it is determined in step S405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S407 without executing the processing during the end of the fluctuation effect.

Next, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not the opening command has been received in step S407, and if it is determined that the opening command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes a special game effect selection process in the following step S408.
Examples of the special game effect selection process include analysis of an opening command, special game effect pattern selection process, and process of setting an opening effect start command.
If it is determined in step S407 that the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S409 without executing the special game effect selection process.

Next, the sub CPU 55az determines in step S409 whether or not the ending command for executing the ending effect selection process has been received, and if it is determined that the ending command has been received, the sub CPU 55az determines in the following step S410 to select the ending effect. Execute the process.
Examples of the ending effect selection process include analysis of an ending command, selection of an ending effect pattern, and processing for setting an ending effect start command.
If it is determined in step S409 that the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S411 without executing the ending effect selection process.
Next, in step S411, the sub CPU 55az executes the customer waiting command reception process and ends the command reception process.

[Production selection process]
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az first analyzes the fluctuation start command in step S421, and in the subsequent step S422, subtracts the number of reserved balls stored in the sub RAM 55cz.
Next, in step S423, the variation effect pattern is selected based on the analysis result of the variation start command, and in the subsequent step S424, the variation effect start command is set to end the effect selection process.

[Processing during the end of variable production]
FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable effect end-ending process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the fluctuation stop command in step S431, performs various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, and then sets the fluctuation effect end command in the next step S432. Then, the processing during the end of the variable effect is terminated.

[Opening effect selection process]
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of a hit effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the opening command in step S441, and performs the hit effect pattern selection process in the subsequent step S442. After that, in step S443, the opening effect start command is set, and the opening effect selection process ends.

[Ending effect selection process]
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of an ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the ending command in step S451 and selects the ending effect pattern in the following step S452. After that, in step S453, the ending effect start command is set, and the ending effect selection process ends.

<Main board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the main board protection case 200z according to the present embodiment will be described.
In this embodiment, the main board protection case 200z, the payout board protection case 400, and the effect board protection case 700 are common to the game board 10z side in the forward direction and the opposite side to the game board 10z with respect to the board case. The direction will be described as the back side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 10z.

222 is a view for explaining a main board protection case according to an example of the present embodiment, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protective case including the pedestal. FIG. 224 is a side view showing an aspect when the main board protection case is attached to the pedestal.
225 is a view illustrating a state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 222 is removed from the pedestal, (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protective case of FIG. 225.
The main board protection case (hereinafter, simply referred to as a main board case) 200 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in a state where the main control board 50 on which electronic components such as a ROM are mounted is housed inside. It is assembled to the back surface of the slingshot via a pedestal 280 (see FIGS. 222 to 224).

Further, the main board case 200z has two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece 210 and upper case piece 220) that are housed inside with the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 on which the ROM is mounted sandwiched between them. ), A cutting member for cutting the open prohibition seal (hereinafter referred to as “cutting member”) 230 sandwiched between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a main opening prohibition seal 250 described later. It is provided with a cap 240 that is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the substrate case 200z.
The main control board 50 of the present embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged on only one side.
By mounting important electronic components (especially ROM) on only one side and facing the mounting surface to the surface that can be seen from the outside (rear surface), it is possible to easily detect fraudulent activities such as replacement of electronic components.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case main body (sealing body 300).
The two case pieces constituting the main board case 200z are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, but the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the figure.
For convenience, the case piece on the back side is described as the lower case piece and the case piece on the front side is described as the upper case piece from the viewpoint of the inspector, but according to the direction notation in the figure, the upper case piece is the rear case. The lower case piece is the front case piece.
At the lower part of the upper case piece 220, a protective cover 229 that covers the connection portion between the internal connector and the external connector provided on the internal main control board 50 is arranged.
In the present embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a caulking member with the main control board 50 sandwiched between them.

A caulking fastening portion 290 using a caulking member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the main board case 200z, and a caulking member (locking member) is provided in a fastening hole 291 (sealing portion) provided in the caulking fastening portion 290. ) Is driven in (locked) to lock the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the fastening hole 291, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 can be opened / closed and detached.
In the caulking fastening portion 290 of the main board case 200z of the present embodiment, two caulking fastening holes are provided (caulking fastening holes 291A and 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by communicating the lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and the upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220.

As will be described later, the lower case is formed by driving a caulking member into one of the caulking fastening holes 291 in a state where the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are engaged with each other by using the hook groove and the hook piece. It becomes impossible to disengage the engagement between the piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 by sliding them together.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
It should be noted that only one caulking fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 at one time. After removing the caulking member (breaking) and releasing the fastening (after opening the main board case 200z), if the caulking member is to be fastened again, the caulking member is driven into the remaining caulking fastening hole to fasten the fastening. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to twice.
In the main board case 200z (for example, FIG. 225) of the present embodiment, for example, the caulking member is driven into the caulking fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the drawing.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200z to the game machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the game machine main body.
The main board case 200z that houses the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko game machine via a pedestal 280, so that it is above the back side of the game board. The electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.
Further, by rotating the main board case 200z upward about the shaft portion 281 located at the upper part of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210.

The main board case assembly 200A in which the main board case 200z is attached to the pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 222 to 224, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, a main board case 200z, and a protective cover 229. The pedestal 280 is a component used for mounting the main board case 200z on the rear side of the game board 10z (see FIG. 222).
As shown in FIG. 223, the pedestal 280 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left-right direction are longer than the two sides along the up-down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.
The main board case 200z is provided with a pair of hook portions 249 that engage with each shaft portion 281. The pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 224, when the main board case 200z is attached to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200z is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back surface side. Then, since the hook portion 249 is in a state where it can be engaged with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200z is brought close to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.
Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200z is rotated around the shaft portion 281 counterclockwise when viewed from the left side (direction of the arrow of the reference numeral C in FIG. 224) to rotate the main board. Overlay the case 200z on the pedestal 280. As shown in FIG. 222, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is hooked on the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the main board case 200z is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200z.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200z. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200z including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10z.
The main control board 50 and the main board case 200z will be described. As shown in FIG. 225, the main control board 50 that controls the game is housed in the main board case 200z. The integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50. The plurality of electronic components 595 includes various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Further, as shown in FIG. 225 (b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 225 (b), and may be omitted in other drawings.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores the stored contents used for controlling the game. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 stores stored contents that affect the result of the game.
Further, the integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the main CPU 50az, the main ROM 50bz, and the main RAM 50cz shown in FIG. 196 are integrated.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right in the lower part of the main control board 50. The plurality of connectors 771 to 767 are arranged inside the six openings 779 provided at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

Of the plurality of connectors 771 to 767, the plurality of connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a first start port detection switch 13az, a second start port detection switch 14az, a first special winning opening detection switch 16az, and a second big winning opening detection switch that detect that a game ball has won a prize. A signal is input from at least a part of 17az, the general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196). In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a first start port detection switch 13az, a second start port detection switch 14az, and a first major winning opening detection switch 16az, which detect that a game ball has won a prize. It is assumed that all the signals of the large winning opening detection switch 17az and the general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) are input. The detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In the present embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773 and 776 are different colors from the fluorescent colors.

The integrated main ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50. The first signal pin 582 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200z. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the main body 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the first signal pin 582 can be visually recognized from the front via the main board case 200z.
The signal pin provided in each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is referred to as a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 223). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the main control board 50. The signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is visibly arranged via the main board case 200z. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible via the main board case 200z.
As shown in FIG. 223, the main board case 200z is a box-shaped case that houses the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-contact manner.

A detailed configuration of the main board case 200z and a table provided to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 234.
The performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and later, and will not be described here.
The main board case 200z includes the main control board 50 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 225 (b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main substrate case 200z is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inclusion portion 581 for containing the main control board 50. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200z, which is on the integrated main ROM 502 side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200z, which is opposite to the integrated main ROM 502 side. In FIG. 225 (b), only the integrated main ROM 502 is shown among the electric parts provided on the main control board 50 contained in the transparent main board case 200z, and the other electric parts are shown. It is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 227 (a) and the like).

As shown in FIG. 226, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each have a control board storage portion 211 and 221 for accommodating the main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) and a sealing base portion 310 (see FIG. 223) described later. It is provided with a sealing portion 212 and 222 constituting (see 227). The control board storage portions 211 and 221 are projected from the plate portions 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape and the peripheral edges of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively, and are provided on one side of the plate portions 211a and 221a, respectively. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.
Further, as shown in FIG. 223, a cylindrical portion 565 extending rearward on the main control board 50 side is provided on the left portion of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210. The cylindrical portion 565 is formed with a hole portion 566 extending in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 50, a hole portion 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole portion 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225) is inserted into the hole portion 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the main control board 50 via the hole portion 567. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft portion of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225 (b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 226, of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211, a portion (hereinafter referred to as a “male portion”) projecting from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a. Is formed by three hook pieces 211c each formed in an L shape.
On the other hand, of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221, the portion protruding from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which a male portion of the control board accommodating portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed by the screw 769 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the male portion of the flange portion 211b is inserted into the female portion of the flange portion 221b. Then, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid to each other in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 226 along the left-right direction. Then, since the hooking piece 211c provided on the male portion engages with the hooking piece 221d, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α. Is done.
When combined in this way, the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 form a box-shaped encapsulation portion 581 internally shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) is housed in the inclusion portion 581. Therefore, the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the like are illegally replaced can be suppressed.

The main control board 50 is attached to the inside of the control board storage unit 221 before the control board storage units 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC or the like mounted on the main control board 50 is attached so as to face the plate portion 221a of the control board storage portion 221. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200z, electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 can be used. This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 197, in the present embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A provided with the main board case 200z is attached to the game board 10z, the inside of the main board case 200z is passed through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. The electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 of the above can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 226, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right ends of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 227, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stop piece 91 and a second screw stop piece 92 above the sealing portions 212 and 222.
When the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221 are slid and combined, the encapsulation base portion 310 is formed by the encapsulation portions 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of the encapsulation body 300 in which these are combined.
As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base portion 310, the first screw stop piece 91 and the second screw stop are attached to the longitudinal end portion of the sealing body 300. In addition to the piece 92, the third screw stop piece 93 included in the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stop portion 90z for screwing.

As shown in FIG. 226, the sealing portions 212 and 222 project to the right from the right end portion of the control board accommodating portions 211 and 221. The sealing portions 212 and 222 have the same height along the left-right direction and the same width in the vertical direction.
Long groove portions 212a and 222a are formed in each of the sealing portions 212 and 222 along the left-right direction. Two groove portions 222a parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing portion 222 so as to be separated from each other for a predetermined period of time, and one groove portion 212a is formed in the sealing portion 212 along the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 227, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are sealed in the right portion of the combined control board storage portions 211 and 221. The foundation portion 310 is formed.
In the sealing base portion 310, the sealing portions 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel at regular intervals, and an insertion / extraction space 310a (see FIG. 227) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 facing each other. To.

As shown in FIG. 226, the open prohibition seal 250 is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200z, and proves that it is a genuine product issued by a certified organization or the like. ..
The open prohibition seal 250 is provided with an adhesive surface on one surface of an easily cut material such as paper in consideration of cutability, and a plurality of cuts are formed. As will be described later, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark), and the like are printed on the opening prohibition sticker 250. In addition, the characters "opening prohibited" are also printed on the opening prohibition sticker 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of picking portions 61z, and a cutting portion 64z. The foundation portion 230a, which is the foundation of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64z is formed on one of the two long sides of the foundation portion 230a. The cut portion 64z is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The pinching portions 61z are provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the foundation portion 230a, and are formed in a shape bent in a "<" shape as a whole. The left end portion of the picking portion 61z is referred to as a free end portion 61az.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can cover the entire sealing base portion 310 so as to cover the sealing base portion 310, and is formed to be removable from the sealing base portion 310.
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 93 that is formed on one end side of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 82z is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 61az of the pinching portion 61z of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. It is provided. Further, a groove portion 86z is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion / extraction space 310a (see FIG. 227) of the sealing base portion 310. After that, the opening prohibition sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86z fits into a part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion / removal space 310a. Further, the protrusion 82z engages with the free end portion 61az of the pinching portion 61z of the cutting member 230.

As shown in FIG. 225, as described above, when the cap 240 is put on the sealing base portion 310, the third screw stop piece 93 becomes the first screw stop piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. It overlaps with the combination with the second screw stop piece 92 to form a screw stop portion 90z for screwing. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fastening portion 90z, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.
When the main board case 200z is unsealed, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200z is illegally released.
The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base portion 310 at the same time. Then, the opening prohibition seal 250 is irreparably scratched by the cut portion 64z or the like.

The identification display 520 will be described. As shown in FIG. 223, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information about the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524.
The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

As shown in FIG. 223, the identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The identification display 523, 524, 525 attached to the main board case 200z is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

The identification labels 521 to 525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification label 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string of "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string of "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string of "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string of "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string of "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 in the identification display 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is, for example, a display corresponding to a manufacturer name, a model name, or the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, among "ABCD", "AB" represents a manufacturer name and "CD" represents a model name.
In the identification display 521 to 525, the manufacturer name itself is displayed as in the identification display 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 233, instead of displaying the manufacturer name by "AB" included in "ABCD". You may. Further, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed as in "CR Ai" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 233. Further, the identification display 521 to 525 may display a model like the model "GH101" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 of FIG. 233. In this case, the same identification display in the identification display 521 to 525 becomes the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company".

In the following description, in the upper case piece 220, the surface forming the inside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an inner surface 532. In the upper case piece 220, the surface forming the outside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 222 (c), 225 (c), and 227, the outer surface 531 is provided with a position display unit 541. The position display unit 541 is a portion that displays a position to which the identification display 523 is given. The position display unit 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main board case 200z. More specifically, the position display unit 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220. The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display unit 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display unit 541 is a concave portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 225 (b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In the present embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent as an example.
On the seal portion 542, a printing portion 797 is printed on the seal main body (base portion).
For all the seal parts attached to all the board cases described later, printing (printing) is performed on the sticky seal body (base part), or writing is possible on the seal body (base part). It is common in that the base is formed.
In the present embodiment, as an example, the printing unit 797 is an identification display 523.
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal unit 542, the position display unit 541 is in a state where the identification display 523 is attached. The seal portion 542 is arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 225 (b) illustrates a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 223) also exist. The identification display 523 of the upper case piece 220 is displayed so that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 has a visible angle. In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. As in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 234) in the modification described later, the identification display 523 may overlap with the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 when the main board case 200z is at a predetermined angle. .. In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is formed. In the present embodiment, a main board case 200z including the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 222, 223, 225, and 227, the main board case 200z is provided with a position display unit 541 which is a portion for displaying a position to which the identification display 523 is applied. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 1, it is easier for the manufacturer to grasp the position where the identification display 520 is given, as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is given by the manufacturer, the possibility that the identification display 523 is given to different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1 can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200z as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is not provided. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 is provided as a recess, the inspector can determine the position of the position display unit 541 as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the main board case 200z by printing or the like. Easy to grasp.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 that is a recess. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing the gaming machine 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the position display unit 541 is provided in a portion different from the portion overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main board case 200z. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display unit 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can confirm both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced due to fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523, which is an information identification unit attached to the main board case 200z, and the identification display 522, which is an information identification unit attached to the integrated main ROM 502, include at least the same identification display 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Further, in the present embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impair the visibility of the mounting portion of the integrated main ROM 502. Since the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed so that the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 has a visible angle, the inspector can see the integrated main ROM 502 with the same identification display 529. By confirming the main board case 200z, it is possible to easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed. Further, for example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, it is possible to determine whether or not the integrated main ROM 502 and the identification display 529 attached to the main board case 200z are the same. , The inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, an identification display 523 which is an information identification unit attached to the main board case 200z, an identification display 522 which is an information identification unit attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and an information identification unit displayed on the main control board 50. The identification display 521 includes at least the same identification display 529 (character string of "ABCD" in this embodiment). Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 to which the same identification display 529 is attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been performed. Further, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with the other main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200z. By determining whether or not the identification display 529 attached to the is the same, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

The main board case 200z includes a main control board 50 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent colors, the inspector can easily see them as compared with the case where the detection signal connectors are not fluorescent colors. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, it is easier for the inspector to confirm the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 as compared with the case where there is only one detection signal connector. Therefore, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is illegally connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200z. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the second signal pin 583 included in the plurality of electronic components 595 is visibly arranged via the main board case 200z. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, for example, it can be easily determined whether or not a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side by a screw 769 (see FIG. 225 (b)). Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 as compared with the case where it is not screwed. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid to each other and combined. Therefore, even if a person who intends to cheat simply tries to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the upper case piece 220 The lower case piece 210 is difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to replace the main control board 50 illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be made. In each of the following modifications, the configurations corresponding to the configurations of the above embodiments are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The position display unit 541 was a recess, but the position display unit 541 is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, the position display unit 541 may be a convex portion.

228 to 230 are views showing a modified example of the position display unit provided on the main board case.
FIG. 228 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200z. As shown in FIG. 228, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes to the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542.
Further, the position display unit 541 is provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, but the position display unit 541 is not limited to this. For example, the position display unit 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220.

FIG. 229 shows the cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200z. As shown in FIG. 229, the position display unit 541 is a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed on the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the main board case 200z via the transparent upper case piece 220.

FIG. 230 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case according to the modified example of the main substrate case 200z. As shown in FIG. 230, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220 and protrudes to the front side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the identification display 523 from the rear side of the substrate case via the transparent upper case piece 220.
As described above, the position display unit 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z, and is a convex portion or a concave portion for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display unit 541 which is a convex portion and a concave portion is provided, for example, the position of the identification display 520 is displayed by the inspector as compared with the case where the position display unit 541 is displayed on the flat surface of the main board case 200z by printing or the like. Is easy to grasp. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

In addition, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display unit 541 which is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, in the case of mass-producing the gaming machine 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the plurality of members including the main control board 50 may not include a part of the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240. Further, the plurality of members may further include members different from the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240.

Further, the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are provided with the identification display 520, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members may be attached with the related identification display 520. For example, the identification display 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification display 524 may not be attached to the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification display 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can confirm the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, is the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members related? By determining whether or not, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. In this case, the inspector confirms the identification display 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210, and easily determines whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. You can check. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, the identification attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. By determining whether or not the display 520 is related, the inspector can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can confirm at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been performed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, it is inspected by at least determining whether the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. The person can easily confirm that the fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the identification display 520 may be related to each other. For example, the identification display 520 may be all the same identification display (for example, all “ABCD01” or the like). Further, the identification display 520 may be different from each other, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The description content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Further, the identification display 520 does not have to be a character string. For example, the identification display 520 may have various marks. Further, the mode to which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and attached to the seal portion. Further, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, the identification indications 523 to 525 may all be stamped by the mold for manufacturing the main board case 200z.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick the seal part 542 may take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portion 542 on the same surface or the back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached, and is on the same surface or the back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 542 is attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.

The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542 on the same surface as the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 542.

Further, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200z.
FIGS. 231 and 232 are views showing a modified example in which the identification display is formed on the main board case.
Hereinafter, the modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. In the main board case shown in FIG. 231, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display unit 1390. Further, the portion outside the identification display unit 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 232, the identification display unit 1390 projects rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the upper case piece 220) forming the identification display unit 1390. The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers (four in the present embodiment) in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384.
The letter 1371 of "A" of the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The letter 1372 of "B" is formed in the hierarchy 1382. The letter 1373 of "C" is formed in the layer 1383. The letter 1374 of "D" is formed in the layer 1384. The character 1375 of "0" is formed in the layer 1382. The character 1376 of "3" is formed in the layer 1383.

The method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technique for condensing a laser and forming fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns in the material of the main substrate case 200z at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm. By forming a plurality of the cracks, the identification display 523 is formed inside the main substrate case 200z.
In the present embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside the member forming the identification display unit 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification display 523 is more difficult to remove than the case where the entire identification display 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved. Further, when the identification display 523 is removed by fraud, scratches are formed on the main board case of FIGS. 231 and 232. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display unit 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, it is difficult to remove the identification display 523 as compared with the case where the identification display 523 is formed only on one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent activity can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
Further, in the main substrate cases of FIGS. 231 and 232, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, it is necessary to cut the main board case 200z deeper when an unauthorized person tries to remove the identification display 520, as compared with the case where L1 is L2 or less. Therefore, the main board cases of FIGS. 231 and 232 are easily scratched. Therefore, the inspector can easily find the fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind, and the interest of the player is improved.
The identification display 523 may not be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display unit 1390. For example, the identification display 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display unit 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification display 520 provided in the main board case of FIGS. 231 and 232, such as the identification display 524 and 525, is also formed inside the main board case of FIGS. 231 and 232. May be done.

Further, various seals may be attached to the main substrate case 200z in addition to the seal portion 542 and the like. Further, the content displayed on the printing unit (for example, the printing unit 797) provided on various seals such as the seal unit 542 is not limited.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a modified example of the main board case.
The performance display monitor 600, the setting display monitor 650, the setting key switch 660, and the RWM clear switch 680 described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197 will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and later, and will not be described here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case according to the modified example shown in FIG. 233. In FIG. 233, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), respectively. In FIG. 233, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

A printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored and, in the present embodiment, has a white background as an example. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code unit 1572, an information display unit 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal unit 1560 is provided so that the printing unit 1571, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.
The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Etc. are included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector's name is entered in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the main board case 200z is opened is entered in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595. The peep section 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The peep section 1574 has light transmission. In this embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction. Further, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two entry areas 1570 on the upper side. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

Further, the seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion where such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".

Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification display 1595 and 1596. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Although the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification display 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Therefore, for example, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 and the electrons are arranged. By confirming the positional relationship with the component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector shall enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200z was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). Can be done. In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the viewing unit 1574 is provided, the inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 via the viewing unit 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the cord portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by checking the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend back and forth and left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Further, when the main body portion 580 extends back and forth and left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body portion 580.
Further, various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 234 is a view of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 as viewed diagonally from above. In FIG. 234, members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 are not shown. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps with the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. That is, FIG. 234 is a view from an angle at which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. However, as shown in FIG. 233, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 233 is a view from an angle at which the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 can be visually recognized at the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. As described above, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting portion of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. Although the seal portion 1561 has been described as an example, various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, information of the identification display 523) has an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. It should be displayed in.

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above.
235 is a diagram for explaining other configurations of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 235 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board, FIG. 235. (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.
236 is a diagram showing the configuration of the printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 236 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 236 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board. , It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder side (back side) of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b), the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted.
Further, in the printed wiring board 701, various electronic components such as an insertion mounting type (through hole mounting type) resistor R, a capacitor C, a transistor Tr, and an IC and a connector CN are mounted in a through hole (component insertion hole) formed in the board. Through-hole mounting method is adopted.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 236, the printed wiring board 701 is provided with a through hole (component insertion hole) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, a connection electrode (connection land) 703 is provided around the through hole 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701.

The connection electrode 703 is an electrode for connecting the leads of electronic components inserted into the through hole 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701 by, for example, soldering. The component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected, and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 provided with a through hole 702 into which leads of insert-mounted electronic components can be inserted.

237 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is housed, FIG. 237 shows a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. 237 shows the assembly. The front view of is shown. Further, FIG. 238 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 237 and 238.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 222 to 234, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display including information about the gaming machine 1. The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

The identification display 521 is displayed by silk printing on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50. The identification display 521 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by engraving. The identification display 522 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The identification display 523, 524, 525 attached to the main board case 200z is an information identification unit for displaying specific information.
The position display unit 541 is, for example, a recess formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed on the rear side. The position display unit 541 is provided with an identification display 523 by the seal unit 542. The identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542.
The identification display 524 is formed on the upper right portion of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by engraving with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240.
In FIGS. 237 and 238, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 222 to 234) are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that they are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), respectively. In FIG. 237, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting.
The "watermark" is a display in which the appearance differs depending on the viewing angle, and various types such as those using a hologram and those having a different appearance depending on the physical shape can be applied. .. In general, a seal with a watermark has a lower translucency of the base portion, which is the main body of the seal portion, than a seal without a watermark, so that the visibility through the seal is lowered.

A printing unit 1571 is printed on the seal unit 1560. The printing unit 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing unit 1571 is colored and, in the present embodiment, has a white background as an example. The plurality of areas 1575 include a code unit 1572, an information display unit 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal unit 1560 is provided so that the printing unit 1571, the code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is provided with an entry area 1570 for entering the opener who opened the main board case 200z and the opening date.
The seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "main board control number", three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
The entry area 1570 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
Except for each printing and entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 to a position visible via the transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three rows of entry areas 1570 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
The entry area 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560 has a total of 6 elements, 3 rows in the vertical direction and 2 columns in the horizontal direction, and 3 sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.

On the other hand, as described above, the number of caulking portions (caulking fastening holes 291, that is, closing portions) provided in the main board case 200z is two (caulking fastening holes 291A and caulking fastening holes 291B).
That is, the number of caulking portions (closing portions) provided in the main board case 200z is less than or equal to the number of openers and opening date entry fields provided in the seal portion 1560 affixed to the main board case 200z. ..
By providing more entry fields than can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than when the number of caulked parts and the number of entry fields are the same. Is.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 of FIGS. 237 and 238 is erected so that its main surface is orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control board 50.
The seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface orthogonal to the substrate surface.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Etc. are included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six. The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector's name is entered in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the main board case 200z is opened is entered in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The seal unit 1560 includes a viewing unit 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50. The peep section 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The peep section 1574 has light transmission. In this embodiment, the peep portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In the present embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction. Further, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged side by side and the two entry areas 1570 on the upper side. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.

Further, the seal unit 1561 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, as specific information, at least one of a model name, a manufacturer name, a rated voltage, and a total capacity is printed. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA company" are printed. In the present embodiment, the portion where such information is printed is also referred to as a printing unit 1563. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" including a model, a manufacturer name "AA", a rated voltage and a total capacity (AC24V ± 5%, 250VA).
In addition, the part where the model name is displayed is formed with a conspicuous color such as red or yellow for the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white on the background.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating the information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification display 1595 and 1596. In the present embodiment, the species name "CR Ai", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA" in the identification labels 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but some of them may be the same.
Although the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification display 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle at least a part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). By confirming the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since the area 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can open the inspector's name and the main board case 200z in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). Can be filled in. In addition, the inspector can also enter in the area 1575 the date and the like on which it is confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 has been fraudulent. Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than the case where only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easy for the inspector to confirm the characters and the like written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, since the peep portion 1574 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 through the peep portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the viewing portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, the cord portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the code unit 1572 is associated with the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 by using the code unit 1572. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the fraud in which the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by checking the seal portion 1562. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name, and can easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend back and forth and left and right. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Further, when the main body portion 580 extends back and forth and left and right, the predetermined information displayed on the seal portion 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body portion 580.
Further, various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed so as to have an angle at which the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized.
The main board case 200z, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have a ventilation hole.
In the main board case 200z, date marks are formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220.
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added at the time of manufacturing (molding) a case that is a plastic molded product.
As a feature of this embodiment, a component having a height that makes the ROM identification sticker (ROM seal / seal portion 1562) invisible is provided in the vicinity of the main ROM.

FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (d) are schematic views showing a procedure for assembling the cutting member, the open prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base portion centering on the protruding piece of the upper case piece, and FIGS. 239 (e) are shown. FIG. 240 is an end view of the projecting piece, FIG. 240 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before assembling the cutting member, the opening prohibition seal, and the cap to the sealing base portion 310, and FIG. 241 is an opening prohibition on the sealing base portion. FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which the seal is adhered, FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the opening prohibition seal, and FIG. 243 shows a state in which the cap is removed and the opening prohibition seal is broken. It is a perspective view, and FIGS. 244 (a) and 244 (b) are a surface view of an example of an opening prohibition seal and a partially enlarged view.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 has a partially different configuration from that shown in FIG. 226, but is the same in that the opening prohibition seal is broken when the cap is removed. It applies in the same way.

<Opening prohibited sticker>
As a means for sealing the main board case 200z having the above configuration, the opening prohibition seal 250 shown in FIG. 244 (a) is used. The open prohibition sticker 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and broken relatively easily, and is printed for security (for anti-counterfeiting) on the front surface and an adhesive layer is formed on the back surface. There is.
The band-shaped part 251 arranged along each of the upper and lower sides of the surface is an identification area (fine pattern area) 251 for authenticity identification (forgery prevention) composed of fine components including random micro characters. Is. Hologram 252, QR code (registered trademark) 253, and the like are provided as security means other than the identification area 251.
Random microprinting is a technology that inserts very small characters into a line or a part of a pattern. Since microprints cannot be duplicated with a low-resolution copier, it is one of the means to confirm the authenticity of the duplicate.

FIG. 244 (b) is a diagram in which a part of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the opening prohibition sticker 250 is magnified 10 times, and "opening prohibited" is shown in the pattern consisting of fine circles or dots. Hidden characters such as "security" are described.
By adhering the opening prohibition sticker 250 across the two case pieces constituting the main board case, the identification area 251 is surely broken when the seal is illegally opened. Even if the fraudster replaces the ROM and then closes the case body and the cover body again and connects the broken parts of the opening prohibition seal 250 to restore the original appearance, the identification area (other parts) remains. By discriminating with a magnifying glass, it is possible to reliably confirm the existence of the broken portion and the repaired portion.

Since fine characters such as random micro characters cannot be discriminated (reading, recognizing, and discriminating) with the naked eye, they can be discriminated only by magnifying them 5 to 10 times using a magnifying glass such as a loupe. For example, if each character has a minute size of 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish and read it with the naked eye, but it has normal visual acuity by magnifying it 10 times or 5 times. It is possible to enlarge the size to about 1 mm, which can be discriminated and read by the person who made it.
The identification area 251 of the opening prohibition sticker 250 of the present invention is not limited to random micro characters, and it is difficult for an observer who has at least a part thereof to have normal visual acuity to discriminate (read, recognize, identify) with the naked eye. Anything that contains very small (fine) characters, figures, symbols, or / and patterns may be used. By enlarging these minute characters and the like, the observer can discriminate, read, and judge the authenticity.
It should be noted that "difficult to discriminate with the naked eye" broadly includes cases where it is not impossible to discriminate with the naked eye, but it is difficult to discriminate with the naked eye, and cases where it is impossible to discriminate with the naked eye.
Needless to say, the method of arranging the identification area 251 on the opening prohibition sticker, its shape, and the like can be changed in various ways.

<Main board case main structure>
Next, the main structure of the main board case centering on the portion to which the opening prohibition seal is adhered will be described.
That is, when the main board case 200z is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, it straddles the edge between the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 (sealing base portion 310 = opening prohibition seal adhesive portion). By adhering the opening prohibition seal 250 to the opening prohibition seal 250, both case pieces cannot be opened without damaging the opening prohibition seal 250. That is, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided on one end edges in the longitudinal direction of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively, and both sealing portions 212 and 222 form a sealing base portion 310. .. That is, both sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at substantially the same position on one end edge in the longitudinal direction of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, so that both sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided when both case pieces are closed. It becomes a matching state and forms a sealing base part (opening prohibition seal adhesive part).

In the present embodiment, the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion (seal adhesive portion) A is composed of both sealing portions 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported in a state of being sandwiched between both protruding pieces. The cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the projecting pieces, or the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion A may be composed of only one projecting piece and may be formed by one surface of the one projecting piece. The cutting member may be supported.
That is, the cutting member 230 may be configured to be held by at least one case piece (protruding piece) at the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the two closed lower case pieces 210 and the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the upper case piece 220.
The tip surface of the seal bonding portion A forbidden to open (the tip surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222) constitutes the first bonding surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing portions 212 and 222 orthogonal to the first bonding surface A1 are. It constitutes the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 239, FIG. 240).
An accommodation space S for accommodating the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 240).

Further, a first opening O1 communicating with the accommodation space S is formed on the first adhesive surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) communicating with the accommodation space S is formed on the second adhesive surface A2. ing. In the present embodiment, the upper case piece 220 is formed with two second openings O2, and the lower case piece 210 is formed with one second opening O2.
The opening prohibition seal 250 covers the first seal adhesive portion 250A which covers all or a part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive which covers a part of the second opening O2. It has a second seal adhesive portion 250B to be adhered to the surface A2 (FIG. 244).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base portion so as to surround (conceal) the opening prohibition seal 250 with the opening prohibition seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310. The cap 240 is sandwiched between the cap body 241 surrounding the outer surface of both projecting pieces (sealing base portion 310) including the opening prohibition seal 250 and the sealing portions 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base portion 310. A locking portion 242 (FIG. 225) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked portion 236) in a closed state is provided, and the cutting member is integrally detached when the cap is detached from the sealing base portion. By doing so, the opening prohibition seal is broken and detached.
A tubular caulking member 203A (third screw stop piece 93) is provided on one side surface of the cap 240 so as to cover both sealing portions 212 and 222 and an opening prohibition seal as shown in FIGS. 222 and 228. When the cap is attached, the center hole of the caulking member 203A is in a state of communicating with the hole of the caulking member 203B ((first screw stop piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at the corresponding positions of the upper and lower case pieces). In this state, the cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting the caulking pin 94 (FIG. 225) and caulking.
In the illustrated embodiment, an example is shown in which the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portion 212 and 222 including the opening prohibition seal, but the cap is sealed so as to surround at least a part of the opening prohibition seal. It may be configured to be mounted on at least a part of the base portion (opening prohibition seal adhesive portion = cap mounting portion) 310.

The cutting member 230 intersects the blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction (b) (b) (FIG. 226) in which the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion 310 and the direction (b) in which the cap 240 is detached. It includes a fragment (second fragment) 233 that protrudes in the (orthogonal) direction. One piece of the fragment 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the sealing portion 212 side, and two pieces are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the side of the protruding piece 222.
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing portion 212 of the lower case piece, and two broken pieces 233 are formed in the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side. Two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed to receive each of the above.
By making the cutting member 230 a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and the opening prohibition seal is remarkably broken. It will be possible.

<Procedure for assembling each member and procedure for breaking the seal that prohibits opening>
Next, the procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the opening prohibition seal 250, and the cap 240 to the sealing base portion 310 will be described with reference to FIG. 241 focusing on the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In the present embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 are provided on the inner surface surface (cutting member support portion) of the projecting piece 222, and these locking portions 223 are mounted in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 241 (a). It is configured to engage with and hold the inner edge portion of the two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided on the rear end edge of the cutting member 230. Further, a broken piece 233 is projected on the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 that allows the breaking piece 233 to pass through when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 from the direction of the arrow protrudes. It is formed on a piece 222. Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. 241A and seated on the inner surface of the projecting piece 222, the surface of the cutting member is slid along the inner surface of the projecting piece 222. It can be attached while. At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while being fitted in the guide slit 224, it does not hinder the mounting.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing guide slits 224 in both sealing portions 212 and 222 as in the present embodiment, the cutting member is separated from the opening prohibition seal adhesive portion A together with the cap. At this time, the opening prohibition seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing portions 212 and 222 can be broken at the same time.
Although the present embodiment shows a configuration example in which the cutting member support portion is provided on the protruding piece 222 on one side of the upper case, it is also possible to provide the cutting portion support portion on the inner side surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case. be.

Further, the cutting member 230 is provided with claw-shaped locked portions 236 that can be elastically deformed at both end edges in the longitudinal direction (direction orthogonal to the mounting direction). The locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside from the gap between the two protruding pieces when the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the two sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 241 (b) and (c)). It is in. Therefore, when the cap is attached to the sealing base portion, the cap and the cutting member can be engaged with each other. Since the tip edge of the cutting member is also exposed from the gap between the two protruding pieces, smooth separation and breakage of the opening prohibition seal are possible when the cutting member is separated from the sealing base portion together with the cap.
After attaching the cutting member 230 to the protruding piece 222 in this way, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the opening prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222. do.

Next, FIG. 241 (b) shows a state in which the opening prohibition seal is adhered to the sealing base portion in a state where the lower case piece 210 is omitted, and FIGS. 241 (c) and 241 show a state in which the cap 240 is attached. Shows.
The cap 240 has a protruding locking portion 242 that can be engaged with the locked portion 236 of the cutting member 230 inside the cap main body 241, and the cap is used as a sealing base portion as shown in FIG. 241 (c). When mounted, each locking portion 242 elastically engages with the tip of each locked portion 236 to be temporarily integrated.
In this state, when the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion as shown in FIGS. 241 (d) and 243, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap is also integrally detached, so that the cutting members are both sealed. It is extracted from the gap between the stoppers 212 and 222. At this time, the blade portion 231 of the cutting member and the broken fragment 233 break the opening prohibition seal. That is, the blade portion 231 is configured to be detachable from the gap (first opening O1) between the two sealing portions 212 and 222 to the outside (outside), while the broken piece 233 is provided on the protruding piece 222. Since the guide slit 224 is configured to be detachable from the inside to the outside (outside), each part of the opening prohibition seal located in the moving path of the blade portion 231 and the broken fragment 233 can be broken.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a part of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the opening prohibition seal.

In the configuration example of the open prohibition seal shown in FIG. 244, the identification region 251 composed of random microprints is provided in the cutting member 230 in a state where the open prohibition seal 250 is adhered to both projecting pieces (second fragment). It is in the movement path of 233. Therefore, the identification region 251 is broken (broken) by the fragment 233 when the cutting member is separated together with the cap.
When the identification area 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade portion 231 at the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification portion is broken by the blade portion 231 (FIG. 243).
In the present embodiment, a cap is attached to the outer surface of the sealing base portion in a state where the opening prohibition seal 250 is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base portion 310 of the main board case so as to straddle the sealing portions 212 and 222 of both case pieces. The 240 is mounted so as to cover it, but at this time, the cutting member 230 held between the sealing portions 212 and 222 and the cap 240 are engaged and integrated. Therefore, the operation of breaking the opening prohibition seal 250 by the cutting member 230 is performed at the stage before opening the main substrate case, that is, in the process of separating the cap 240 from the sealing base portion.

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (tip in the detaching direction), the opening prohibition seal is displayed when the cutting member 230 protrudes outward from the abutting position of both sealing portions 212 and 222. The first seal adhesive portion 250A of the above is configured to break. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Further, the cutting member 230 includes a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction intersecting the direction in which the cap 240 is detached from the sealing base portion 310 (one side of the upper case), and is broken when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222. The fragment 233 is in a state of projecting onto the surface of the projecting piece 222 from the guide slit 224 provided in the projecting piece 222 of the upper case piece 220. If the opening prohibition sticker is adhered to the surface of the projecting piece 222 in this state, the broken piece 233 is in constant contact with the opening prohibition sticker 250 and is in a state of interfering with the opening prohibition seal 250. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the detaching direction by detaching the cap 240 from the sealing base portion, the broken piece may move along the guide slit 224 and the opening prohibition seal may be broken linearly. can. Since the opening prohibition seal portion (second seal adhesive portion 250B) broken by the broken fragment 233 corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, it can be directly viewed from the back side of the gaming machine, and fraudulent activity can be performed. Evidence of the break can be easily found from this fracture.
When the main board case is rotated with respect to the pedestal and opened as shown in FIG. 223, the opposite side of the cap 240 can be visually recognized.

In the present embodiment, assuming that the opening prohibition seal 250 is adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 is provided with a blade portion 231 for irreparably cutting the identification region 251. Each of the broken pieces 233 is provided to surely leave a trace of breakage on the appearance, but this is only an example, and only the blade portion 231 at the tip or only the broken piece 233 on the other surface may be provided. In particular, when the opening prohibition seal 250 is not adhered across both sealing portions 212 and 222 and is adhered only to the outer surface of one protruding piece, for example, the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 is broken. It suffices to provide fragment 233. That is, according to the present invention, it is possible to deal with both the case where the opening prohibition seal is adhered over both protruding pieces and the case where it is adhered only to one protruding piece.

In the example shown in FIG. 243, when the main board case 200z is opened, the opening prohibition seal (opening prohibition seal) 250 is broken in a state where the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the opening prohibition seal 250 is broken while the QR code (registered trademark) 253 can be read.

<Distribution control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protection case in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a component layout of the payout control board 60z according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 245, the payout control board 60z includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 that integrates (integrates) a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and other electronic components 605 such as capacitors and ICs, and an error. It is equipped with an error display 610 for displaying information.
The error display 610 may be composed of one 7-segment liquid crystal display or 7-segment LED. The 7-segment liquid crystal display is a liquid crystal display device composed of seven segments that can be individually turned on / off in order to express one character of a number.
The 7-segment LED is an LED display device composed of 7 segments that can be individually turned on / off in order to express one character of a number.
The error display 610 may further include a segment for displaying dots in addition to the seven segments for displaying numbers, similar to the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 below.
Not only the error display 610 but also the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 described below can use a 7-segment liquid crystal display or a 7-segment LED having a segment for displaying dots.
Although detailed description is omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60z, various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side of the printed wiring board as a mounting method for mounting the electronic components as in the main control board 50. The single-sided mounting method for mounting is adopted.

246 is a diagram illustrating a configuration of a payout control board protective case, where (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
247 and 248 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
The payout control board protective case (hereinafter, payout board case 400) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420.
Similar to the case of the main board case 200z, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are provided with control board storage units 411 and 421 for storing the payout control board 60z, respectively.
Further, the control board accommodating portions 411 and 421 each have a plate portion formed in a substantially rectangular shape and a flange portion that protrudes from the peripheral edge portion of these plate portions and surrounds one surface of each plate portion. It is formed in a shape that it has.

Of the flanges constituting the control board storage portion 411 of the upper case piece 410, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the upper case piece 410 is a hook piece 412 formed in an L shape. Are formed 5 each.
On the other hand, of the flange portions constituting the control board storage portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portion protruding along the two long sides of the lower case piece is formed in a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 422 into which the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Further, a hook piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422.

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove portion 422 of the lower case piece 420.
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of the arrow α in FIG. 247 along the left-right direction with respect to the lower case piece 420. Then, since the hooking piece 412 engages with the hooking piece 423, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined so as not to come off unless they move in the direction opposite to the arrow α.
When combined in this way, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inclusion portion shielded from the outside by the control board storage portions 411 and 421, and the delivery control board 60z is formed in the inclusion portion. Is stored. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60z, the integrated payout ROM 601 and the like are illegally replaced.
Further, a protective cover is arranged below the upper case piece 410 to cover the connection portion between the internal connector and the external connector provided on the internal payout control board 60z.

In the present embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a caulking member with the payout control board 60z sandwiched between them.
A caulking fastening portion 450 using a caulking member is arranged at an appropriate position along the edge of the dispensing board case 400, and the caulking member is driven into the caulking fastening portion 450 to form the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410. Locked in the closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 can be opened / closed and detached.
In the payout substrate case 400 of the present embodiment, two caulking fastening portions are provided (caulking fastening portions 450A and 450B).

The upper fastening piece 455 is provided at an appropriate position along the edge of the upper case piece 410, and the upper fastening piece 455 is provided with a through fastening hole 456.
A lower fastening piece 455 is provided so as to project from a portion corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420. A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455.
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged with each other by using the hook pieces 412, 423 and the insertion groove portion 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece are formed. Communicate. By driving the caulking member into the communicating fastening hole (caulking fastening hole), the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 cannot be released.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60z housed inside the payout board case.
It should be noted that only one caulking fastening portion is used for fastening the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 at one time. After removing the caulking member and adding / removing the fastening (after opening the payout substrate case 400), when the fastening is performed again, the caulking member is driven into the other caulking fastening hole left to fasten. That is, the payout substrate case of the present embodiment can be opened up to twice.
A position display portion similar to that of the main board case 200z is provided on the lower left side and the lower center on the front surface of the upper case piece 410.
Then, a sticker (error display sticker) 1565 indicating the content of the error display is attached to the position display section on the lower left side, and the person who opened the payout board case and the opening date and time are entered in the position display section in the lower center. A seal portion (opener display sticker) 1566 for the purpose is attached.

As shown in FIG. 247, the position display portion and the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached to the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410, but these are formed and attached to the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410. May be good.
This is the same as the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 of the main board case 200z.
The position display unit may also be provided on the outer surface side or the inner surface side of the upper case piece 410 as described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 230 for the main board case 200z.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick a seal part may take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 has a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as or on the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached, and an upper case surface to which the seal portions 1565 and 1566 are attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side on the same surface or the back surface.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display unit 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.

The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portions 1565 and 1566.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566.

In FIGS. 246 to 248, the position display unit 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion provided on the same surface as the seal (front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to any of the above. It can take an aspect.
The seal portion 1565 is attached in the vicinity of the error display 610 included in the payout control board 60z housed in the payout board case 400, and shows the content of the error display displayed on the error display 610.
The error display 610 displays the error number indicated by the seal portion 1565.
When a plurality of errors have occurred, only the most serious error among the errors that have occurred is displayed on the error display 610. Alternatively, all of the plurality of errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error display 610.
Further, an error may be notified by arranging a plurality of LEDs corresponding to the error numbers as the error display 610 and causing the LEDs corresponding to the generated errors to emit light.
Here, for example, the corresponding LEDs are vertically arranged next to the plurality of error numbers displayed on the seal portion 1565.
For example, when the "payout quantity abnormality error" corresponding to the error number 0 occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "0" in the seal portion 1565 is turned on, and the "main control not yet" corresponding to the error number 1 is turned on. When a "connection error" occurs, the LED arranged next to the error number "1" in the seal portion 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material, for example, an error display number in white and the content of the error indicated by the number are printed in a frame printed in white color.
Except for the display of the frame, number, and error content, the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 can visually recognize the transparent material of the seal portion 1566. Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is attached to the payout board case 400 which does not overlap with the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z at a position visible via the transparent material from all angles.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), the seal unit 1565 (error display explanation seal) describes, for example, the following contents corresponding to the errors detected by the main control board and various sensors.
That is,
0 Payout quantity error 1 Main control unconnected error 2 Payout switch error detection error 1
3 Payout switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Payout case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Ball out error 8 Game ball rental device unconnected cellar 9 Game ball rental device communication error.

In addition, "dish full tank error", "counter case error", "count switch error", "payout excess error", "game ball lending device unconnected error", "game ball lending device communication error", "door open" Error display of any one of "Error", "Abnormal winning error 1", "Abnormal winning error 2", "Ejection error", "Magnet detection error", "Prize frequency abnormal error", "Abnormal door opening error" May be performed on the error display 610, and the content of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the seal unit 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
The "dish full tank error" is an error that occurs when the saucer is full due to the payout of the prize ball or when the saucer is full due to the ball lending.
The "counter case error" is an error that occurs when the ball is clogged between the tank and the payout mechanism.
"Counting switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring that connects the payout control board and the payout device relay terminal board or the wiring that connects the payout device relay terminal board and the parts in the payout mechanism is not connected correctly. ..

"Excess payout error", an error that occurs when more than the requested number of payouts are made.
The “payout command error” is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
The "error in which the lending device for gaming balls, etc. is not connected" is an error that occurs because the lending device for gaming balls, etc. is not connected to the gaming machine.
The "game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is invalid.
The "door opening error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
The "switch not connected error" is an error that occurs when a disconnection of a switch on a game board such as a gate and a winning opening and a connection failure are detected.

"Abnormal winning error 1" detects five or more prizes to the right start port between the end of operation of the normal electric accessory and the start of the next operation, or after the power is turned on until the start of operation of the ordinary electric accessory. Since one or more prizes were detected in the meantime, a prize was detected in the upper right large prize opening when the upper right special electric accessory was not activated, so a prize was awarded to the lower right large prize opening when the lower right special electric accessory was not activated. This is an error that occurs when it is detected.
The "abnormal winning error 2" is an error that occurs because the game ball is detected in the switch in each winning opening for a remarkably long time.
The "discharge error" is an error that occurs when the error between the number of game balls that have passed through the switch in each winning opening and the number of game balls that have passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
The "magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning opening, near the left middle winning opening, near the lower left winning opening, near the middle starting opening, or at the lower right of the game board surface.
"Abnormal winning frequency error" is when an abnormal number of winnings is detected in any of the middle start opening, the lower left winning opening, the left middle winning opening, the upper left winning opening, or the right winning opening when a certain number of shot balls is reached. This is an error that occurs.
The "abnormal door opening error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 246 (c), the seal portion 1566 (opener display sticker / payout board management sticker) has an entry area 1567 for entering the opener who opened the payout board case 400 and the opening date. Be prepared.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not processed such as a watermark. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "Payout control board".
The entry area 1567 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1567, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
Except for each print and entry area 1567 (white background), the transparent material is exposed, and the electronic components on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z to a position visible via the transparent material from all angles.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 are positioned so as not to overlap the integrated payout ROM 601 from all angles.

In the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 246 (c), the entry area 1567 is integrated with columns for entering the "opener" and "opening date". On the other hand, as in the case of the seal portion 1560 of the main board case 200z shown in FIGS. 233 and 237, the fields for entering the opening date and the opening date are separated, and a viewing portion made of a transparent material is provided between them. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes easier to confirm the electronic components on the payout control board 60z through the seal portion 1566.

As described above, similarly to the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400 of the present embodiment has a caulked portion.
The payout board case 400 has two caulking portions. On the other hand, there are three entry areas 1567 provided in the seal portion 1566.
In the payout substrate case 400, the number of caulked portions does not match the number of writable times (the number of entry areas 1567) of the opened person or the like in the seal portion 1566.
The number of caulked portions included in the payout substrate case 400 is less than or equal to the number of openers and opening date entry fields provided on the payout substrate management seal (seal portion 1566). By providing more entry fields than can actually be opened, it is possible to deal with errors and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than when the number of caulked parts and the number of entry fields are the same. Is.

In particular, the upper case piece 410 of the payout substrate case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60bz (payout chip) 601.
As described above, the seal unit 1562 is an information identification unit for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Ai GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, the specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 has a model name "CR Ai GH101" and a manufacturer name "AA company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may have the same color as the seal portion 1562 having the same contents attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may have a different color.

The number of times that information such as the opened person can be written in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 differs between the payout board case 400 and the main board case 200z. Alternatively, the size of the writable area in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 is different.
In the description of FIG. 246, the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 are different seal portions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one seal including the contents described in the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be attached.

<Production control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the effect control board protection case in this embodiment will be described.
First, the substrate structure of the image control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 249 and 250.
249 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. 249 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of a component surface (surface) of the image control board, and FIG. 249 (b) is an image control. It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder surface (back surface) of a substrate.
Further, FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the configuration of the printed circuit board used for the image control board, FIG. 250 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 250 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component surface (surface) of the printed circuit board. , It is a figure which showed the structure of the solder side (back side) of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, a large number of electronic components including VDP are mounted on the image control board 70z.
In the image control board 70z, a printed wiring board 801 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used.
In the present embodiment, the image control board 70z has been described by giving an example of using the printed wiring board 801. However, this is only an example, and in the image control board 70z, wiring is performed on both sides and the inner layer surface of the printed circuit board. A multilayer printed wiring board on which a pattern is formed may be used.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, various surface mount type electronic components are mounted on the connection electrodes (lands) 802 formed on both sides (component surface 801a and solder surface 801b) of the printed wiring board 801. A surface mount method for mounting a connector or the like is adopted. That is, the image control board 70z is configured by using a surface mount type printed wiring board 801.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is composed of a printed wiring board 701 provided with a through hole into which a lead of an insertion mounting type electronic component (hereinafter referred to as “insert mounting component”) can be inserted into the main control board 50. The board other than the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 801 having a connection electrode connectable to a connection terminal of a surface mount type electronic component (hereinafter referred to as “surface mount component”).

FIG. 251 is an enlarged view showing a part of the printed wiring board used for the image control board.
As shown in FIG. 251, the printed wiring board 801 is composed of land groups 811 and 812 by lands 802 connected to connection terminals of one surface mount component, respectively.
For example, if the surface mount component is the IC 850 shown in FIG. 242 (a), the printed wiring board 801 is configured with a land group 811 for the IC 850 by a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the IC 850. Ru. In this specification, a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component are referred to as a land group.
Similarly, if the surface mount component is the connector 851 shown in FIG. 242 (a), the printed wiring board 801 has a land for the connector 851 by a plurality of lands 802 connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the connector 851. Group 812 is composed.
The plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of a first land 802a and a second land 802b having a shape different from that of the first land 802a.
Specifically, among the plurality of lands 802 constituting the land groups 811 and 812, the shapes of the lands 802b at the four corners are made larger than the other lands 802a (for example, about 1.5 times).

FIG. 252 is a front view illustrating the configuration of the effect control board protective case.
253 and 254 are exploded perspective views of the effect control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 252 to 254, a large number of electronic components including a host CPU, VDP, and an image ROM are mounted on the image control board 70z in the effect control board case (effect board case) 700.
As described above, in the printed wiring board of the image control board 70z, a double-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component side and the solder surface of the printed wiring board is adopted as the mounting method for mounting the electronic components. To.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720.
The effect control board and the image control board 70z are housed in the inclusion part composed of the control board storage part 711 included in the lower case piece 710 and the control board storage part 721 included in the upper case piece 720.
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725 unlike the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 described above.
Further, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, the main board case 200z, the opener attached to the payout board case 400, and the seal portions 1560 and 1566 for entering the opening date are attached. Not.
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a caulking portion for sealing the effect board case 700 as provided in the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400.

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 describing the explanation related to the volume setting is attached in the vicinity of the volume changeover switch 36z.
Correspondingly, a position display unit 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700.
As described above, the image control board 70z is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected.
Further, the image control board 70z is different from the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60z in that it has a function of simply outputting an effect image and an effect sound, and there is a risk that a ROM chip or the like may be illegally replaced. Is low.
Therefore, since it is less necessary to visually recognize the substrate surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the effect substrate case 700.
Further, for the same reason, the caulking portion (sealing portion) for sealing the effect substrate case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the seal portion 1566 provided with the opening person who opened the effect board case 700 and the entry area 1567 for entering the opening date is not attached either.

The position display unit 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720.
In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541 which is a sticking position mark indicating the position to stick the seal part 1580 can take the following form.
That is, the position display unit 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as or on the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal portion 1580 is attached, and on the same surface or back surface as the upper case surface to which the seal portion 1580 is attached. It is a mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display unit 541 is a linear convex portion provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.
The position display unit 541 is a linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal unit 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal unit 1580.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.

The position display unit 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580 on the same surface as the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion of the seal portion 1580.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion or concave portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner portion.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion provided so as to surround the seal portion 1580.

The seal portion 1561 provided on the 220 side of the upper case piece of the main board case 200z, the seal portion 1560 as the main board control number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the opening prohibition seal 250 extend the main control board 50. The distance from the virtual surface to be made is different. The distance of the QR code (registered trademark) of the opening prohibition sticker 250 from the virtual surface (main control board 50) is shorter (closer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the opening prohibition seal 250 is located at a position lower than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

The board case of the gaming machine including the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400, and the effect board case 700 has a case seal, a ROM sticker, a lead resistance color code, a network resistance identification code, and an IC as information display. There are model number code, capacitor model number code, performance display monitor, setting display monitor display information, etc.
These pieces of information have different distances from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200z, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Also, the distance from the top surface of the board case is different. As described above, the top surface of the substrate case is the place where the seal portion is attached, and is the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case is affixed to the highest point of the board case, the ROM seal is affixed to the ROM mounted on the board inside the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor and setting display monitor is affixed on the board. It is displayed on the performance display monitor and setting display monitor provided in. It is natural that the height of this information differs with respect to the control board.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ROM foot of the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) housed in the board case can be seen so that the ROM foot is not hidden by the sticker. , Stick the seal on the top of the board case. The ROM foot is not hidden by the seal portion even if it is a part when the board case is viewed from above.
In the present embodiment, the electronic component including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, but can be seen from the viewing portion when the angle is changed.
A transparent connector is installed as a connection part of the ROM to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) so that it can be seen at a glance that the ROM foot is not fraudulent.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has a display having a different distance to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, the lower case piece, and the cap (in the case of the main board case) has a distance based on the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). It is different, and the positional relationship is also different before and after. Further, in the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z), the color of the area where the electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer name is displayed.

<Board structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board housed in the main board case of the present embodiment is not limited to that described above, such as in FIG. 235.
FIG. 255 is a diagram for explaining other configurations of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, is a diagram showing a configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as that of FIGS. 235 and 236, but in the example shown in FIG. 255 (a), the main control board has a performance display monitor (performance display) on its component surface (surface). Unit) 600 and a setting display monitor (setting display unit) 650. Further, the main control board 50 includes a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the gaming machine, such as how much is paid out in the normal state (low probability time reduction timeless) excluding special states such as big hit, probability variation game state, and time reduction game state. be.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player launches 100 game balls at low accuracy, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls launched by the player is called the number of outs, and in the game machine 1, the number of outs is low for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all game states including jackpot, probabilistic game state, and time-saving game state. The base value of the time saving and the timelessness is calculated and displayed on the performance display monitor 600.
The base value of the low probability time saving time is expressed by (the number of payouts in the low probability time saving time / the number of outs in the low probability time saving time).

The performance display monitor 600 will be described. The performance display monitor 600 includes a display and a circuit unit on the main control board 50. A display unit in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized may be mounted on the main control board 50.
The display displays four-digit numbers side by side. Dot points are provided below the numbers. Of the four-digit numbers, the left two digits are the identification segment and the right two digits are the ratio segment.

FIG. 255B is a diagram illustrating the display of the performance display monitor, and the performance display monitor 600 sequentially and repeatedly displays the following four types of information.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), the values of "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", And "b3." Are sequentially switched and displayed on the identification segment, and the ratio is displayed. The corresponding base value is displayed in the segment.
The display switching time of "bL.", "B1.", "B2.", And "b3." Is about 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds. It is displayed for a second, and "bL.xx" is displayed again for 5.0 seconds.
“BL.” Shown in (b-1) indicates a low-probability time-saving timeless base value for every 60,000 total outs, which is a real-time value during measurement.
“B1.” Shown in (b-2) indicates a base value with low probability, short time, and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 one time before.
“B2.” Shown in (b-3) indicates the base value of low probability time reduction and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 two times before.
“B3.” Shown in (b-4) indicates the base value of low probability time reduction and no time in the total number of outs of 60,000 three times before.

Here, the performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be described.
The main CPU 50az starts measuring the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the first power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50az blinks "bL." In the identification seg and displays "---" in the ratio seg until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number of less than 300.
In (b-2), "b1." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.

After that, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability time-shortening payouts (low-probability payout number), and the number of low-probability time-shortening outs (low-probability out number), and starts the first measurement. ..
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5,999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6,000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
In (b-2), "b1." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
In (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
Then, the main CPU 50az stores the final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the second measurement is saved as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the third measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and "---" is displayed in the ratio seg.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the second measurement is saved as BB.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." Of the third measurement is saved as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low probability payouts, and the number of low probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." Is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time reduction and no time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
When the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." Is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." Is lit.
Further, in (b-2), "b1." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." Is lit in the identification seg, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio seg.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." Is blinked in the identification seg, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio seg.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50az repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200z of the present embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of the spinning machine (pachislot machine), in which case the gaming information display included in the main control board is the spinning machine (pachislot machine). Display information such as the role ratio of pachislot machines).
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a kind of game information display indicating game information of a game machine, and the game information of the game machine is not only the information of the base value of the pachinko game machine but also the role ratio of the pachislot machine. Also includes information such as.
A game information display that displays information such as the role ratio of a pachislot machine is called a role ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consolidation ratio for each 6,000 games (3) Condominium ratio for each 6,000 games (4) Cumulative concordance ratio (5) Cumulative combination ratio is displayed.
Here, the advantageous section ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total number of games. Further, the advantageous section is a section in which instructions such as push order navigation can be given.
The winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination ratio are the ratio of the number of payouts of bonuses (so-called bonuses) to the total number of payouts.
The winning combination ratio is calculated for all the winning combinations, and the continuous winning combination ratio is calculated for the operating of the continuous winning combination activator.
The game information display showing the game information of the game machine may also include such a role ratio monitor, but in the present embodiment, in particular, the monitor for displaying the base value of the pachinko game machine is described in detail, and the role is used. The detailed explanation of the ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 displays the set value of the gaming machine 1.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the probability of winning a big hit by changing the setting (FIG. 199 (a)).
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted in the main control board case 200z, has a single-digit display as shown in FIG. 255 (c), and is one of the setting values shown in FIG. 199 (a). Two values can be displayed.
These set values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be described. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of showing the player the installation of the setting changing device in an easy-to-understand manner, showing the game store staff the operation method and the like in an easy-to-understand manner, and preventing fraud related to the setting.
Numerical or non-numeric symbols can be used to display the settings. When a numerical value is used, any one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" corresponding to the set value is used for displaying the setting. When the set value is from "1" to "6", one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" according to the set value is selected. use.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers a transition to the "setting change state" and the "setting confirmation state". Operate using a key.
The setting key switch 660 can take two states of OFF / ON and can maintain each state. Also, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
The setting key switch 660 is mounted in the main control board case 200z.
The setting switch 670 is a switch for switching the setting when the setting is changed, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that the player cannot operate.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as an RWM clear switch 680 or the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RWM clear switch 680 turned on, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the "setting change state" for changing the setting.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RWM clear switch 680 turned off, the gaming machine 1 shifts to the "setting confirmation state" for confirming the setting.

The setting change process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of a setting person such as a game store staff. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned on by the operation of the setter and the power of the gaming machine is turned on in that state, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to the "setting change state". The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) In this state, when the setting switch 670 (or RWM clear switch 680) is pressed, the main CPU 50az sequentially changes the set value, and the changed (setting) set value is set to the setting display monitor 650. Display it.
(5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50az confirms the set value and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the above-mentioned performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az displays the setting value in the "setting change state" to any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
Then, when the setting value is determined by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50az starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

The setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be described.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is in the power off state, the setting display monitor 650 is in the off state.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the operation of the setter. The setting display monitor 650 is still off.
(3) In this state, if the power of the gaming machine is turned on without turning on the RWM clear switch 680, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50az ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the above-mentioned performance display monitor 600 also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az uses any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 to display the set value in the "setting confirmation state". conduct.
Then, when the setting confirmation state is terminated by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the operation of the setter, the main CPU 50az starts the performance display described above on the performance display monitor 600.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 includes connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower end of the main control board 50.
Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 have six openings provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to those shown in FIG. 233. It is arranged inside the portion 779.
The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are both provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at contradictory positions on the main control board 50.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not interfere with the visibility by the inspector who confirms the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors are provided in the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650. Does not interfere with the field of view of the inspector trying to see.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 of FIG. 255 is the same as that of FIG. 235 (b).
Further, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 255, a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used as in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described with reference to FIG. 255 is housed, FIG. 256 shows a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. The figure is shown. Further, FIG. 257 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255.
In the description of FIGS. 256 and 257, the members having the same configuration as that of the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 256 and 257.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 199 to 234 and 237 to 238, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, as an example, it is assumed to be transparent (made of a transparent material).
The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), respectively. In FIG. 256, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.

The seal portion 1560 will be described.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which the seal portion main body 1560A is watermarked.
The "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types such as those using a hologram and those that look different depending on the physical shape can be applied. ..
However, the seal member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to predetermined processing (watermark processing), has at least high translucency, and ensures a certain level of visibility.

The seal unit 1560 has a white background entry area (entry field) 1570, a code unit 1572, and an information display unit 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "main board control number" on the seal unit main body 1560A. I have.
The entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the character display described later attached to these areas are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is not exposed. It is a department.
The seal portion 1560 includes a plurality of non-transmissive portions, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z through these non-transmissive portions.
The code unit 1572, the information display unit 1573, and the entry area 1570 as the non-transmissive unit are provided at positions on the seal unit main body 1560A that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650.

On the other hand, in the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the areas other than the character display described later, which are attached to these areas, the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is exposed and translucent. Is a high translucent portion 1574.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that can be confirmed by looking through the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 can be visually recognized via the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50 via the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not the fraud is performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 at a position visible from all angles. ing.
Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the entire seal portion 1560 including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles. It is provided so that it is in a position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized via the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent part and the non-transparent part, the seal part 1560 includes the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, and the information display part 1573, and the entire seal part 1560 is the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor from all angles. It is provided so as not to overlap with 650.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 256, it cannot be said that the seal unit 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal unit 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 Is sufficiently distant from the connectors 771 to 776, and if all the conditions that the seal portion 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 are satisfied, the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other. There may be. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position shown by the broken line in the upper part of the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 256 (b).
In this case, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance at the same time.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be described in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200z and the opening date.
The entry area 1570 is a white base formed on the transparent material and writable by a pen or the like.
As an example, the entry area 1570 is provided with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, for a total of six, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The entry area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) substrate.
Headings such as "opener" and "opening date" are printed in black above the entry area 1570, and circled numbers indicating the entry area numbers are printed on the left side of each entry area.
That is, the word "opener" is printed in black above the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Above the entry area 1570 on the upper right, "Opening date" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 on the upper left. Circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 in the center of the vertical direction on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the lower left.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector's name is entered in the entry area 1570 on the left side, and the date when the main board case 200z is opened is entered in the entry area 1570 on the right side. .. The inspector may enter in the entry area 1570 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was fraudulent.

The cord portion 1572 is provided in the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. The code unit 1572 contains predetermined information. The code unit 1572 is a portion where information is read by another device. For example, a QR code (registered trademark), a barcode, or the like is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). There is. In the present embodiment, as an example, the code unit 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code unit 1572 is associated with, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “other device”) indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50.
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code unit 1572, is read by a camera provided in an information mobile terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access another device via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the information mobile terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Etc. are included. As a result, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and the information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information of the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not the fraudulent mounting of the main control board 50 having a different delivery destination has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The information display unit 1573 contains various information. The information display unit 1573 may include, for example, the same information as the identification display 529. In the present embodiment, as an example, the character string "EF001" is printed on the information display unit 1573 in a rectangular colored area (white in the present embodiment). The character string is, for example, a control number of the main control board 50. With the control number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from the information associated with the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display unit 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, and the like. Further, the rectangular area of the information display unit 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code unit 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The translucent portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the seal portion 1560 will be described.
The translucent part 1574 is the entry area 1570, the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, the notation of "main board control number", the frame, the person who opened the seal, the notation of the date of opening, and circles 1 to circle in the seal part main body 1560A. It is an area other than the notation of 3.
The translucent portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the entry areas 1570 having three lines in the vertical direction.
The translucent portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display unit 1573 arranged side by side and the two upper entry areas 1570.
The translucent portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the entry areas 1570 in two rows in the left-right direction.
The inspector can confirm the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 255 (a)) via the translucent portion 1574. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not the electronic component 595 has been tampered with, as compared with the case where the translucent portion 1574 is not provided. Therefore, the possibility of fraud can be reduced, and the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

The seal portion 1561 will be described.
The seal portion 1561 attaches the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 to a position visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as not to overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized via the main board case 200z.
The seal portion 1561 is provided so as to be positioned so as not to overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from all angles.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.
Since the description and the like of the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 237, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. Since the seal portion 1562 is the same as that in FIGS. 233 and 237, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 256 and 257 is provided with a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.
The RWM clear switch 680 will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the substrate case 200z is provided with a recess 688, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688.
Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 256 (b) and 257, the operation member 685 is provided at the corresponding position of the RWM clear switch 680, and when the staff or the like presses the operation member 685, the pressed operation member 685 causes the operation member 685 to be pressed. The RWM clear switch 680 is pressed. As a result, the RWM clear switch 680 is operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is a shaft support that can rotate and move between a first position in the recess 688 that closes the operating member 685 to make it inoperable and a second position that opens the operating member 685 to enable operation. Has been done.
The RWM clear switch 680 can be operated by moving the operating member 685 to the second position.
By doing so, the substrate case 200z need only be provided with an opening 687 having a size capable of inserting the operating member 685. Further, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200z.
The end of the RWM clear switch 680 may be exposed from the opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole for inserting a key in the end surface of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is exposed from the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the substrate case 200z.
The staff or the like can operate by inserting the key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 660.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with the keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200z.

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular, is a diagram showing a configuration of a component surface (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as that of FIG. 255, but in the example shown in FIG. 255 (a), the main control board 50 is provided with a performance display monitor 600 on its component surface (surface). The setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is also used in the performance display monitor 600, and the independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 258 is a main control board of a gaming machine that does not have a setting change function.
As shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 includes connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from the left to the right at the lower end of the main control board 50.

Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 have six openings provided in the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to those shown in FIG. 233. It is arranged inside the portion 779.
The performance display monitor 600, which is provided on the component surface of the main control board 50 and can also be used as the setting display monitor 650, is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50.
With such an arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not interfere with the visibility by the inspector who confirms the performance display monitor 600.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, the cable or harness hanging from the connector is in the field of view of the inspector who tries to visually recognize the performance display monitor 600. Does not interfere.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 of FIG. 258 is the same as that of FIG. 235 (b).
Further, in the main control board 50 of FIG. 258, a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board is used as in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component surface 701a of the printed wiring board 701 is adopted. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as in FIGS. 236 (a) and 236 (b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

259 is a diagram showing a main board case of the present embodiment when the main control board described with reference to FIG. 258 is housed, FIG. 259 shows a perspective view of the assembly, and FIG. 259 shows the front surface of the assembly. The figure is shown. Further, FIG. 260 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 259.
In the description of FIGS. 258 and 259, the members having the same configuration as those of the above embodiments (particularly, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237 and 238) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 258 and 259.
Further, similarly to FIGS. 199 to 234 and 237 to 238, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower portion on the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided in the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

Both the sealing portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a material having light transmission, and in the present embodiment, it is assumed that they are transparent as an example. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged so as to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), respectively. In FIG. 256, various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located on the front side of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are not shown.
In this example, the seal portion main body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing counterfeiting.
Since the configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as that in FIGS. 237 and 256, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Except for the code part 1572, the information display part 1573, and the entry area 1570 (white background), the transparent material of the seal part main body 1560A is exposed, and the electronic components on the main control board 50 should be confirmed through the transparent material. Can be done.
In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 can be visually recognized via the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the main control board 50 via the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not the fraud is performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.

Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the seal portion 1560 is attached to the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 at a position visible from all angles. ing.
Further, regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent portion and the non-transmissive portion, the entire seal portion 1560 including the entry area 1570, the cord portion 1572, and the information display unit 1573 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from all angles. It is provided so that it is in a position.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the integrated main ROM 502 can always be visually recognized via the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not the fraud has been performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is improved.
The seal unit 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal unit 1560, including the entry area 1570, the code unit 1572, and the information display unit 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from all angles regardless of the presence or absence of the translucent unit and the non-transmissive unit. It is provided so as to be.
Therefore, when the main board case 200z is viewed from the front, the performance display monitor 600 can be visually recognized through the main board case 200z.

In FIG. 259, it cannot be said that the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, but the seal portion 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 Is sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and if all the conditions of the performance display monitor 600 in which the seal portion 1561 does not overlap are satisfied, even if the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other. good. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position shown by the broken line in the upper part of the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 259.
At this time, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 at a glance at the same time.

The description of the seal portion 1561 and the like are the same as those in FIG. 237, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502.
The seal portion 1562 is the same as that in FIGS. 233 and 237, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the integrated main ROM 502 for controlling the game, the performance display monitor 600 for displaying the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 different from these are mounted on the main control board 50. There is. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50.
As a result, other substrate components 595 can be visually recognized via the transparent sealing portion 1560 and the main substrate case 200z. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly visually recognized via the main board case 200z.
By watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560 having the transparent portion and the plurality of non-transparent portions, which needs to be attached to the main substrate case 200z, duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented.
In addition, by attaching the seal part 1560 to the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 at a position that does not cover it, the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component without being affected by watermarking and multiple non-transparent parts, The visibility of the performance display monitor 600, which needs to be read accurately, can be reliably ensured.
For the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping part 1574). can. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board parts can be ensured by the transparent parts.
Further, in the non-transparent portion, predetermined information, for example, necessary information such as specifying the integrated main ROM 502 can be displayed. Different information can be displayed or entered in each of the plurality of non-transparent parts.

Further, when the main control board 50 is separately provided with the setting display monitor 650, the seal portion 1560 can be attached to the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 at a position where they are not covered with each other. It is possible to reliably secure the visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component without being affected by a certain non-transparent portion, the performance display monitor 600 that needs to be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650.
For the board component 595, which is less important than the integrated main ROM 502, performance display monitor 600, and setting display monitor 650, it is in a state through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping part 1574). Can be confirmed. Even if there are a plurality of non-transparent parts, the visibility of the board parts can be ensured by the transparent parts.

The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the lower end side of the main control board 50 instead of the upper end side. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged on the (opposite) upper end side opposite to the performance display monitor 600.
The performance display monitor 600 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are arranged at the (contradictory) ends opposite to the performance display monitor 600.
Further, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be arranged inside the main control board 50 instead of the end portion. Even in that case, be sure to arrange it at a position where it does not overlap with the cable, harness, seal portion 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.
In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RWM clear switch 680 may be provided on the payout control board 60z.
Further, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being arranged on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited to this.
If the setting key switch 660 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, it can be arranged at another position separated from the main control board 50.
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be shared with each other.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display unit and the setting display unit shall be based on the configurations shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 255 (c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When clearing the RWM, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned off and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is completed, in (3), the image display device 31z is displayed with a message such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values as described in FIG. 255 (b). In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when the setting is changed when the gaming machine includes a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed in, for example, the leftmost seg of the four-digit segs of the performance display monitor 600, but other segs may be used. Regardless of which digit is displayed, the set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. Further, the voice output device 34 outputs a voice for notifying that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed". The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being changed.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the performance display monitor 600 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). The change operation can be performed many times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed one step at a time for each operation.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2", and when the setting "6" is reached, it reaches "1". Return. During the change operation, the dots are not displayed along with the set values.
During that time, the image display device 31z continues to display "Settings are being changed" or the like to notify that the settings are being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The voice notifying that the setting is being changed is also continuously output from the voice output device 34. The light emission of the frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z also continues.
During the setting change, the history of the setting change may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to the operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the set value is confirmed by the value currently displayed by the performance display monitor 600. The performance display monitor 600 displays one of the set values with dots.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being changed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being changed. You may go.

After that, in (6), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "RWM clear has been completed" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit when the setting is changed when the gaming machine separately includes the performance display unit and the setting display unit.
The open detection switch 105z is ON, which is a major premise.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being changed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being changed.
The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the setting display monitor 650 displays the setting value for each change operation in (4). The change operation can be performed as many times as necessary until the setting change is completed, and the set value is changed one step at a time for each operation.
As described above, with the operation of the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the number increases by one step from "1" to "2", and when the setting "6" is reached, it reaches "1". Return. During the change operation, the dots are not displayed along with the set values.
During that time, the image display device 31z continues to display "Settings are being changed" or the like to notify that the settings are being changed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During the setting change, the history of the setting change may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to the operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting change is completed, and in (5), the setting value is confirmed by the value currently displayed by the setting display monitor 650. After that, the setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being changed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting change is completed" to notify that the setting change is completed instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being changed. You may go.
After that, in (6), the image display device 31z is displayed with a message such as "RWM clearing is completed" to notify that the RWM clearing is completed.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "RWM clear has been completed" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (7), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine includes a performance display unit that also serves as a setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

In (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current set value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed in, for example, the leftmost seg of the four-digit segs of the performance display monitor 600, but other segs may be used. Regardless of which digit is displayed, the set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, a voice is output to notify that the setting is being confirmed, such as "Setting is being confirmed". The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being confirmed.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like during the setting confirmation.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above voice or display ends.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed. You may go.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "power has been restored" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, the performance display unit, and the setting display unit at the time of setting confirmation when the gaming machine separately includes the performance display unit and the setting display unit.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the setting, in (1), the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RMW clear switch 680 turned off.
After the power is turned on, in (2), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "POWER ON" indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

In (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting value. If only one step is prepared, "P" or "1" is displayed. The set value is displayed with dots.
On the image display device 31z, a display such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed to notify that the setting is being confirmed. In addition, a voice notifying that the setting is being changed, such as "setting is being changed", is output from the voice output device 34.
The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for notifying that the setting is being confirmed. The set value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
The history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to an operation using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, or the like during the setting confirmation.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the setting confirmation notification using the above voice or display ends. The setting display monitor 650 is turned off.
At this time, the display and the voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed may be continued or may be terminated. The image display device 31z and the voice output device 34 display and voice output such as "setting confirmation is completed" to notify that the setting confirmation is completed, instead of the display and voice notifying that the setting is being confirmed. You may go.
After that, in (4), the image display device 31z is displayed with a display such as "power has been restored" to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "power has been restored" may be output from the voice output device 34 to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is an operation in which all the segments are turned on and then turned off repeatedly for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (5), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying the performance values. In the image display device 31z, the RWM clear notification continues.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-transmissive portions having low translucency. Is attached to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other is via the translucent portion between the plurality of non-transmissive portions and the substrate case. It is characterized in that the board component of the above is visible, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-transmissive portions having low translucency. Is attached to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion between the plurality of non-transmissive portions and the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal with watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processing sticker with watermark processing are provided, and the processing seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions having low translucency, and the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion having low translucency. The other substrate components are affixed to the substrate case at positions that do not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the main control unit can be visually recognized through a case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion having low translucency. The other board components are affixed to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible via the substrate case. It features a gaming machine that can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal with watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-translucent portion having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit, the information display unit, and the processing seal on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processing sticker with watermark processing are provided, and the processing seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-translucent portion having low translucency, and the processed seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and a seal having a plurality of entry fields that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal comprises the main control unit and the main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case between the plurality of entry fields, and the main control is performed via the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the unit is visible and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal does not overlap with the information display portion on the substrate case. A game that is affixed to a position and is visible through the translucent portion and the substrate case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display portion is visible through the substrate case. It features a machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided with a plurality of entry fields and a sticker having the same, and the sticker is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached via the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided with a plurality of entry fields and a sticker having the same, and the sticker is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an entry field that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal comprises the main control unit and the information display on the substrate case. The other board parts are visible through the translucent part and the board case, and the main control part is visible through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the information display unit can be visually recognized via a board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an entry field that can be entered by an administrator is provided, and the seal is placed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. It is characterized by a gaming machine that is affixed so that the other substrate components can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided on the substrate case at a position where the main control unit and the information display unit do not overlap with each other, and the seal is attached to the substrate case via the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the main control unit can be visually recognized and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided on the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. , Featuring a game machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an information description unit on which predetermined information is written is provided, and the seal comprises a main control unit and a main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an information description portion on which predetermined information is written, and the seal overlaps the information display unit on the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine which is affixed to a position where it does not become visible, the other board parts can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case. ..

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and predetermined information are described. The information description unit and the seal are provided, and the seal is affixed to the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the substrate case is attached. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and predetermined information are described. The information description unit is provided with a seal having the information description unit, and the seal is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit is visually recognized via the substrate case. It features a game machine that is possible.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-transmissive portions having low translucency. Is attached to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other is via the translucent portion between the plurality of non-transmissive portions and the substrate case. It is characterized in that the board component of the above is visible, the main control unit is visible through the board case, and the information display unit is visible through the board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-transmissive portions having low translucency. Is affixed on the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion between the plurality of non-transmissive portions and the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal with watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit and the information display unit on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processing sticker with watermark processing are provided, and the processing seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a plurality of non-translucent portions having low translucency, and the processed seal is attached to the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion having low translucency. The other substrate components are affixed to the substrate case at positions that do not overlap with the main control unit and the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the main control unit can be visually recognized through a case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal comprises a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, and the processed seal has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-transmissive portion having low translucency. The other board components are affixed to the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the information display unit is visible via the substrate case. It features a gaming machine that can be visually recognized.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processed seal with watermark processing are provided, and the processed seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-translucent portion having low translucency, and the processed seal has the main control unit, the information display unit, and the processing seal on the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit is visible through the substrate case and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A substrate on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a substrate case for accommodating the substrate, and a processing sticker with watermark processing are provided, and the processing seal is provided. Has a translucent portion having high translucency and a non-translucent portion having low translucency, and the processed seal is attached on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. The game machine is characterized in that the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and a seal having a plurality of entry fields that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal comprises the main control unit and the main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent portion and the substrate case between the plurality of entry fields, and the main control is performed via the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the unit is visible and the information display unit is visible through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal does not overlap with the information display portion on the substrate case. A game that is affixed to a position and is visible through the translucent portion and the substrate case between the plurality of entry fields, and the information display portion is visible through the substrate case. It features a machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided with a plurality of entry fields and a sticker having the same, and the sticker is affixed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and is attached via the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided with a plurality of entry fields and a sticker having the same, and the sticker is affixed to a position on the substrate case that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an entry field that can be entered by an administrator, and the seal comprises the main control unit and the information display on the substrate case. The other board parts are visible through the translucent part and the board case, and the main control part is visible through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the information display unit can be visually recognized via a board case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an entry field that can be entered by an administrator is provided, and the seal is placed on the substrate case at a position not overlapping with the information display portion. It is characterized by a gaming machine that is affixed so that the other substrate components can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display portion can be visually recognized through the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided on the substrate case at a position where the main control unit and the information display unit do not overlap with each other, and the seal is attached to the substrate case via the substrate case. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an administrator can fill in. The seal is provided on the substrate case at a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. , Featuring a game machine.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a translucent unit having high translucency, and an information description unit on which predetermined information is written is provided, and the seal comprises a main control unit and a main control unit on the substrate case. It is affixed to a position that does not overlap with the information display unit, and the other substrate components can be visually recognized via the translucent unit and the substrate case, and the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine in which the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls a game, an information display unit that displays game information, and other board components different from the main control unit and the information display unit are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The seal comprises a case, a translucent portion having high translucency, and an information description portion on which predetermined information is written, and the seal overlaps the information display unit on the substrate case. It is characterized by a gaming machine which is affixed to a position where it does not become visible, the other board parts can be visually recognized through the translucent portion and the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized through the substrate case. ..

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and predetermined information are described. The information description unit and the seal are provided, and the seal is affixed to the substrate case at a position not overlapping the main control unit and the information display unit, and the substrate case is attached. The game machine is characterized in that the main control unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case, and the information display unit can be visually recognized via the substrate case.

■ This specification has the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit for controlling a game and an information display unit for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a translucent unit having high translucency, and predetermined information are described. The seal is provided with a transparent information description unit and a seal having the transparent information description unit, and the seal is attached at a position on the substrate case so as not to overlap the information display unit, and the information display unit is attached to the information display unit via the substrate case. It features a game machine that is visible.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko machine 45 1st start port 47 2nd start port 70 1st image display device (display means)
70a Directed design (design)
110 Main control board (main control means)
110m Main control unit (main control means)
130 Production control board (Production control means)
130m production control unit (effect control means)

Claims (1)

When a determination is made based on the establishment of the start condition and the variation display of the symbol to be executed based on the determination is a predetermined special result, the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player
As a gaming state, it has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.
The symbol in the display means is based on the first starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning means, or based on the second starting condition established by winning the game ball to the second winning means. Variable display is feasible and
In the normal gaming state, the hold display according to the increase / decrease in the number of holds based on the first start condition can be displayed in a predetermined mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specific gaming state, a holding display according to an increase or decrease in the number of holdings based on the first starting condition can be displayed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode.

Images